Search Results

Search found 2100 results on 84 pages for 'disney stores'.

Page 84/84 | < Previous Page | 80 81 82 83 84 

  • UITableView not displaying parsed data

    - by Graeme
    I have a UITableView which is setup in Interface Builder and connected properly to its class in Xcode. I also have a "Importer" Class which downloads and parses an RSS feed and stores the information in an NSMutableArray. However I have verified the parsing is working properly (using breakpoints and NSlog) but no data is showing in the UITable View. Any ideas as to what the problem could be? I'm almost out of them. It's based on the XML performance Apple example. Here's the code for TableView.h: #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> #import "IncidentsImporter.h" @class SongDetailsController; @interface CurrentIncidentsTableViewController : UITableViewController <IncidentsImporterDelegate>{ NSMutableArray *incidents; SongDetailsController *detailController; UITableView *ctableView; IncidentsImporter *parser; } @property (nonatomic, retain) NSMutableArray *incidents; @property (nonatomic, retain, readonly) SongDetailsController *detailController; @property (nonatomic, retain) IncidentsImporter *parser; @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet UITableView *ctableView; // Called by the ParserChoiceViewController based on the selected parser type. - (void)beginParsing; @end And the code for .m: #import "CurrentIncidentsTableViewController.h" #import "SongDetailsController.h" #import "Incident.h" @implementation CurrentIncidentsTableViewController @synthesize ctableView, incidents, parser, detailController; #pragma mark - #pragma mark View lifecycle - (void)viewDidLoad { [super viewDidLoad]; self.parser = [[IncidentsImporter alloc] init]; parser.delegate = self; [parser start]; UIBarButtonItem *refreshButton = [[UIBarButtonItem alloc] initWithBarButtonSystemItem:UIBarButtonSystemItemRefresh target:self action:@selector(beginParsing)]; self.navigationItem.rightBarButtonItem = refreshButton; [refreshButton release]; // Uncomment the following line to preserve selection between presentations. //self.clearsSelectionOnViewWillAppear = NO; // Uncomment the following line to display an Edit button in the navigation bar for this view controller. // self.navigationItem.rightBarButtonItem = self.editButtonItem; } - (void)viewWillAppear:(BOOL)animated { NSIndexPath *selectedRowIndexPath = [ctableView indexPathForSelectedRow]; if (selectedRowIndexPath != nil) { [ctableView deselectRowAtIndexPath:selectedRowIndexPath animated:NO]; } } // This method will be called repeatedly - once each time the user choses to parse. - (void)beginParsing { NSLog(@"Parsing has begun"); //self.navigationItem.rightBarButtonItem.enabled = NO; // Allocate the array for song storage, or empty the results of previous parses if (incidents == nil) { NSLog(@"Grabbing array"); self.incidents = [NSMutableArray array]; } else { [incidents removeAllObjects]; [ctableView reloadData]; } // Create the parser, set its delegate, and start it. self.parser = [[IncidentsImporter alloc] init]; parser.delegate = self; [parser start]; } /* - (void)viewDidAppear:(BOOL)animated { [super viewDidAppear:animated]; } */ /* - (void)viewWillDisappear:(BOOL)animated { [super viewWillDisappear:animated]; } */ /* - (void)viewDidDisappear:(BOOL)animated { [super viewDidDisappear:animated]; } */ - (BOOL)shouldAutorotateToInterfaceOrientation:(UIInterfaceOrientation)interfaceOrientation { // Override to allow orientations other than the default portrait orientation. return YES; } #pragma mark - #pragma mark Table view data source - (NSInteger)numberOfSectionsInTableView:(UITableView *)tableView { // Return the number of sections. return 1; } - (NSInteger)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView numberOfRowsInSection:(NSInteger)section { // Return the number of rows in the section. return [incidents count]; } // Customize the appearance of table view cells. - (UITableViewCell *)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView cellForRowAtIndexPath:(NSIndexPath *)indexPath { NSLog(@"Table Cell Sought"); static NSString *kCellIdentifier = @"MyCell"; UITableViewCell *cell = [ctableView dequeueReusableCellWithIdentifier:kCellIdentifier]; if (cell == nil) { cell = [[[UITableViewCell alloc] initWithStyle:UITableViewCellStyleDefault reuseIdentifier:kCellIdentifier] autorelease]; cell.textLabel.font = [UIFont boldSystemFontOfSize:14.0]; cell.accessoryType = UITableViewCellAccessoryDisclosureIndicator; } cell.textLabel.text = @"Test";//[[incidents objectAtIndex:indexPath.row] title]; return cell; } /* // Override to support conditional editing of the table view. - (BOOL)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView canEditRowAtIndexPath:(NSIndexPath *)indexPath { // Return NO if you do not want the specified item to be editable. return YES; } */ /* // Override to support editing the table view. - (void)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView commitEditingStyle:(UITableViewCellEditingStyle)editingStyle forRowAtIndexPath:(NSIndexPath *)indexPath { if (editingStyle == UITableViewCellEditingStyleDelete) { // Delete the row from the data source [tableView deleteRowsAtIndexPaths:[NSArray arrayWithObject:indexPath] withRowAnimation:YES]; } else if (editingStyle == UITableViewCellEditingStyleInsert) { // Create a new instance of the appropriate class, insert it into the array, and add a new row to the table view } } */ /* // Override to support rearranging the table view. - (void)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView moveRowAtIndexPath:(NSIndexPath *)fromIndexPath toIndexPath:(NSIndexPath *)toIndexPath { } */ /* // Override to support conditional rearranging of the table view. - (BOOL)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView canMoveRowAtIndexPath:(NSIndexPath *)indexPath { // Return NO if you do not want the item to be re-orderable. return YES; } */ #pragma mark - #pragma mark Table view delegate - (void)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView didSelectRowAtIndexPath:(NSIndexPath *)indexPath { self.detailController.incident = [incidents objectAtIndex:indexPath.row]; [self.navigationController pushViewController:self.detailController animated:YES]; } #pragma mark - #pragma mark Memory management - (void)didReceiveMemoryWarning { // Releases the view if it doesn't have a superview. [super didReceiveMemoryWarning]; // Relinquish ownership any cached data, images, etc that aren't in use. } - (void)viewDidUnload { // Relinquish ownership of anything that can be recreated in viewDidLoad or on demand. // For example: self.myOutlet = nil; } - (void)parserDidEndParsingData:(IncidentsImporter *)parser { [ctableView reloadData]; self.navigationItem.rightBarButtonItem.enabled = YES; self.parser = nil; } - (void)parser:(IncidentsImporter *)parser didParseIncidents:(NSArray *)parsedIncidents { //[incidents addObjectsFromArray: parsedIncidents]; // Three scroll view properties are checked to keep the user interface smooth during parse. When new objects are delivered by the parser, the table view is reloaded to display them. If the table is reloaded while the user is scrolling, this can result in eratic behavior. dragging, tracking, and decelerating can be checked for this purpose. When the parser finishes, reloadData will be called in parserDidEndParsingData:, guaranteeing that all data will ultimately be displayed even if reloadData is not called in this method because of user interaction. if (!ctableView.dragging && !ctableView.tracking && !ctableView.decelerating) { self.title = [NSString stringWithFormat:NSLocalizedString(@"Top %d Songs", @"Top Songs format"), [parsedIncidents count]]; [ctableView reloadData]; } } - (void)parser:(IncidentsImporter *)parser didFailWithError:(NSError *)error { // handle errors as appropriate to your application... } - (void)dealloc { [super dealloc]; } @end

    Read the article

  • error in coding a lexer in c

    - by mekasperasky
    #include<stdio.h> #include<ctype.h> #include<string.h> /* this is a lexer which recognizes constants , variables ,symbols, identifiers , functions , comments and also header files . It stores the lexemes in 3 different files . One file contains all the headers and the comments . Another file will contain all the variables , another will contain all the symbols. */ int main() { int i=0,j,k,count=0; char a,b[100],c[10000],d[100]; memset ( d, 0, 100 ); j=30; FILE *fp1,*fp2; fp1=fopen("source.txt","r"); //the source file is opened in read only mode which will passed through the lexer fp2=fopen("lext.txt","w"); //now lets remove all the white spaces and store the rest of the words in a file if(fp1==NULL) { perror("failed to open source.txt"); //return EXIT_FAILURE; } i=0; k=0; while(!feof(fp1)) { a=fgetc(fp1); if(a!=' '&&a!='\n') { if (!isalpha(a)) { switch(a) { case '+':{fprintf(fp2,"+ ----> PLUS \n"); i=0;break;} case '-':{fprintf(fp2,"- ---> MINUS \n"); i=0;break;} case '*':{fprintf(fp2, "* --->MULT \n"); i=0;break;} case '/':{fprintf(fp2, "/ --->DIV \n"); i=0;break;} //case '+=':fprintf(fp2, "%.20s\n", "ADD_ASSIGN"); //case '-=':fprintf(fp2, "%.20s\n", "SUB_ASSIGN"); case '=':{fprintf(fp2, "= ---> ASSIGN \n"); i=0;break;} case '%':{fprintf(fp2, "% ---> MOD \n"); i=0;break;} case '<':{fprintf(fp2, "< ---> LESSER_THAN \n"); i=0;break;} case '>':{fprintf(fp2, "> --> GREATER_THAN \n"); i=0;break;} //case '++':fprintf(fp2, "%.20s\n", "INCREMENT"); //case '--':fprintf(fp2, "%.20s\n", "DECREMENT"); //case '==':fprintf(fp2, "%.20s\n", "ASSIGNMENT"); case ';':{fprintf(fp2, "; --->SEMI_COLUMN \n"); i=0;break;} case ':':{fprintf(fp2, ": --->COLUMN \n"); i=0;break;} case '(':{fprintf(fp2, "( --->LPAR \n"); i=0;break;} case ')':{fprintf(fp2, ") --->RPAR \n"); i=0;break;} case '{':{fprintf(fp2, "{ --->LBRACE \n"); i=0;break;} case '}':{fprintf(fp2, "} ---> RBRACE \n"); i=0;break;} } } else { d[i]=a; //printf("%c\n",d[i]); i=i+1; } //} /* we can make the lexer more complex by including even more depths of checks for the symbols*/ } else { d[i+1]='\0'; printf("\n"); if((strcmp(d,"if ")==0)){fprintf(fp2,"if ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); //printf("%s \n",d); memset ( d, 0, 100 ); //printf("%s \n",d); count=count+1;} else if(strcmp(d,"then")==0){fprintf(fp2,"then ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); count=count+1;} else if(strcmp(d,"else")==0){fprintf(fp2,"else ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); count=count+1;} else if(strcmp(d,"switch")==0){fprintf(fp2,"switch ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); count=count+1;} else if(strcmp(d,"printf")==0){fprintf(fp2,"prtintf ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); count=count+1;} else if(strcmp(d,"scanf")==0){fprintf(fp2,"scanf ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); count=count+1;} else if(strcmp(d,"NULL")==0){fprintf(fp2,"NULL ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); count=count+1;} else if(strcmp(d,"int")==0){fprintf(fp2,"INT ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); count=count+1;} else if(strcmp(d,"char")==0){fprintf(fp2,"char ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); count=count+1;} else if(strcmp(d,"float")==0){fprintf(fp2,"float ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); count=count+1;} else if(strcmp(d,"long")==0){fprintf(fp2,"long ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); count=count+1;} else if(strcmp(d,"double")==0){fprintf(fp2,"double ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); count=count+1;} else if(strcmp(d,"const")==0){fprintf(fp2,"const ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); count=count+1;} else if(strcmp(d,"continue")==0)fprintf(fp2,"continue ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); else if(strcmp(d,"size of")==0){fprintf(fp2,"size of ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); count=count+1;} else if(strcmp(d,"register")==0){fprintf(fp2,"register ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); count=count+1;} else if(strcmp(d,"short")==0){fprintf(fp2,"short ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); count=count+1;} else if(strcmp(d,"auto")==0){fprintf(fp2,"auto ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); count=count+1;} else if(strcmp(d,"while")==0){fprintf(fp2,"while ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); count=count+1;} else if(strcmp(d,"do")==0){fprintf(fp2,"do ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); count=count+1;} else if(strcmp(d,"case")==0){fprintf(fp2,"case ----> IDENTIFIER \n"); count=count+1;} else if (isdigit(d[i])) { fprintf(fp2,"%s ---->NUMBER",d); } else if (isalpha(a)) { fprintf(fp2,"%s ----> Variable",d); //printf("%s",d); // memset ( d, 0, 100 );} //fprintf(fp2, "s\n", b); i=0; k=k+1; continue; } i=i+1; k=k+1; } fclose(fp1); fclose(fp2); printf("%d",count); return 0; } In this code , my source.txt has if (a+b) stored . But only ( , + and ) is getting written into lext.txt and not the identifier if or the variable a and b . Any particular reason why?

    Read the article

  • NoClassDefFoundError and Netty

    - by Dmytro Leonenko
    Hi. First to say I'm n00b in Java. I can understand most concepts but in my situation I want somebody to help me. I'm using JBoss Netty to handle simple http request and using MemCachedClient check existence of client ip in memcached. import org.jboss.netty.channel.ChannelHandler; import static org.jboss.netty.handler.codec.http.HttpHeaders.*; import static org.jboss.netty.handler.codec.http.HttpHeaders.Names.*; import static org.jboss.netty.handler.codec.http.HttpResponseStatus.*; import static org.jboss.netty.handler.codec.http.HttpVersion.*; import com.danga.MemCached.*; import java.util.List; import java.util.Map; import java.util.Map.Entry; import java.util.Set; import org.jboss.netty.buffer.ChannelBuffer; import org.jboss.netty.buffer.ChannelBuffers; import org.jboss.netty.channel.ChannelFuture; import org.jboss.netty.channel.ChannelFutureListener; import org.jboss.netty.channel.ChannelHandlerContext; import org.jboss.netty.channel.ExceptionEvent; import org.jboss.netty.channel.MessageEvent; import org.jboss.netty.channel.SimpleChannelUpstreamHandler; import org.jboss.netty.handler.codec.http.Cookie; import org.jboss.netty.handler.codec.http.CookieDecoder; import org.jboss.netty.handler.codec.http.CookieEncoder; import org.jboss.netty.handler.codec.http.DefaultHttpResponse; import org.jboss.netty.handler.codec.http.HttpChunk; import org.jboss.netty.handler.codec.http.HttpChunkTrailer; import org.jboss.netty.handler.codec.http.HttpRequest; import org.jboss.netty.handler.codec.http.HttpResponse; import org.jboss.netty.handler.codec.http.HttpResponseStatus; import org.jboss.netty.handler.codec.http.QueryStringDecoder; import org.jboss.netty.util.CharsetUtil; /** * @author <a href="http://www.jboss.org/netty/">The Netty Project</a> * @author Andy Taylor ([email protected]) * @author <a href="http://gleamynode.net/">Trustin Lee</a> * * @version $Rev: 2368 $, $Date: 2010-10-18 17:19:03 +0900 (Mon, 18 Oct 2010) $ */ @SuppressWarnings({"ALL"}) public class HttpRequestHandler extends SimpleChannelUpstreamHandler { private HttpRequest request; private boolean readingChunks; /** Buffer that stores the response content */ private final StringBuilder buf = new StringBuilder(); protected MemCachedClient mcc = new MemCachedClient(); private static SockIOPool poolInstance = null; static { // server list and weights String[] servers = { "lcalhost:11211" }; //Integer[] weights = { 3, 3, 2 }; Integer[] weights = {1}; // grab an instance of our connection pool SockIOPool pool = SockIOPool.getInstance(); // set the servers and the weights pool.setServers(servers); pool.setWeights(weights); // set some basic pool settings // 5 initial, 5 min, and 250 max conns // and set the max idle time for a conn // to 6 hours pool.setInitConn(5); pool.setMinConn(5); pool.setMaxConn(250); pool.setMaxIdle(21600000); //1000 * 60 * 60 * 6 // set the sleep for the maint thread // it will wake up every x seconds and // maintain the pool size pool.setMaintSleep(30); // set some TCP settings // disable nagle // set the read timeout to 3 secs // and don't set a connect timeout pool.setNagle(false); pool.setSocketTO(3000); pool.setSocketConnectTO(0); // initialize the connection pool pool.initialize(); // lets set some compression on for the client // compress anything larger than 64k //mcc.setCompressEnable(true); //mcc.setCompressThreshold(64 * 1024); } @Override public void messageReceived(ChannelHandlerContext ctx, MessageEvent e) throws Exception { HttpRequest request = this.request = (HttpRequest) e.getMessage(); if(mcc.get(request.getHeader("X-Real-Ip")) != null) { HttpResponse response = new DefaultHttpResponse(HTTP_1_1, OK); response.setHeader("X-Accel-Redirect", request.getUri()); ctx.getChannel().write(response).addListener(ChannelFutureListener.CLOSE); } else { sendError(ctx, NOT_FOUND); } } private void writeResponse(MessageEvent e) { // Decide whether to close the connection or not. boolean keepAlive = isKeepAlive(request); // Build the response object. HttpResponse response = new DefaultHttpResponse(HTTP_1_1, OK); response.setContent(ChannelBuffers.copiedBuffer(buf.toString(), CharsetUtil.UTF_8)); response.setHeader(CONTENT_TYPE, "text/plain; charset=UTF-8"); if (keepAlive) { // Add 'Content-Length' header only for a keep-alive connection. response.setHeader(CONTENT_LENGTH, response.getContent().readableBytes()); } // Encode the cookie. String cookieString = request.getHeader(COOKIE); if (cookieString != null) { CookieDecoder cookieDecoder = new CookieDecoder(); Set<Cookie> cookies = cookieDecoder.decode(cookieString); if(!cookies.isEmpty()) { // Reset the cookies if necessary. CookieEncoder cookieEncoder = new CookieEncoder(true); for (Cookie cookie : cookies) { cookieEncoder.addCookie(cookie); } response.addHeader(SET_COOKIE, cookieEncoder.encode()); } } // Write the response. ChannelFuture future = e.getChannel().write(response); // Close the non-keep-alive connection after the write operation is done. if (!keepAlive) { future.addListener(ChannelFutureListener.CLOSE); } } @Override public void exceptionCaught(ChannelHandlerContext ctx, ExceptionEvent e) throws Exception { e.getCause().printStackTrace(); e.getChannel().close(); } private void sendError(ChannelHandlerContext ctx, HttpResponseStatus status) { HttpResponse response = new DefaultHttpResponse(HTTP_1_1, status); response.setHeader(CONTENT_TYPE, "text/plain; charset=UTF-8"); response.setContent(ChannelBuffers.copiedBuffer( "Failure: " + status.toString() + "\r\n", CharsetUtil.UTF_8)); // Close the connection as soon as the error message is sent. ctx.getChannel().write(response).addListener(ChannelFutureListener.CLOSE); } } When I try to send request like http://127.0.0.1:8090/1/2/3 I'm getting java.lang.NoClassDefFoundError: com/danga/MemCached/MemCachedClient at httpClientValidator.server.HttpRequestHandler.<clinit>(HttpRequestHandler.java:66) I believe it's not related to classpath. May be it's related to context in which mcc doesn't exist. Any help appreciated EDIT: Original code http://docs.jboss.org/netty/3.2/xref/org/jboss/netty/example/http/snoop/package-summary.html I've modified some parts to fit my needs.

    Read the article

  • PHP/MySQL Swap places in database + JavaScript (jQuery)

    - by James Brooks
    I'm currently developing a website which stores bookmarks in a MySQL database using PHP and jQuery. The MySQL for bookmarks looks like this (CSV format): id,userid,link_count,url,title,description,tags,shareid,fav,date "1";"1";"0";"img/test/google.png";"Google";"Best. Search Engine. Ever.";"google, search, engine";"7nbsp";"0";"1267578934" "2";"1";"1";"img/test/james-brooks.png";"jTutorials";"Best. jQuery Tutorials. Ever.";"jquery, jtutorials, tutorials";"8nbsp";"0";"1267578934" "3";"1";"2";"img/test/benokshosting.png";"Benoks Hosting";"Cheap website hosting";"Benoks, Hosting, server, linux, cpanel";"9nbsp;";"0";"1267578934" "4";"1";"3";"img/test/jbrooks.png";"James Brooks";"Personal website FTW!";"james, brooks, jbrooksuk, blog, personal, portfolio";"1nbsp";"0";"1267578934" "6";"1";"4";"img/test/linkbase.png";"LinkBase";"Store and organise your bookmarks and access them from anywhere!";"linkbase, bookmarks, organisation";"3nbsp";"0";"1267578934" "5";"1";"5";"img/test/jtutorials.png";"jTutorials";"jQuery tutorials, videos and examples!";"jquery, jtutorials, tutorials";"2nbsp";"0";"1267578934" I'm using jQuery Sortable to move the bookmarks around (similar to how Google Chrome does). Here is the JavaScript code I use to format the bookmarks and post the data to the PHP page: $(".bookmarks").sortable({scroll: false, update: function(event, ui){ // Update bookmark position in the database when the bookmark is dropped var newItems = $("ul.bookmarks").sortable('toArray'); console.log(newItems); var oldItems = ""; for(var imgI=0;imgI < newItems.length;imgI++) { oldItems += $("ul.bookmarks li#" + imgI + " img").attr("id") + ","; } oldItems = oldItems.slice(0, oldItems.length-1); console.log("New position: " + newItems); console.log("Old position: " + oldItems); // Post the data $.post('inc/updateBookmarks.php', 'update=true&olditems=' + oldItems + "&newitems=" + newItems, function(r) { console.log(r); }); } }); The PHP page then goes about splitting the posted arrays using explode, like so: if(isset($pstUpdate)) { // Get the current and new positions $arrOldItems = $_POST['olditems']; $arrOldItems = explode(",", $arrOldItems); $arrNewItems = $_POST['newitems']; $arrNewItems = explode(",", $arrNewItems); // Get the user id $usrID = $U->user_field('id'); // Update the old place to the new one for($anID=0;$anID<count($arrOldItems);$anID++) { //echo "UPDATE linkz SET link_count='" . $arrNewItems[$anID] . "' WHERE userid='" . $usrID . "' AND link_count='" . $arrOldItems[$anID] . "'\n"; //echo "SELECT id FROM linkz WHERE link_id='".$arrOldItems[$anID]."' AND userid='".$usrID."'"; $curLinkID = mysql_fetch_array(mysql_query("SELECT id FROM linkz WHERE link_count='".$arrOldItems[$anID]."' AND userid='".$usrID."'")) or die(mysql_error()); echo $arrOldItems[$anID] . " => " . $arrNewItems[$anID] . " => " . $curLinkID['id'] . "\n"; //mysql_query("UPDATE linkz SET link_count='" . $arrNewItems[$anID] . "' WHERE userid='" . $usrID . "' AND link_count='" . $curLinkID['id'] . "'") or die(mysql_error()); // Join a string with the new positions $outPos .= $arrNewItems[$anID] . "|"; } echo substr($outPos, 0, strlen($outPost) - 1); } So, each bookmark is given it's own link_count id (which starts from 0 for each user). Every time a bookmark is changed, I need the link_count to be changed as needed. If we take this array output as the starting places: Array ( [0] => 0 [1] => 1 [2] => 2 [3] => 3 [4] => 4 [5] => 5 ) Each index equalling the link_count position, the resulting update would become: Array ( [0] => 1 [1] => 0 [2] => 3 [3] => 4 [4] => 5 [5] => 2 ) I have tried many ways but none are successful. Thanks in advance.

    Read the article

  • Out of memory exception during scrolling of listview

    - by user1761316
    I am using facebook data like postedpicture,profile picture,name,message in my listview.I am getting an OOM error while doing fast scrolling of listview. I am also having scrollviewlistener in my application that loads more data when the scrollbar reaches the bottom of the screen.I just want to know whether I need to change anything in this class. imageLoader.DisplayImage(postimage.get(position).replace(" ", "%20"), postimg) ; I am using the above line to call the method in this imageloader class to set the bitmap to imageview. Here is my imageloader class import java.io.File; import java.io.FileInputStream; import java.io.FileNotFoundException; import java.io.FileOutputStream; import java.io.InputStream; import java.io.OutputStream; import java.net.HttpURLConnection; import java.net.URL; import java.util.Collections; import java.util.Map; import java.util.Stack; import java.util.WeakHashMap; import com.stellent.beerbro.Wall; import android.app.Activity; import android.content.Context; import android.graphics.Bitmap; import android.graphics.Bitmap.Config; import android.graphics.BitmapFactory; import android.graphics.Canvas; import android.graphics.Paint; import android.graphics.PorterDuff.Mode; import android.graphics.PorterDuffXfermode; import android.graphics.Rect; import android.graphics.RectF; import android.graphics.drawable.BitmapDrawable; import android.util.Log; import android.widget.ImageView; public class ImageLoader { MemoryCache memoryCache=new MemoryCache(); FileCache fileCache; private Map<ImageView, String> imageViews=Collections.synchronizedMap(new WeakHashMap<ImageView, String>()); public ImageLoader(Context context){ //Make the background thead low priority. This way it will not affect the UI performance photoLoaderThread.setPriority(Thread.NORM_PRIORITY-1); fileCache=new FileCache(context); } // final int stub_id=R.drawable.stub; public void DisplayImage(String url,ImageView imageView) { imageViews.put(imageView, url); System.gc(); // Bitmap bitmap=createScaledBitmap(memoryCache.get(url), 100,100,0); Bitmap bitmap=memoryCache.get(url); // Bitmap bitmaps=bitmap.createScaledBitmap(bitmap, 0, 100, 100); if(bitmap!=null) { imageView.setBackgroundDrawable(new BitmapDrawable(bitmap)); // imageView.setImageBitmap(getRoundedCornerBitmap( bitmap, 10,70,70)); // imageView.setImageBitmap(bitmap); // Log.v("first", "first"); } else { queuePhoto(url, imageView); // Log.v("second", "second"); } } private Bitmap createScaledBitmap(Bitmap bitmap, int i, int j, int k) { // TODO Auto-generated method stub return null; } private void queuePhoto(String url, ImageView imageView) { //This ImageView may be used for other images before. So there may be some old tasks in the queue. We need to discard them. photosQueue.Clean(imageView); PhotoToLoad p=new PhotoToLoad(url, imageView); synchronized(photosQueue.photosToLoad){ photosQueue.photosToLoad.push(p); photosQueue.photosToLoad.notifyAll(); } //start thread if it's not started yet if(photoLoaderThread.getState()==Thread.State.NEW) photoLoaderThread.start(); } public Bitmap getBitmap(String url) { File f=fileCache.getFile(url); //from SD cache Bitmap b = decodeFile(f); if(b!=null) return b; //from web try { Bitmap bitmap=null; URL imageUrl = new URL(url); HttpURLConnection conn = (HttpURLConnection)imageUrl.openConnection(); conn.setConnectTimeout(30000); conn.setReadTimeout(30000); InputStream is=conn.getInputStream(); OutputStream os = new FileOutputStream(f); Utils.CopyStream(is, os); os.close(); bitmap = decodeFile(f); return bitmap; } catch (Exception ex){ ex.printStackTrace(); return null; } }//Lalit //decodes image and scales it to reduce memory consumption private Bitmap decodeFile(File f){ try { //decode image size BitmapFactory.Options o = new BitmapFactory.Options(); o.inJustDecodeBounds = true; BitmapFactory.decodeStream(new FileInputStream(f),null,o); //Find the correct scale value. It should be the power of 2. final int REQUIRED_SIZE=Wall.width; final int REQUIRED_SIZE1=Wall.height; // final int REQUIRED_SIZE=250; // int width_tmp=o.outWidth, height_tmp=o.outHeight; int scale=1; // while(o.outWidth/scale/2>=REQUIRED_SIZE && o.outHeight/scale/2>=REQUIRED_SIZE) //// scale*=2; while(true){ if(width_tmp/2<REQUIRED_SIZE && height_tmp/2<REQUIRED_SIZE1) break; width_tmp/=2; height_tmp/=2; scale*=2; } //decode with inSampleSize BitmapFactory.Options o2 = new BitmapFactory.Options(); o2.inSampleSize=scale; // o2.inSampleSize=2; return BitmapFactory.decodeStream(new FileInputStream(f), null, o2); } catch (FileNotFoundException e) {} return null; } //Task for the queue private class PhotoToLoad { public String url; public ImageView imageView; public PhotoToLoad(String u, ImageView i){ url=u; imageView=i; } } PhotosQueue photosQueue=new PhotosQueue(); public void stopThread() { photoLoaderThread.interrupt(); } //stores list of photos to download class PhotosQueue { private Stack<PhotoToLoad> photosToLoad=new Stack<PhotoToLoad>(); //removes all instances of this ImageView public void Clean(ImageView image) { for(int j=0 ;j<photosToLoad.size();){ if(photosToLoad.get(j).imageView==image) photosToLoad.remove(j); else ++j; } } } class PhotosLoader extends Thread { public void run() { try { while(true) { //thread waits until there are any images to load in the queue if(photosQueue.photosToLoad.size()==0) synchronized(photosQueue.photosToLoad){ photosQueue.photosToLoad.wait(); } if(photosQueue.photosToLoad.size()!=0) { PhotoToLoad photoToLoad; synchronized(photosQueue.photosToLoad){ photoToLoad=photosQueue.photosToLoad.pop(); } Bitmap bmp=getBitmap(photoToLoad.url); memoryCache.put(photoToLoad.url, bmp); String tag=imageViews.get(photoToLoad.imageView); if(tag!=null && tag.equals(photoToLoad.url)){ BitmapDisplayer bd=new BitmapDisplayer(bmp, photoToLoad.imageView); Activity a=(Activity)photoToLoad.imageView.getContext(); a.runOnUiThread(bd); } } if(Thread.interrupted()) break; } } catch (InterruptedException e) { //allow thread to exit } } } PhotosLoader photoLoaderThread=new PhotosLoader(); //Used to display bitmap in the UI thread class BitmapDisplayer implements Runnable { Bitmap bitmap; ImageView imageView; public BitmapDisplayer(Bitmap b, ImageView i){bitmap=b;imageView=i;} public void run() { if(bitmap!=null) imageView.setBackgroundDrawable(new BitmapDrawable(bitmap)); } } public void clearCache() { memoryCache.clear(); fileCache.clear(); } public static Bitmap getRoundedCornerBitmap(Bitmap bitmap, int pixels,int width,int height) { Bitmap output = Bitmap.createBitmap(width,height, Config.ARGB_8888); Canvas canvas = new Canvas(output); final int color = 0xff424242; final Paint paint = new Paint(); final Rect rect = new Rect(0, 0, bitmap.getWidth(), bitmap.getHeight()); final RectF rectF = new RectF(rect); final float roundPx = pixels; paint.setAntiAlias(true); canvas.drawARGB(0, 0, 0, 0); paint.setColor(color); canvas.drawRoundRect(rectF, roundPx, roundPx, paint); paint.setXfermode(new PorterDuffXfermode(Mode.SRC_IN)); canvas.drawBitmap(bitmap, rect, rect, paint); return output; } }

    Read the article

  • Mysql - help me optimize this query

    - by sandeepan-nath
    About the system: -The system has a total of 8 tables - Users - Tutor_Details (Tutors are a type of User,Tutor_Details table is linked to Users) - learning_packs, (stores packs created by tutors) - learning_packs_tag_relations, (holds tag relations meant for search) - tutors_tag_relations and tags and orders (containing purchase details of tutor's packs), order_details linked to orders and tutor_details. For a more clear idea about the tables involved please check the The tables section in the end. -A tags based search approach is being followed.Tag relations are created when new tutors register and when tutors create packs (this makes tutors and packs searcheable). For details please check the section How tags work in this system? below. Following is a simpler representation (not the actual) of the more complex query which I am trying to optimize:- I have used statements like explanation of parts in the query select SUM(DISTINCT( t.tag LIKE "%Dictatorship%" )) as key_1_total_matches, SUM(DISTINCT( t.tag LIKE "%democracy%" )) as key_2_total_matches, td., u., count(distinct(od.id_od)), if (lp.id_lp > 0) then some conditional logic on lp fields else 0 as tutor_popularity from Tutor_Details AS td JOIN Users as u on u.id_user = td.id_user LEFT JOIN Learning_Packs_Tag_Relations AS lptagrels ON td.id_tutor = lptagrels.id_tutor LEFT JOIN Learning_Packs AS lp ON lptagrels.id_lp = lp.id_lp LEFT JOIN `some other tables on lp.id_lp - let's call learning pack tables set (including Learning_Packs table)` LEFT JOIN Order_Details as od on td.id_tutor = od.id_author LEFT JOIN Orders as o on od.id_order = o.id_order LEFT JOIN Tutors_Tag_Relations as ttagrels ON td.id_tutor = ttagrels.id_tutor JOIN Tags as t on (t.id_tag = ttagrels.id_tag) OR (t.id_tag = lptagrels.id_tag) where some condition on Users table's fields AND CASE WHEN ((t.id_tag = lptagrels.id_tag) AND (lp.id_lp 0)) THEN `some conditions on learning pack tables set` ELSE 1 END AND CASE WHEN ((t.id_tag = wtagrels.id_tag) AND (wc.id_wc 0)) THEN `some conditions on webclasses tables set` ELSE 1 END AND CASE WHEN (od.id_od0) THEN od.id_author = td.id_tutor and some conditions on Orders table's fields ELSE 1 END AND ( t.tag LIKE "%Dictatorship%" OR t.tag LIKE "%democracy%") group by td.id_tutor HAVING key_1_total_matches = 1 AND key_2_total_matches = 1 order by tutor_popularity desc, u.surname asc, u.name asc limit 0,20 ===================================================================== What does the above query do? Does AND logic search on the search keywords (2 in this example - "Democracy" and "Dictatorship"). Returns only those tutors for which both the keywords are present in the union of the two sets - tutors details and details of all the packs created by a tutor. To make things clear - Suppose a Tutor name "Sandeepan Nath" has created a pack "My first pack", then:- Searching "Sandeepan Nath" returns Sandeepan Nath. Searching "Sandeepan first" returns Sandeepan Nath. Searching "Sandeepan second" does not return Sandeepan Nath. ====================================================================================== The problem The results returned by the above query are correct (AND logic working as per expectation), but the time taken by the query on heavily loaded databases is like 25 seconds as against normal query timings of the order of 0.005 - 0.0002 seconds, which makes it totally unusable. It is possible that some of the delay is being caused because all the possible fields have not yet been indexed, but I would appreciate a better query as a solution, optimized as much as possible, displaying the same results ========================================================================================== How tags work in this system? When a tutor registers, tags are entered and tag relations are created with respect to tutor's details like name, surname etc. When a Tutors create packs, again tags are entered and tag relations are created with respect to pack's details like pack name, description etc. tag relations for tutors stored in tutors_tag_relations and those for packs stored in learning_packs_tag_relations. All individual tags are stored in tags table. ==================================================================== The tables Most of the following tables contain many other fields which I have omitted here. CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS users ( id_user int(10) unsigned NOT NULL AUTO_INCREMENT, name varchar(100) NOT NULL DEFAULT '', surname varchar(155) NOT NULL DEFAULT '', PRIMARY KEY (id_user) ) ENGINE=InnoDB DEFAULT CHARSET=utf8 AUTO_INCREMENT=636 ; CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS tutor_details ( id_tutor int(10) NOT NULL AUTO_INCREMENT, id_user int(10) NOT NULL DEFAULT '0', PRIMARY KEY (id_tutor), KEY Users_FKIndex1 (id_user) ) ENGINE=InnoDB DEFAULT CHARSET=latin1 AUTO_INCREMENT=51 ; CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS orders ( id_order int(10) unsigned NOT NULL AUTO_INCREMENT, PRIMARY KEY (id_order), KEY Orders_FKIndex1 (id_user), ) ENGINE=InnoDB DEFAULT CHARSET=utf8 AUTO_INCREMENT=275 ; ALTER TABLE orders ADD CONSTRAINT Orders_ibfk_1 FOREIGN KEY (id_user) REFERENCES users (id_user) ON DELETE NO ACTION ON UPDATE NO ACTION; CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS order_details ( id_od int(10) unsigned NOT NULL AUTO_INCREMENT, id_order int(10) unsigned NOT NULL DEFAULT '0', id_author int(10) NOT NULL DEFAULT '0', PRIMARY KEY (id_od), KEY Order_Details_FKIndex1 (id_order) ) ENGINE=InnoDB DEFAULT CHARSET=utf8 AUTO_INCREMENT=284 ; ALTER TABLE order_details ADD CONSTRAINT Order_Details_ibfk_1 FOREIGN KEY (id_order) REFERENCES orders (id_order) ON DELETE NO ACTION ON UPDATE NO ACTION; CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS learning_packs ( id_lp int(10) unsigned NOT NULL AUTO_INCREMENT, id_author int(10) unsigned NOT NULL DEFAULT '0', PRIMARY KEY (id_lp), KEY Learning_Packs_FKIndex2 (id_author), KEY id_lp (id_lp) ) ENGINE=InnoDB DEFAULT CHARSET=utf8 AUTO_INCREMENT=23 ; CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS tags ( id_tag int(10) unsigned NOT NULL AUTO_INCREMENT, tag varchar(255) DEFAULT NULL, PRIMARY KEY (id_tag), UNIQUE KEY tag (tag), KEY id_tag (id_tag), KEY tag_2 (tag), KEY tag_3 (tag) ) ENGINE=InnoDB DEFAULT CHARSET=latin1 AUTO_INCREMENT=3419 ; CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS tutors_tag_relations ( id_tag int(10) unsigned NOT NULL DEFAULT '0', id_tutor int(10) DEFAULT NULL, KEY Tutors_Tag_Relations (id_tag), KEY id_tutor (id_tutor), KEY id_tag (id_tag) ) ENGINE=InnoDB DEFAULT CHARSET=latin1; ALTER TABLE tutors_tag_relations ADD CONSTRAINT Tutors_Tag_Relations_ibfk_1 FOREIGN KEY (id_tag) REFERENCES tags (id_tag) ON DELETE NO ACTION ON UPDATE NO ACTION; CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS learning_packs_tag_relations ( id_tag int(10) unsigned NOT NULL DEFAULT '0', id_tutor int(10) DEFAULT NULL, id_lp int(10) unsigned DEFAULT NULL, KEY Learning_Packs_Tag_Relations_FKIndex1 (id_tag), KEY id_lp (id_lp), KEY id_tag (id_tag) ) ENGINE=InnoDB DEFAULT CHARSET=latin1; ALTER TABLE learning_packs_tag_relations ADD CONSTRAINT Learning_Packs_Tag_Relations_ibfk_1 FOREIGN KEY (id_tag) REFERENCES tags (id_tag) ON DELETE NO ACTION ON UPDATE NO ACTION; =================================================================================== Following is the exact query (this includes classes also - tutors can create classes and search terms are matched with classes created by tutors):- select count(distinct(od.id_od)) as tutor_popularity, CASE WHEN (IF((wc.id_wc 0), ( wc.wc_api_status = 1 AND wc.wc_type = 0 AND wc.class_date '2010-06-01 22:00:56' AND wccp.status = 1 AND (wccp.country_code='IE' or wccp.country_code IN ('INT'))), 0)) THEN 1 ELSE 0 END as 'classes_published', CASE WHEN (IF((lp.id_lp 0), (lp.id_status = 1 AND lp.published = 1 AND lpcp.status = 1 AND (lpcp.country_code='IE' or lpcp.country_code IN ('INT'))),0)) THEN 1 ELSE 0 END as 'packs_published', td . * , u . * from Tutor_Details AS td JOIN Users as u on u.id_user = td.id_user LEFT JOIN Learning_Packs_Tag_Relations AS lptagrels ON td.id_tutor = lptagrels.id_tutor LEFT JOIN Learning_Packs AS lp ON lptagrels.id_lp = lp.id_lp LEFT JOIN Learning_Packs_Categories AS lpc ON lpc.id_lp_cat = lp.id_lp_cat LEFT JOIN Learning_Packs_Categories AS lpcp ON lpcp.id_lp_cat = lpc.id_parent LEFT JOIN Learning_Pack_Content as lpct on (lp.id_lp = lpct.id_lp) LEFT JOIN Webclasses_Tag_Relations AS wtagrels ON td.id_tutor = wtagrels.id_tutor LEFT JOIN WebClasses AS wc ON wtagrels.id_wc = wc.id_wc LEFT JOIN Learning_Packs_Categories AS wcc ON wcc.id_lp_cat = wc.id_wp_cat LEFT JOIN Learning_Packs_Categories AS wccp ON wccp.id_lp_cat = wcc.id_parent LEFT JOIN Order_Details as od on td.id_tutor = od.id_author LEFT JOIN Orders as o on od.id_order = o.id_order LEFT JOIN Tutors_Tag_Relations as ttagrels ON td.id_tutor = ttagrels.id_tutor JOIN Tags as t on (t.id_tag = ttagrels.id_tag) OR (t.id_tag = lptagrels.id_tag) OR (t.id_tag = wtagrels.id_tag) where (u.country='IE' or u.country IN ('INT')) AND CASE WHEN ((t.id_tag = lptagrels.id_tag) AND (lp.id_lp 0)) THEN lp.id_status = 1 AND lp.published = 1 AND lpcp.status = 1 AND (lpcp.country_code='IE' or lpcp.country_code IN ('INT')) ELSE 1 END AND CASE WHEN ((t.id_tag = wtagrels.id_tag) AND (wc.id_wc 0)) THEN wc.wc_api_status = 1 AND wc.wc_type = 0 AND wc.class_date '2010-06-01 22:00:56' AND wccp.status = 1 AND (wccp.country_code='IE' or wccp.country_code IN ('INT')) ELSE 1 END AND CASE WHEN (od.id_od0) THEN od.id_author = td.id_tutor and o.order_status = 'paid' and CASE WHEN (od.id_wc 0) THEN od.can_attend_class=1 ELSE 1 END ELSE 1 END AND 1 group by td.id_tutor order by tutor_popularity desc, u.surname asc, u.name asc limit 0,20 Please note - The provided database structure does not show all the fields and tables as in this query

    Read the article

  • Why can't I assign a scalar value to a class using shorthand, but instead declare it first, then set

    - by ~delan-azabani
    I am writing a UTF-8 library for C++ as an exercise as this is my first real-world C++ code. So far, I've implemented concatenation, character indexing, parsing and encoding UTF-8 in a class called "ustring". It looks like it's working, but two (seemingly equivalent) ways of declaring a new ustring behave differently. The first way: ustring a; a = "test"; works, and the overloaded "=" operator parses the string into the class (which stores the Unicode strings as an dynamically allocated int pointer). However, the following does not work: ustring a = "test"; because I get the following error: test.cpp:4: error: conversion from ‘const char [5]’ to non-scalar type ‘ustring’ requested Is there a way to workaround this error? It probably is a problem with my code, though. The following is what I've written so far for the library: #include <cstdlib> #include <cstring> class ustring { int * values; long len; public: long length() { return len; } ustring * operator=(ustring input) { len = input.len; values = (int *) malloc(sizeof(int) * len); for (long i = 0; i < len; i++) values[i] = input.values[i]; return this; } ustring * operator=(char input[]) { len = sizeof(input); values = (int *) malloc(0); long s = 0; // s = number of parsed chars int a, b, c, d, contNeed = 0, cont = 0; for (long i = 0; i < sizeof(input); i++) if (input[i] < 0x80) { // ASCII, direct copy (00-7f) values = (int *) realloc(values, sizeof(int) * ++s); values[s - 1] = input[i]; } else if (input[i] < 0xc0) { // this is a continuation (80-bf) if (cont == contNeed) { // no need for continuation, use U+fffd values = (int *) realloc(values, sizeof(int) * ++s); values[s - 1] = 0xfffd; } cont = cont + 1; values[s - 1] = values[s - 1] | ((input[i] & 0x3f) << ((contNeed - cont) * 6)); if (cont == contNeed) cont = contNeed = 0; } else if (input[i] < 0xc2) { // invalid byte, use U+fffd (c0-c1) values = (int *) realloc(values, sizeof(int) * ++s); values[s - 1] = 0xfffd; } else if (input[i] < 0xe0) { // start of 2-byte sequence (c2-df) contNeed = 1; values = (int *) realloc(values, sizeof(int) * ++s); values[s - 1] = (input[i] & 0x1f) << 6; } else if (input[i] < 0xf0) { // start of 3-byte sequence (e0-ef) contNeed = 2; values = (int *) realloc(values, sizeof(int) * ++s); values[s - 1] = (input[i] & 0x0f) << 12; } else if (input[i] < 0xf5) { // start of 4-byte sequence (f0-f4) contNeed = 3; values = (int *) realloc(values, sizeof(int) * ++s); values[s - 1] = (input[i] & 0x07) << 18; } else { // restricted or invalid (f5-ff) values = (int *) realloc(values, sizeof(int) * ++s); values[s - 1] = 0xfffd; } return this; } ustring operator+(ustring input) { ustring result; result.len = len + input.len; result.values = (int *) malloc(sizeof(int) * result.len); for (long i = 0; i < len; i++) result.values[i] = values[i]; for (long i = 0; i < input.len; i++) result.values[i + len] = input.values[i]; return result; } ustring operator[](long index) { ustring result; result.len = 1; result.values = (int *) malloc(sizeof(int)); result.values[0] = values[index]; return result; } char * encode() { char * r = (char *) malloc(0); long s = 0; for (long i = 0; i < len; i++) { if (values[i] < 0x80) r = (char *) realloc(r, s + 1), r[s + 0] = char(values[i]), s += 1; else if (values[i] < 0x800) r = (char *) realloc(r, s + 2), r[s + 0] = char(values[i] >> 6 | 0x60), r[s + 1] = char(values[i] & 0x3f | 0x80), s += 2; else if (values[i] < 0x10000) r = (char *) realloc(r, s + 3), r[s + 0] = char(values[i] >> 12 | 0xe0), r[s + 1] = char(values[i] >> 6 & 0x3f | 0x80), r[s + 2] = char(values[i] & 0x3f | 0x80), s += 3; else r = (char *) realloc(r, s + 4), r[s + 0] = char(values[i] >> 18 | 0xf0), r[s + 1] = char(values[i] >> 12 & 0x3f | 0x80), r[s + 2] = char(values[i] >> 6 & 0x3f | 0x80), r[s + 3] = char(values[i] & 0x3f | 0x80), s += 4; } return r; } };

    Read the article

  • What's New in ASP.NET 4

    - by Navaneeth
    The .NET Framework version 4 includes enhancements for ASP.NET 4 in targeted areas. Visual Studio 2010 and Microsoft Visual Web Developer Express also include enhancements and new features for improved Web development. This document provides an overview of many of the new features that are included in the upcoming release. This topic contains the following sections: ASP.NET Core Services ASP.NET Web Forms ASP.NET MVC Dynamic Data ASP.NET Chart Control Visual Web Developer Enhancements Web Application Deployment with Visual Studio 2010 Enhancements to ASP.NET Multi-Targeting ASP.NET Core Services ASP.NET 4 introduces many features that improve core ASP.NET services such as output caching and session state storage. Extensible Output Caching Since the time that ASP.NET 1.0 was released, output caching has enabled developers to store the generated output of pages, controls, and HTTP responses in memory. On subsequent Web requests, ASP.NET can serve content more quickly by retrieving the generated output from memory instead of regenerating the output from scratch. However, this approach has a limitation — generated content always has to be stored in memory. On servers that experience heavy traffic, the memory requirements for output caching can compete with memory requirements for other parts of a Web application. ASP.NET 4 adds extensibility to output caching that enables you to configure one or more custom output-cache providers. Output-cache providers can use any storage mechanism to persist HTML content. These storage options can include local or remote disks, cloud storage, and distributed cache engines. Output-cache provider extensibility in ASP.NET 4 lets you design more aggressive and more intelligent output-caching strategies for Web sites. For example, you can create an output-cache provider that caches the "Top 10" pages of a site in memory, while caching pages that get lower traffic on disk. Alternatively, you can cache every vary-by combination for a rendered page, but use a distributed cache so that the memory consumption is offloaded from front-end Web servers. You create a custom output-cache provider as a class that derives from the OutputCacheProvider type. You can then configure the provider in the Web.config file by using the new providers subsection of the outputCache element For more information and for examples that show how to configure the output cache, see outputCache Element for caching (ASP.NET Settings Schema). For more information about the classes that support caching, see the documentation for the OutputCache and OutputCacheProvider classes. By default, in ASP.NET 4, all HTTP responses, rendered pages, and controls use the in-memory output cache. The defaultProvider attribute for ASP.NET is AspNetInternalProvider. You can change the default output-cache provider used for a Web application by specifying a different provider name for defaultProvider attribute. In addition, you can select different output-cache providers for individual control and for individual requests and programmatically specify which provider to use. For more information, see the HttpApplication.GetOutputCacheProviderName(HttpContext) method. The easiest way to choose a different output-cache provider for different Web user controls is to do so declaratively by using the new providerName attribute in a page or control directive, as shown in the following example: <%@ OutputCache Duration="60" VaryByParam="None" providerName="DiskCache" %> Preloading Web Applications Some Web applications must load large amounts of data or must perform expensive initialization processing before serving the first request. In earlier versions of ASP.NET, for these situations you had to devise custom approaches to "wake up" an ASP.NET application and then run initialization code during the Application_Load method in the Global.asax file. To address this scenario, a new application preload manager (autostart feature) is available when ASP.NET 4 runs on IIS 7.5 on Windows Server 2008 R2. The preload feature provides a controlled approach for starting up an application pool, initializing an ASP.NET application, and then accepting HTTP requests. It lets you perform expensive application initialization prior to processing the first HTTP request. For example, you can use the application preload manager to initialize an application and then signal a load-balancer that the application was initialized and ready to accept HTTP traffic. To use the application preload manager, an IIS administrator sets an application pool in IIS 7.5 to be automatically started by using the following configuration in the applicationHost.config file: <applicationPools> <add name="MyApplicationPool" startMode="AlwaysRunning" /> </applicationPools> Because a single application pool can contain multiple applications, you specify individual applications to be automatically started by using the following configuration in the applicationHost.config file: <sites> <site name="MySite" id="1"> <application path="/" serviceAutoStartEnabled="true" serviceAutoStartProvider="PrewarmMyCache" > <!-- Additional content --> </application> </site> </sites> <!-- Additional content --> <serviceAutoStartProviders> <add name="PrewarmMyCache" type="MyNamespace.CustomInitialization, MyLibrary" /> </serviceAutoStartProviders> When an IIS 7.5 server is cold-started or when an individual application pool is recycled, IIS 7.5 uses the information in the applicationHost.config file to determine which Web applications have to be automatically started. For each application that is marked for preload, IIS7.5 sends a request to ASP.NET 4 to start the application in a state during which the application temporarily does not accept HTTP requests. When it is in this state, ASP.NET instantiates the type defined by the serviceAutoStartProvider attribute (as shown in the previous example) and calls into its public entry point. You create a managed preload type that has the required entry point by implementing the IProcessHostPreloadClient interface, as shown in the following example: public class CustomInitialization : System.Web.Hosting.IProcessHostPreloadClient { public void Preload(string[] parameters) { // Perform initialization. } } After your initialization code runs in the Preload method and after the method returns, the ASP.NET application is ready to process requests. Permanently Redirecting a Page Content in Web applications is often moved over the lifetime of the application. This can lead to links to be out of date, such as the links that are returned by search engines. In ASP.NET, developers have traditionally handled requests to old URLs by using the Redirect method to forward a request to the new URL. However, the Redirect method issues an HTTP 302 (Found) response (which is used for a temporary redirect). This results in an extra HTTP round trip. ASP.NET 4 adds a RedirectPermanent helper method that makes it easy to issue HTTP 301 (Moved Permanently) responses, as in the following example: RedirectPermanent("/newpath/foroldcontent.aspx"); Search engines and other user agents that recognize permanent redirects will store the new URL that is associated with the content, which eliminates the unnecessary round trip made by the browser for temporary redirects. Session State Compression By default, ASP.NET provides two options for storing session state across a Web farm. The first option is a session state provider that invokes an out-of-process session state server. The second option is a session state provider that stores data in a Microsoft SQL Server database. Because both options store state information outside a Web application's worker process, session state has to be serialized before it is sent to remote storage. If a large amount of data is saved in session state, the size of the serialized data can become very large. ASP.NET 4 introduces a new compression option for both kinds of out-of-process session state providers. By using this option, applications that have spare CPU cycles on Web servers can achieve substantial reductions in the size of serialized session state data. You can set this option using the new compressionEnabled attribute of the sessionState element in the configuration file. When the compressionEnabled configuration option is set to true, ASP.NET compresses (and decompresses) serialized session state by using the .NET Framework GZipStreamclass. The following example shows how to set this attribute. <sessionState mode="SqlServer" sqlConnectionString="data source=dbserver;Initial Catalog=aspnetstate" allowCustomSqlDatabase="true" compressionEnabled="true" /> ASP.NET Web Forms Web Forms has been a core feature in ASP.NET since the release of ASP.NET 1.0. Many enhancements have been in this area for ASP.NET 4, such as the following: The ability to set meta tags. More control over view state. Support for recently introduced browsers and devices. Easier ways to work with browser capabilities. Support for using ASP.NET routing with Web Forms. More control over generated IDs. The ability to persist selected rows in data controls. More control over rendered HTML in the FormView and ListView controls. Filtering support for data source controls. Enhanced support for Web standards and accessibility Setting Meta Tags with the Page.MetaKeywords and Page.MetaDescription Properties Two properties have been added to the Page class: MetaKeywords and MetaDescription. These two properties represent corresponding meta tags in the HTML rendered for a page, as shown in the following example: <head id="Head1" runat="server"> <title>Untitled Page</title> <meta name="keywords" content="keyword1, keyword2' /> <meta name="description" content="Description of my page" /> </head> These two properties work like the Title property does, and they can be set in the @ Page directive. For more information, see Page.MetaKeywords and Page.MetaDescription. Enabling View State for Individual Controls A new property has been added to the Control class: ViewStateMode. You can use this property to disable view state for all controls on a page except those for which you explicitly enable view state. View state data is included in a page's HTML and increases the amount of time it takes to send a page to the client and post it back. Storing more view state than is necessary can cause significant decrease in performance. In earlier versions of ASP.NET, you could reduce the impact of view state on a page's performance by disabling view state for specific controls. But sometimes it is easier to enable view state for a few controls that need it instead of disabling it for many that do not need it. For more information, see Control.ViewStateMode. Support for Recently Introduced Browsers and Devices ASP.NET includes a feature that is named browser capabilities that lets you determine the capabilities of the browser that a user is using. Browser capabilities are represented by the HttpBrowserCapabilities object which is stored in the HttpRequest.Browser property. Information about a particular browser's capabilities is defined by a browser definition file. In ASP.NET 4, these browser definition files have been updated to contain information about recently introduced browsers and devices such as Google Chrome, Research in Motion BlackBerry smart phones, and Apple iPhone. Existing browser definition files have also been updated. For more information, see How to: Upgrade an ASP.NET Web Application to ASP.NET 4 and ASP.NET Web Server Controls and Browser Capabilities. The browser definition files that are included with ASP.NET 4 are shown in the following list: •blackberry.browser •chrome.browser •Default.browser •firefox.browser •gateway.browser •generic.browser •ie.browser •iemobile.browser •iphone.browser •opera.browser •safari.browser A New Way to Define Browser Capabilities ASP.NET 4 includes a new feature referred to as browser capabilities providers. As the name suggests, this lets you build a provider that in turn lets you write custom code to determine browser capabilities. In ASP.NET version 3.5 Service Pack 1, you define browser capabilities in an XML file. This file resides in a machine-level folder or an application-level folder. Most developers do not need to customize these files, but for those who do, the provider approach can be easier than dealing with complex XML syntax. The provider approach makes it possible to simplify the process by implementing a common browser definition syntax, or a database that contains up-to-date browser definitions, or even a Web service for such a database. For more information about the new browser capabilities provider, see the What's New for ASP.NET 4 White Paper. Routing in ASP.NET 4 ASP.NET 4 adds built-in support for routing with Web Forms. Routing is a feature that was introduced with ASP.NET 3.5 SP1 and lets you configure an application to use URLs that are meaningful to users and to search engines because they do not have to specify physical file names. This can make your site more user-friendly and your site content more discoverable by search engines. For example, the URL for a page that displays product categories in your application might look like the following example: http://website/products.aspx?categoryid=12 By using routing, you can use the following URL to render the same information: http://website/products/software The second URL lets the user know what to expect and can result in significantly improved rankings in search engine results. the new features include the following: The PageRouteHandler class is a simple HTTP handler that you use when you define routes. You no longer have to write a custom route handler. The HttpRequest.RequestContext and Page.RouteData properties make it easier to access information that is passed in URL parameters. The RouteUrl expression provides a simple way to create a routed URL in markup. The RouteValue expression provides a simple way to extract URL parameter values in markup. The RouteParameter class makes it easier to pass URL parameter values to a query for a data source control (similar to FormParameter). You no longer have to change the Web.config file to enable routing. For more information about routing, see the following topics: ASP.NET Routing Walkthrough: Using ASP.NET Routing in a Web Forms Application How to: Define Routes for Web Forms Applications How to: Construct URLs from Routes How to: Access URL Parameters in a Routed Page Setting Client IDs The new ClientIDMode property makes it easier to write client script that references HTML elements rendered for server controls. Increasing use of Microsoft Ajax makes the need to do this more common. For example, you may have a data control that renders a long list of products with prices and you want to use client script to make a Web service call and update individual prices in the list as they change without refreshing the entire page. Typically you get a reference to an HTML element in client script by using the document.GetElementById method. You pass to this method the value of the id attribute of the HTML element you want to reference. In the case of elements that are rendered for ASP.NET server controls earlier versions of ASP.NET could make this difficult or impossible. You were not always able to predict what id values ASP.NET would generate, or ASP.NET could generate very long id values. The problem was especially difficult for data controls that would generate multiple rows for a single instance of the control in your markup. ASP.NET 4 adds two new algorithms for generating id attributes. These algorithms can generate id attributes that are easier to work with in client script because they are more predictable and that are easier to work with because they are simpler. For more information about how to use the new algorithms, see the following topics: ASP.NET Web Server Control Identification Walkthrough: Making Data-Bound Controls Easier to Access from JavaScript Walkthrough: Making Controls Located in Web User Controls Easier to Access from JavaScript How to: Access Controls from JavaScript by ID Persisting Row Selection in Data Controls The GridView and ListView controls enable users to select a row. In previous versions of ASP.NET, row selection was based on the row index on the page. For example, if you select the third item on page 1 and then move to page 2, the third item on page 2 is selected. In most cases, is more desirable not to select any rows on page 2. ASP.NET 4 supports Persisted Selection, a new feature that was initially supported only in Dynamic Data projects in the .NET Framework 3.5 SP1. When this feature is enabled, the selected item is based on the row data key. This means that if you select the third row on page 1 and move to page 2, nothing is selected on page 2. When you move back to page 1, the third row is still selected. This is a much more natural behavior than the behavior in earlier versions of ASP.NET. Persisted selection is now supported for the GridView and ListView controls in all projects. You can enable this feature in the GridView control, for example, by setting the EnablePersistedSelection property, as shown in the following example: <asp:GridView id="GridView2" runat="server" PersistedSelection="true"> </asp:GridView> FormView Control Enhancements The FormView control is enhanced to make it easier to style the content of the control with CSS. In previous versions of ASP.NET, the FormView control rendered it contents using an item template. This made styling more difficult in the markup because unexpected table row and table cell tags were rendered by the control. The FormView control supports RenderOuterTable, a property in ASP.NET 4. When this property is set to false, as show in the following example, the table tags are not rendered. This makes it easier to apply CSS style to the contents of the control. <asp:FormView ID="FormView1" runat="server" RenderTable="false"> For more information, see FormView Web Server Control Overview. ListView Control Enhancements The ListView control, which was introduced in ASP.NET 3.5, has all the functionality of the GridView control while giving you complete control over the output. This control has been made easier to use in ASP.NET 4. The earlier version of the control required that you specify a layout template that contained a server control with a known ID. The following markup shows a typical example of how to use the ListView control in ASP.NET 3.5. <asp:ListView ID="ListView1" runat="server"> <LayoutTemplate> <asp:PlaceHolder ID="ItemPlaceHolder" runat="server"></asp:PlaceHolder> </LayoutTemplate> <ItemTemplate> <% Eval("LastName")%> </ItemTemplate> </asp:ListView> In ASP.NET 4, the ListView control does not require a layout template. The markup shown in the previous example can be replaced with the following markup: <asp:ListView ID="ListView1" runat="server"> <ItemTemplate> <% Eval("LastName")%> </ItemTemplate> </asp:ListView> For more information, see ListView Web Server Control Overview. Filtering Data with the QueryExtender Control A very common task for developers who create data-driven Web pages is to filter data. This traditionally has been performed by building Where clauses in data source controls. This approach can be complicated, and in some cases the Where syntax does not let you take advantage of the full functionality of the underlying database. To make filtering easier, a new QueryExtender control has been added in ASP.NET 4. This control can be added to EntityDataSource or LinqDataSource controls in order to filter the data returned by these controls. Because the QueryExtender control relies on LINQ, but you do not to need to know how to write LINQ queries to use the query extender. The QueryExtender control supports a variety of filter options. The following lists QueryExtender filter options. Term Definition SearchExpression Searches a field or fields for string values and compares them to a specified string value. RangeExpression Searches a field or fields for values in a range specified by a pair of values. PropertyExpression Compares a specified value to a property value in a field. If the expression evaluates to true, the data that is being examined is returned. OrderByExpression Sorts data by a specified column and sort direction. CustomExpression Calls a function that defines custom filter in the page. For more information, see QueryExtenderQueryExtender Web Server Control Overview. Enhanced Support for Web Standards and Accessibility Earlier versions of ASP.NET controls sometimes render markup that does not conform to HTML, XHTML, or accessibility standards. ASP.NET 4 eliminates most of these exceptions. For details about how the HTML that is rendered by each control meets accessibility standards, see ASP.NET Controls and Accessibility. CSS for Controls that Can be Disabled In ASP.NET 3.5, when a control is disabled (see WebControl.Enabled), a disabled attribute is added to the rendered HTML element. For example, the following markup creates a Label control that is disabled: <asp:Label id="Label1" runat="server"   Text="Test" Enabled="false" /> In ASP.NET 3.5, the previous control settings generate the following HTML: <span id="Label1" disabled="disabled">Test</span> In HTML 4.01, the disabled attribute is not considered valid on span elements. It is valid only on input elements because it specifies that they cannot be accessed. On display-only elements such as span elements, browsers typically support rendering for a disabled appearance, but a Web page that relies on this non-standard behavior is not robust according to accessibility standards. For display-only elements, you should use CSS to indicate a disabled visual appearance. Therefore, by default ASP.NET 4 generates the following HTML for the control settings shown previously: <span id="Label1" class="aspNetDisabled">Test</span> You can change the value of the class attribute that is rendered by default when a control is disabled by setting the DisabledCssClass property. CSS for Validation Controls In ASP.NET 3.5, validation controls render a default color of red as an inline style. For example, the following markup creates a RequiredFieldValidator control: <asp:RequiredFieldValidator ID="RequiredFieldValidator1" runat="server"   ErrorMessage="Required Field" ControlToValidate="RadioButtonList1" /> ASP.NET 3.5 renders the following HTML for the validator control: <span id="RequiredFieldValidator1"   style="color:Red;visibility:hidden;">RequiredFieldValidator</span> By default, ASP.NET 4 does not render an inline style to set the color to red. An inline style is used only to hide or show the validator, as shown in the following example: <span id="RequiredFieldValidator1"   style"visibility:hidden;">RequiredFieldValidator</span> Therefore, ASP.NET 4 does not automatically show error messages in red. For information about how to use CSS to specify a visual style for a validation control, see Validating User Input in ASP.NET Web Pages. CSS for the Hidden Fields Div Element ASP.NET uses hidden fields to store state information such as view state and control state. These hidden fields are contained by a div element. In ASP.NET 3.5, this div element does not have a class attribute or an id attribute. Therefore, CSS rules that affect all div elements could unintentionally cause this div to be visible. To avoid this problem, ASP.NET 4 renders the div element for hidden fields with a CSS class that you can use to differentiate the hidden fields div from others. The new classvalue is shown in the following example: <div class="aspNetHidden"> CSS for the Table, Image, and ImageButton Controls By default, in ASP.NET 3.5, some controls set the border attribute of rendered HTML to zero (0). The following example shows HTML that is generated by the Table control in ASP.NET 3.5: <table id="Table2" border="0"> The Image control and the ImageButton control also do this. Because this is not necessary and provides visual formatting information that should be provided by using CSS, the attribute is not generated in ASP.NET 4. CSS for the UpdatePanel and UpdateProgress Controls In ASP.NET 3.5, the UpdatePanel and UpdateProgress controls do not support expando attributes. This makes it impossible to set a CSS class on the HTMLelements that they render. In ASP.NET 4 these controls have been changed to accept expando attributes, as shown in the following example: <asp:UpdatePanel runat="server" class="myStyle"> </asp:UpdatePanel> The following HTML is rendered for this markup: <div id="ctl00_MainContent_UpdatePanel1" class="expandoclass"> </div> Eliminating Unnecessary Outer Tables In ASP.NET 3.5, the HTML that is rendered for the following controls is wrapped in a table element whose purpose is to apply inline styles to the entire control: FormView Login PasswordRecovery ChangePassword If you use templates to customize the appearance of these controls, you can specify CSS styles in the markup that you provide in the templates. In that case, no extra outer table is required. In ASP.NET 4, you can prevent the table from being rendered by setting the new RenderOuterTable property to false. Layout Templates for Wizard Controls In ASP.NET 3.5, the Wizard and CreateUserWizard controls generate an HTML table element that is used for visual formatting. In ASP.NET 4 you can use a LayoutTemplate element to specify the layout. If you do this, the HTML table element is not generated. In the template, you create placeholder controls to indicate where items should be dynamically inserted into the control. (This is similar to how the template model for the ListView control works.) For more information, see the Wizard.LayoutTemplate property. New HTML Formatting Options for the CheckBoxList and RadioButtonList Controls ASP.NET 3.5 uses HTML table elements to format the output for the CheckBoxList and RadioButtonList controls. To provide an alternative that does not use tables for visual formatting, ASP.NET 4 adds two new options to the RepeatLayout enumeration: UnorderedList. This option causes the HTML output to be formatted by using ul and li elements instead of a table. OrderedList. This option causes the HTML output to be formatted by using ol and li elements instead of a table. For examples of HTML that is rendered for the new options, see the RepeatLayout enumeration. Header and Footer Elements for the Table Control In ASP.NET 3.5, the Table control can be configured to render thead and tfoot elements by setting the TableSection property of the TableHeaderRow class and the TableFooterRow class. In ASP.NET 4 these properties are set to the appropriate values by default. CSS and ARIA Support for the Menu Control In ASP.NET 3.5, the Menu control uses HTML table elements for visual formatting, and in some configurations it is not keyboard-accessible. ASP.NET 4 addresses these problems and improves accessibility in the following ways: The generated HTML is structured as an unordered list (ul and li elements). CSS is used for visual formatting. The menu behaves in accordance with ARIA standards for keyboard access. You can use arrow keys to navigate menu items. (For information about ARIA, see Accessibility in Visual Studio and ASP.NET.) ARIA role and property attributes are added to the generated HTML. (Attributes are added by using JavaScript instead of included in the HTML, to avoid generating HTML that would cause markup validation errors.) Styles for the Menu control are rendered in a style block at the top of the page, instead of inline with the rendered HTML elements. If you want to use a separate CSS file so that you can modify the menu styles, you can set the Menu control's new IncludeStyleBlock property to false, in which case the style block is not generated. Valid XHTML for the HtmlForm Control In ASP.NET 3.5, the HtmlForm control (which is created implicitly by the <form runat="server"> tag) renders an HTML form element that has both name and id attributes. The name attribute is deprecated in XHTML 1.1. Therefore, this control does not render the name attribute in ASP.NET 4. Maintaining Backward Compatibility in Control Rendering An existing ASP.NET Web site might have code in it that assumes that controls are rendering HTML the way they do in ASP.NET 3.5. To avoid causing backward compatibility problems when you upgrade the site to ASP.NET 4, you can have ASP.NET continue to generate HTML the way it does in ASP.NET 3.5 after you upgrade the site. To do so, you can set the controlRenderingCompatibilityVersion attribute of the pages element to "3.5" in the Web.config file of an ASP.NET 4 Web site, as shown in the following example: <system.web>   <pages controlRenderingCompatibilityVersion="3.5"/> </system.web> If this setting is omitted, the default value is the same as the version of ASP.NET that the Web site targets. (For information about multi-targeting in ASP.NET, see .NET Framework Multi-Targeting for ASP.NET Web Projects.) ASP.NET MVC ASP.NET MVC helps Web developers build compelling standards-based Web sites that are easy to maintain because it decreases the dependency among application layers by using the Model-View-Controller (MVC) pattern. MVC provides complete control over the page markup. It also improves testability by inherently supporting Test Driven Development (TDD). Web sites created using ASP.NET MVC have a modular architecture. This allows members of a team to work independently on the various modules and can be used to improve collaboration. For example, developers can work on the model and controller layers (data and logic), while the designer work on the view (presentation). For tutorials, walkthroughs, conceptual content, code samples, and a complete API reference, see ASP.NET MVC 2. Dynamic Data Dynamic Data was introduced in the .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 release in mid-2008. This feature provides many enhancements for creating data-driven applications, such as the following: A RAD experience for quickly building a data-driven Web site. Automatic validation that is based on constraints defined in the data model. The ability to easily change the markup that is generated for fields in the GridView and DetailsView controls by using field templates that are part of your Dynamic Data project. For ASP.NET 4, Dynamic Data has been enhanced to give developers even more power for quickly building data-driven Web sites. For more information, see ASP.NET Dynamic Data Content Map. Enabling Dynamic Data for Individual Data-Bound Controls in Existing Web Applications You can use Dynamic Data features in existing ASP.NET Web applications that do not use scaffolding by enabling Dynamic Data for individual data-bound controls. Dynamic Data provides the presentation and data layer support for rendering these controls. When you enable Dynamic Data for data-bound controls, you get the following benefits: Setting default values for data fields. Dynamic Data enables you to provide default values at run time for fields in a data control. Interacting with the database without creating and registering a data model. Automatically validating the data that is entered by the user without writing any code. For more information, see Walkthrough: Enabling Dynamic Data in ASP.NET Data-Bound Controls. New Field Templates for URLs and E-mail Addresses ASP.NET 4 introduces two new built-in field templates, EmailAddress.ascx and Url.ascx. These templates are used for fields that are marked as EmailAddress or Url using the DataTypeAttribute attribute. For EmailAddress objects, the field is displayed as a hyperlink that is created by using the mailto: protocol. When users click the link, it opens the user's e-mail client and creates a skeleton message. Objects typed as Url are displayed as ordinary hyperlinks. The following example shows how to mark fields. [DataType(DataType.EmailAddress)] public object HomeEmail { get; set; } [DataType(DataType.Url)] public object Website { get; set; } Creating Links with the DynamicHyperLink Control Dynamic Data uses the new routing feature that was added in the .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 to control the URLs that users see when they access the Web site. The new DynamicHyperLink control makes it easy to build links to pages in a Dynamic Data site. For information, see How to: Create Table Action Links in Dynamic Data Support for Inheritance in the Data Model Both the ADO.NET Entity Framework and LINQ to SQL support inheritance in their data models. An example of this might be a database that has an InsurancePolicy table. It might also contain CarPolicy and HousePolicy tables that have the same fields as InsurancePolicy and then add more fields. Dynamic Data has been modified to understand inherited objects in the data model and to support scaffolding for the inherited tables. For more information, see Walkthrough: Mapping Table-per-Hierarchy Inheritance in Dynamic Data. Support for Many-to-Many Relationships (Entity Framework Only) The Entity Framework has rich support for many-to-many relationships between tables, which is implemented by exposing the relationship as a collection on an Entity object. New field templates (ManyToMany.ascx and ManyToMany_Edit.ascx) have been added to provide support for displaying and editing data that is involved in many-to-many relationships. For more information, see Working with Many-to-Many Data Relationships in Dynamic Data. New Attributes to Control Display and Support Enumerations The DisplayAttribute has been added to give you additional control over how fields are displayed. The DisplayNameAttribute attribute in earlier versions of Dynamic Data enabled you to change the name that is used as a caption for a field. The new DisplayAttribute class lets you specify more options for displaying a field, such as the order in which a field is displayed and whether a field will be used as a filter. The attribute also provides independent control of the name that is used for the labels in a GridView control, the name that is used in a DetailsView control, the help text for the field, and the watermark used for the field (if the field accepts text input). The EnumDataTypeAttribute class has been added to let you map fields to enumerations. When you apply this attribute to a field, you specify an enumeration type. Dynamic Data uses the new Enumeration.ascx field template to create UI for displaying and editing enumeration values. The template maps the values from the database to the names in the enumeration. Enhanced Support for Filters Dynamic Data 1.0 had built-in filters for Boolean columns and foreign-key columns. The filters did not let you specify the order in which they were displayed. The new DisplayAttribute attribute addresses this by giving you control over whether a column appears as a filter and in what order it will be displayed. An additional enhancement is that filtering support has been rewritten to use the new QueryExtender feature of Web Forms. This lets you create filters without requiring knowledge of the data source control that the filters will be used with. Along with these extensions, filters have also been turned into template controls, which lets you add new ones. Finally, the DisplayAttribute class mentioned earlier allows the default filter to be overridden, in the same way that UIHint allows the default field template for a column to be overridden. For more information, see Walkthrough: Filtering Rows in Tables That Have a Parent-Child Relationship and QueryableFilterRepeater. ASP.NET Chart Control The ASP.NET chart server control enables you to create ASP.NET pages applications that have simple, intuitive charts for complex statistical or financial analysis. The chart control supports the following features: Data series, chart areas, axes, legends, labels, titles, and more. Data binding. Data manipulation, such as copying, splitting, merging, alignment, grouping, sorting, searching, and filtering. Statistical formulas and financial formulas. Advanced chart appearance, such as 3-D, anti-aliasing, lighting, and perspective. Events and customizations. Interactivity and Microsoft Ajax. Support for the Ajax Content Delivery Network (CDN), which provides an optimized way for you to add Microsoft Ajax Library and jQuery scripts to your Web applications. For more information, see Chart Web Server Control Overview. Visual Web Developer Enhancements The following sections provide information about enhancements and new features in Visual Studio 2010 and Visual Web Developer Express. The Web page designer in Visual Studio 2010 has been enhanced for better CSS compatibility, includes additional support for HTML and ASP.NET markup snippets, and features a redesigned version of IntelliSense for JScript. Improved CSS Compatibility The Visual Web Developer designer in Visual Studio 2010 has been updated to improve CSS 2.1 standards compliance. The designer better preserves HTML source code and is more robust than in previous versions of Visual Studio. HTML and JScript Snippets In the HTML editor, IntelliSense auto-completes tag names. The IntelliSense Snippets feature auto-completes whole tags and more. In Visual Studio 2010, IntelliSense snippets are supported for JScript, alongside C# and Visual Basic, which were supported in earlier versions of Visual Studio. Visual Studio 2010 includes over 200 snippets that help you auto-complete common ASP.NET and HTML tags, including required attributes (such as runat="server") and common attributes specific to a tag (such as ID, DataSourceID, ControlToValidate, and Text). You can download additional snippets, or you can write your own snippets that encapsulate the blocks of markup that you or your team use for common tasks. For more information on HTML snippets, see Walkthrough: Using HTML Snippets. JScript IntelliSense Enhancements In Visual 2010, JScript IntelliSense has been redesigned to provide an even richer editing experience. IntelliSense now recognizes objects that have been dynamically generated by methods such as registerNamespace and by similar techniques used by other JavaScript frameworks. Performance has been improved to analyze large libraries of script and to display IntelliSense with little or no processing delay. Compatibility has been significantly increased to support almost all third-party libraries and to support diverse coding styles. Documentation comments are now parsed as you type and are immediately leveraged by IntelliSense. Web Application Deployment with Visual Studio 2010 For Web application projects, Visual Studio now provides tools that work with the IIS Web Deployment Tool (Web Deploy) to automate many processes that had to be done manually in earlier versions of ASP.NET. For example, the following tasks can now be automated: Creating an IIS application on the destination computer and configuring IIS settings. Copying files to the destination computer. Changing Web.config settings that must be different in the destination environment. Propagating changes to data or data structures in SQL Server databases that are used by the Web application. For more information about Web application deployment, see ASP.NET Deployment Content Map. Enhancements to ASP.NET Multi-Targeting ASP.NET 4 adds new features to the multi-targeting feature to make it easier to work with projects that target earlier versions of the .NET Framework. Multi-targeting was introduced in ASP.NET 3.5 to enable you to use the latest version of Visual Studio without having to upgrade existing Web sites or Web services to the latest version of the .NET Framework. In Visual Studio 2008, when you work with a project targeted for an earlier version of the .NET Framework, most features of the development environment adapt to the targeted version. However, IntelliSense displays language features that are available in the current version, and property windows display properties available in the current version. In Visual Studio 2010, only language features and properties available in the targeted version of the .NET Framework are shown. For more information about multi-targeting, see the following topics: .NET Framework Multi-Targeting for ASP.NET Web Projects ASP.NET Side-by-Side Execution Overview How to: Host Web Applications That Use Different Versions of the .NET Framework on the Same Server How to: Deploy Web Site Projects Targeted for Earlier Versions of the .NET Framework

    Read the article

  • Service Discovery in WCF 4.0 &ndash; Part 1

    - by Shaun
    When designing a service oriented architecture (SOA) system, there will be a lot of services with many service contracts, endpoints and behaviors. Besides the client calling the service, in a large distributed system a service may invoke other services. In this case, one service might need to know the endpoints it invokes. This might not be a problem in a small system. But when you have more than 10 services this might be a problem. For example in my current product, there are around 10 services, such as the user authentication service, UI integration service, location service, license service, device monitor service, event monitor service, schedule job service, accounting service, player management service, etc..   Benefit of Discovery Service Since almost all my services need to invoke at least one other service. This would be a difficult task to make sure all services endpoints are configured correctly in every service. And furthermore, it would be a nightmare when a service changed its endpoint at runtime. Hence, we need a discovery service to remove the dependency (configuration dependency). A discovery service plays as a service dictionary which stores the relationship between the contracts and the endpoints for every service. By using the discovery service, when service X wants to invoke service Y, it just need to ask the discovery service where is service Y, then the discovery service will return all proper endpoints of service Y, then service X can use the endpoint to send the request to service Y. And when some services changed their endpoint address, all need to do is to update its records in the discovery service then all others will know its new endpoint. In WCF 4.0 Discovery it supports both managed proxy discovery mode and ad-hoc discovery mode. In ad-hoc mode there is no standalone discovery service. When a client wanted to invoke a service, it will broadcast an message (normally in UDP protocol) to the entire network with the service match criteria. All services which enabled the discovery behavior will receive this message and only those matched services will send their endpoint back to the client. The managed proxy discovery service works as I described above. In this post I will only cover the managed proxy mode, where there’s a discovery service. For more information about the ad-hoc mode please refer to the MSDN.   Service Announcement and Probe The main functionality of discovery service should be return the proper endpoint addresses back to the service who is looking for. In most cases the consume service (as a client) will send the contract which it wanted to request to the discovery service. And then the discovery service will find the endpoint and respond. Sometimes the contract and endpoint are not enough. It also contains versioning, extensions attributes. This post I will only cover the case includes contract and endpoint. When a client (or sometimes a service who need to invoke another service) need to connect to a target service, it will firstly request the discovery service through the “Probe” method with the criteria. Basically the criteria contains the contract type name of the target service. Then the discovery service will search its endpoint repository by the criteria. The repository might be a database, a distributed cache or a flat XML file. If it matches, the discovery service will grab the endpoint information (it’s called discovery endpoint metadata in WCF) and send back. And this is called “Probe”. Finally the client received the discovery endpoint metadata and will use the endpoint to connect to the target service. Besides the probe, discovery service should take the responsible to know there is a new service available when it goes online, as well as stopped when it goes offline. This feature is named “Announcement”. When a service started and stopped, it will announce to the discovery service. So the basic functionality of a discovery service should includes: 1, An endpoint which receive the service online message, and add the service endpoint information in the discovery repository. 2, An endpoint which receive the service offline message, and remove the service endpoint information from the discovery repository. 3, An endpoint which receive the client probe message, and return the matches service endpoints, and return the discovery endpoint metadata. WCF 4.0 discovery service just covers all these features in it's infrastructure classes.   Discovery Service in WCF 4.0 WCF 4.0 introduced a new assembly named System.ServiceModel.Discovery which has all necessary classes and interfaces to build a WS-Discovery compliant discovery service. It supports ad-hoc and managed proxy modes. For the case mentioned in this post, what we need to build is a standalone discovery service, which is the managed proxy discovery service mode. To build a managed discovery service in WCF 4.0 just create a new class inherits from the abstract class System.ServiceModel.Discovery.DiscoveryProxy. This class implemented and abstracted the procedures of service announcement and probe. And it exposes 8 abstract methods where we can implement our own endpoint register, unregister and find logic. These 8 methods are asynchronized, which means all invokes to the discovery service are asynchronously, for better service capability and performance. 1, OnBeginOnlineAnnouncement, OnEndOnlineAnnouncement: Invoked when a service sent the online announcement message. We need to add the endpoint information to the repository in this method. 2, OnBeginOfflineAnnouncement, OnEndOfflineAnnouncement: Invoked when a service sent the offline announcement message. We need to remove the endpoint information from the repository in this method. 3, OnBeginFind, OnEndFind: Invoked when a client sent the probe message that want to find the service endpoint information. We need to look for the proper endpoints by matching the client’s criteria through the repository in this method. 4, OnBeginResolve, OnEndResolve: Invoked then a client sent the resolve message. Different from the find method, when using resolve method the discovery service will return the exactly one service endpoint metadata to the client. In our example we will NOT implement this method.   Let’s create our own discovery service, inherit the base System.ServiceModel.Discovery.DiscoveryProxy. We also need to specify the service behavior in this class. Since the build-in discovery service host class only support the singleton mode, we must set its instance context mode to single. 1: using System; 2: using System.Collections.Generic; 3: using System.Linq; 4: using System.Text; 5: using System.ServiceModel.Discovery; 6: using System.ServiceModel; 7:  8: namespace Phare.Service 9: { 10: [ServiceBehavior(InstanceContextMode = InstanceContextMode.Single, ConcurrencyMode = ConcurrencyMode.Multiple)] 11: public class ManagedProxyDiscoveryService : DiscoveryProxy 12: { 13: protected override IAsyncResult OnBeginFind(FindRequestContext findRequestContext, AsyncCallback callback, object state) 14: { 15: throw new NotImplementedException(); 16: } 17:  18: protected override IAsyncResult OnBeginOfflineAnnouncement(DiscoveryMessageSequence messageSequence, EndpointDiscoveryMetadata endpointDiscoveryMetadata, AsyncCallback callback, object state) 19: { 20: throw new NotImplementedException(); 21: } 22:  23: protected override IAsyncResult OnBeginOnlineAnnouncement(DiscoveryMessageSequence messageSequence, EndpointDiscoveryMetadata endpointDiscoveryMetadata, AsyncCallback callback, object state) 24: { 25: throw new NotImplementedException(); 26: } 27:  28: protected override IAsyncResult OnBeginResolve(ResolveCriteria resolveCriteria, AsyncCallback callback, object state) 29: { 30: throw new NotImplementedException(); 31: } 32:  33: protected override void OnEndFind(IAsyncResult result) 34: { 35: throw new NotImplementedException(); 36: } 37:  38: protected override void OnEndOfflineAnnouncement(IAsyncResult result) 39: { 40: throw new NotImplementedException(); 41: } 42:  43: protected override void OnEndOnlineAnnouncement(IAsyncResult result) 44: { 45: throw new NotImplementedException(); 46: } 47:  48: protected override EndpointDiscoveryMetadata OnEndResolve(IAsyncResult result) 49: { 50: throw new NotImplementedException(); 51: } 52: } 53: } Then let’s implement the online, offline and find methods one by one. WCF discovery service gives us full flexibility to implement the endpoint add, remove and find logic. For the demo purpose we will use an internal dictionary to store the services’ endpoint metadata. In the next post we will see how to serialize and store these information in database. Define a concurrent dictionary inside the service class since our it will be used in the multiple threads scenario. 1: [ServiceBehavior(InstanceContextMode = InstanceContextMode.Single, ConcurrencyMode = ConcurrencyMode.Multiple)] 2: public class ManagedProxyDiscoveryService : DiscoveryProxy 3: { 4: private ConcurrentDictionary<EndpointAddress, EndpointDiscoveryMetadata> _services; 5:  6: public ManagedProxyDiscoveryService() 7: { 8: _services = new ConcurrentDictionary<EndpointAddress, EndpointDiscoveryMetadata>(); 9: } 10: } Then we can simply implement the logic of service online and offline. 1: protected override IAsyncResult OnBeginOnlineAnnouncement(DiscoveryMessageSequence messageSequence, EndpointDiscoveryMetadata endpointDiscoveryMetadata, AsyncCallback callback, object state) 2: { 3: _services.AddOrUpdate(endpointDiscoveryMetadata.Address, endpointDiscoveryMetadata, (key, value) => endpointDiscoveryMetadata); 4: return new OnOnlineAnnouncementAsyncResult(callback, state); 5: } 6:  7: protected override void OnEndOnlineAnnouncement(IAsyncResult result) 8: { 9: OnOnlineAnnouncementAsyncResult.End(result); 10: } 11:  12: protected override IAsyncResult OnBeginOfflineAnnouncement(DiscoveryMessageSequence messageSequence, EndpointDiscoveryMetadata endpointDiscoveryMetadata, AsyncCallback callback, object state) 13: { 14: EndpointDiscoveryMetadata endpoint = null; 15: _services.TryRemove(endpointDiscoveryMetadata.Address, out endpoint); 16: return new OnOfflineAnnouncementAsyncResult(callback, state); 17: } 18:  19: protected override void OnEndOfflineAnnouncement(IAsyncResult result) 20: { 21: OnOfflineAnnouncementAsyncResult.End(result); 22: } Regards the find method, the parameter FindRequestContext.Criteria has a method named IsMatch, which can be use for us to evaluate which service metadata is satisfied with the criteria. So the implementation of find method would be like this. 1: protected override IAsyncResult OnBeginFind(FindRequestContext findRequestContext, AsyncCallback callback, object state) 2: { 3: _services.Where(s => findRequestContext.Criteria.IsMatch(s.Value)) 4: .Select(s => s.Value) 5: .All(meta => 6: { 7: findRequestContext.AddMatchingEndpoint(meta); 8: return true; 9: }); 10: return new OnFindAsyncResult(callback, state); 11: } 12:  13: protected override void OnEndFind(IAsyncResult result) 14: { 15: OnFindAsyncResult.End(result); 16: } As you can see, we checked all endpoints metadata in repository by invoking the IsMatch method. Then add all proper endpoints metadata into the parameter. Finally since all these methods are asynchronized we need some AsyncResult classes as well. Below are the base class and the inherited classes used in previous methods. 1: using System; 2: using System.Collections.Generic; 3: using System.Linq; 4: using System.Text; 5: using System.Threading; 6:  7: namespace Phare.Service 8: { 9: abstract internal class AsyncResult : IAsyncResult 10: { 11: AsyncCallback callback; 12: bool completedSynchronously; 13: bool endCalled; 14: Exception exception; 15: bool isCompleted; 16: ManualResetEvent manualResetEvent; 17: object state; 18: object thisLock; 19:  20: protected AsyncResult(AsyncCallback callback, object state) 21: { 22: this.callback = callback; 23: this.state = state; 24: this.thisLock = new object(); 25: } 26:  27: public object AsyncState 28: { 29: get 30: { 31: return state; 32: } 33: } 34:  35: public WaitHandle AsyncWaitHandle 36: { 37: get 38: { 39: if (manualResetEvent != null) 40: { 41: return manualResetEvent; 42: } 43: lock (ThisLock) 44: { 45: if (manualResetEvent == null) 46: { 47: manualResetEvent = new ManualResetEvent(isCompleted); 48: } 49: } 50: return manualResetEvent; 51: } 52: } 53:  54: public bool CompletedSynchronously 55: { 56: get 57: { 58: return completedSynchronously; 59: } 60: } 61:  62: public bool IsCompleted 63: { 64: get 65: { 66: return isCompleted; 67: } 68: } 69:  70: object ThisLock 71: { 72: get 73: { 74: return this.thisLock; 75: } 76: } 77:  78: protected static TAsyncResult End<TAsyncResult>(IAsyncResult result) 79: where TAsyncResult : AsyncResult 80: { 81: if (result == null) 82: { 83: throw new ArgumentNullException("result"); 84: } 85:  86: TAsyncResult asyncResult = result as TAsyncResult; 87:  88: if (asyncResult == null) 89: { 90: throw new ArgumentException("Invalid async result.", "result"); 91: } 92:  93: if (asyncResult.endCalled) 94: { 95: throw new InvalidOperationException("Async object already ended."); 96: } 97:  98: asyncResult.endCalled = true; 99:  100: if (!asyncResult.isCompleted) 101: { 102: asyncResult.AsyncWaitHandle.WaitOne(); 103: } 104:  105: if (asyncResult.manualResetEvent != null) 106: { 107: asyncResult.manualResetEvent.Close(); 108: } 109:  110: if (asyncResult.exception != null) 111: { 112: throw asyncResult.exception; 113: } 114:  115: return asyncResult; 116: } 117:  118: protected void Complete(bool completedSynchronously) 119: { 120: if (isCompleted) 121: { 122: throw new InvalidOperationException("This async result is already completed."); 123: } 124:  125: this.completedSynchronously = completedSynchronously; 126:  127: if (completedSynchronously) 128: { 129: this.isCompleted = true; 130: } 131: else 132: { 133: lock (ThisLock) 134: { 135: this.isCompleted = true; 136: if (this.manualResetEvent != null) 137: { 138: this.manualResetEvent.Set(); 139: } 140: } 141: } 142:  143: if (callback != null) 144: { 145: callback(this); 146: } 147: } 148:  149: protected void Complete(bool completedSynchronously, Exception exception) 150: { 151: this.exception = exception; 152: Complete(completedSynchronously); 153: } 154: } 155: } 1: using System; 2: using System.Collections.Generic; 3: using System.Linq; 4: using System.Text; 5: using System.ServiceModel.Discovery; 6: using Phare.Service; 7:  8: namespace Phare.Service 9: { 10: internal sealed class OnOnlineAnnouncementAsyncResult : AsyncResult 11: { 12: public OnOnlineAnnouncementAsyncResult(AsyncCallback callback, object state) 13: : base(callback, state) 14: { 15: this.Complete(true); 16: } 17:  18: public static void End(IAsyncResult result) 19: { 20: AsyncResult.End<OnOnlineAnnouncementAsyncResult>(result); 21: } 22:  23: } 24:  25: sealed class OnOfflineAnnouncementAsyncResult : AsyncResult 26: { 27: public OnOfflineAnnouncementAsyncResult(AsyncCallback callback, object state) 28: : base(callback, state) 29: { 30: this.Complete(true); 31: } 32:  33: public static void End(IAsyncResult result) 34: { 35: AsyncResult.End<OnOfflineAnnouncementAsyncResult>(result); 36: } 37: } 38:  39: sealed class OnFindAsyncResult : AsyncResult 40: { 41: public OnFindAsyncResult(AsyncCallback callback, object state) 42: : base(callback, state) 43: { 44: this.Complete(true); 45: } 46:  47: public static void End(IAsyncResult result) 48: { 49: AsyncResult.End<OnFindAsyncResult>(result); 50: } 51: } 52:  53: sealed class OnResolveAsyncResult : AsyncResult 54: { 55: EndpointDiscoveryMetadata matchingEndpoint; 56:  57: public OnResolveAsyncResult(EndpointDiscoveryMetadata matchingEndpoint, AsyncCallback callback, object state) 58: : base(callback, state) 59: { 60: this.matchingEndpoint = matchingEndpoint; 61: this.Complete(true); 62: } 63:  64: public static EndpointDiscoveryMetadata End(IAsyncResult result) 65: { 66: OnResolveAsyncResult thisPtr = AsyncResult.End<OnResolveAsyncResult>(result); 67: return thisPtr.matchingEndpoint; 68: } 69: } 70: } Now we have finished the discovery service. The next step is to host it. The discovery service is a standard WCF service. So we can use ServiceHost on a console application, windows service, or in IIS as usual. The following code is how to host the discovery service we had just created in a console application. 1: static void Main(string[] args) 2: { 3: using (var host = new ServiceHost(new ManagedProxyDiscoveryService())) 4: { 5: host.Opened += (sender, e) => 6: { 7: host.Description.Endpoints.All((ep) => 8: { 9: Console.WriteLine(ep.ListenUri); 10: return true; 11: }); 12: }; 13:  14: try 15: { 16: // retrieve the announcement, probe endpoint and binding from configuration 17: var announcementEndpointAddress = new EndpointAddress(ConfigurationManager.AppSettings["announcementEndpointAddress"]); 18: var probeEndpointAddress = new EndpointAddress(ConfigurationManager.AppSettings["probeEndpointAddress"]); 19: var binding = Activator.CreateInstance(Type.GetType(ConfigurationManager.AppSettings["bindingType"], true, true)) as Binding; 20: var announcementEndpoint = new AnnouncementEndpoint(binding, announcementEndpointAddress); 21: var probeEndpoint = new DiscoveryEndpoint(binding, probeEndpointAddress); 22: probeEndpoint.IsSystemEndpoint = false; 23: // append the service endpoint for announcement and probe 24: host.AddServiceEndpoint(announcementEndpoint); 25: host.AddServiceEndpoint(probeEndpoint); 26:  27: host.Open(); 28:  29: Console.WriteLine("Press any key to exit."); 30: Console.ReadKey(); 31: } 32: catch (Exception ex) 33: { 34: Console.WriteLine(ex.ToString()); 35: } 36: } 37:  38: Console.WriteLine("Done."); 39: Console.ReadKey(); 40: } What we need to notice is that, the discovery service needs two endpoints for announcement and probe. In this example I just retrieve them from the configuration file. I also specified the binding of these two endpoints in configuration file as well. 1: <?xml version="1.0"?> 2: <configuration> 3: <startup> 4: <supportedRuntime version="v4.0" sku=".NETFramework,Version=v4.0"/> 5: </startup> 6: <appSettings> 7: <add key="announcementEndpointAddress" value="net.tcp://localhost:10010/announcement"/> 8: <add key="probeEndpointAddress" value="net.tcp://localhost:10011/probe"/> 9: <add key="bindingType" value="System.ServiceModel.NetTcpBinding, System.ServiceModel, Version=4.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089"/> 10: </appSettings> 11: </configuration> And this is the console screen when I ran my discovery service. As you can see there are two endpoints listening for announcement message and probe message.   Discoverable Service and Client Next, let’s create a WCF service that is discoverable, which means it can be found by the discovery service. To do so, we need to let the service send the online announcement message to the discovery service, as well as offline message before it shutdown. Just create a simple service which can make the incoming string to upper. The service contract and implementation would be like this. 1: [ServiceContract] 2: public interface IStringService 3: { 4: [OperationContract] 5: string ToUpper(string content); 6: } 1: public class StringService : IStringService 2: { 3: public string ToUpper(string content) 4: { 5: return content.ToUpper(); 6: } 7: } Then host this service in the console application. In order to make the discovery service easy to be tested the service address will be changed each time it’s started. 1: static void Main(string[] args) 2: { 3: var baseAddress = new Uri(string.Format("net.tcp://localhost:11001/stringservice/{0}/", Guid.NewGuid().ToString())); 4:  5: using (var host = new ServiceHost(typeof(StringService), baseAddress)) 6: { 7: host.Opened += (sender, e) => 8: { 9: Console.WriteLine("Service opened at {0}", host.Description.Endpoints.First().ListenUri); 10: }; 11:  12: host.AddServiceEndpoint(typeof(IStringService), new NetTcpBinding(), string.Empty); 13:  14: host.Open(); 15:  16: Console.WriteLine("Press any key to exit."); 17: Console.ReadKey(); 18: } 19: } Currently this service is NOT discoverable. We need to add a special service behavior so that it could send the online and offline message to the discovery service announcement endpoint when the host is opened and closed. WCF 4.0 introduced a service behavior named ServiceDiscoveryBehavior. When we specified the announcement endpoint address and appended it to the service behaviors this service will be discoverable. 1: var announcementAddress = new EndpointAddress(ConfigurationManager.AppSettings["announcementEndpointAddress"]); 2: var announcementBinding = Activator.CreateInstance(Type.GetType(ConfigurationManager.AppSettings["bindingType"], true, true)) as Binding; 3: var announcementEndpoint = new AnnouncementEndpoint(announcementBinding, announcementAddress); 4: var discoveryBehavior = new ServiceDiscoveryBehavior(); 5: discoveryBehavior.AnnouncementEndpoints.Add(announcementEndpoint); 6: host.Description.Behaviors.Add(discoveryBehavior); The ServiceDiscoveryBehavior utilizes the service extension and channel dispatcher to implement the online and offline announcement logic. In short, it injected the channel open and close procedure and send the online and offline message to the announcement endpoint.   On client side, when we have the discovery service, a client can invoke a service without knowing its endpoint. WCF discovery assembly provides a class named DiscoveryClient, which can be used to find the proper service endpoint by passing the criteria. In the code below I initialized the DiscoveryClient, specified the discovery service probe endpoint address. Then I created the find criteria by specifying the service contract I wanted to use and invoke the Find method. This will send the probe message to the discovery service and it will find the endpoints back to me. The discovery service will return all endpoints that matches the find criteria, which means in the result of the find method there might be more than one endpoints. In this example I just returned the first matched one back. In the next post I will show how to extend our discovery service to make it work like a service load balancer. 1: static EndpointAddress FindServiceEndpoint() 2: { 3: var probeEndpointAddress = new EndpointAddress(ConfigurationManager.AppSettings["probeEndpointAddress"]); 4: var probeBinding = Activator.CreateInstance(Type.GetType(ConfigurationManager.AppSettings["bindingType"], true, true)) as Binding; 5: var discoveryEndpoint = new DiscoveryEndpoint(probeBinding, probeEndpointAddress); 6:  7: EndpointAddress address = null; 8: FindResponse result = null; 9: using (var discoveryClient = new DiscoveryClient(discoveryEndpoint)) 10: { 11: result = discoveryClient.Find(new FindCriteria(typeof(IStringService))); 12: } 13:  14: if (result != null && result.Endpoints.Any()) 15: { 16: var endpointMetadata = result.Endpoints.First(); 17: address = endpointMetadata.Address; 18: } 19: return address; 20: } Once we probed the discovery service we will receive the endpoint. So in the client code we can created the channel factory from the endpoint and binding, and invoke to the service. When creating the client side channel factory we need to make sure that the client side binding should be the same as the service side. WCF discovery service can be used to find the endpoint for a service contract, but the binding is NOT included. This is because the binding was not in the WS-Discovery specification. In the next post I will demonstrate how to add the binding information into the discovery service. At that moment the client don’t need to create the binding by itself. Instead it will use the binding received from the discovery service. 1: static void Main(string[] args) 2: { 3: Console.WriteLine("Say something..."); 4: var content = Console.ReadLine(); 5: while (!string.IsNullOrWhiteSpace(content)) 6: { 7: Console.WriteLine("Finding the service endpoint..."); 8: var address = FindServiceEndpoint(); 9: if (address == null) 10: { 11: Console.WriteLine("There is no endpoint matches the criteria."); 12: } 13: else 14: { 15: Console.WriteLine("Found the endpoint {0}", address.Uri); 16:  17: var factory = new ChannelFactory<IStringService>(new NetTcpBinding(), address); 18: factory.Opened += (sender, e) => 19: { 20: Console.WriteLine("Connecting to {0}.", factory.Endpoint.ListenUri); 21: }; 22: var proxy = factory.CreateChannel(); 23: using (proxy as IDisposable) 24: { 25: Console.WriteLine("ToUpper: {0} => {1}", content, proxy.ToUpper(content)); 26: } 27: } 28:  29: Console.WriteLine("Say something..."); 30: content = Console.ReadLine(); 31: } 32: } Similarly, the discovery service probe endpoint and binding were defined in the configuration file. 1: <?xml version="1.0"?> 2: <configuration> 3: <startup> 4: <supportedRuntime version="v4.0" sku=".NETFramework,Version=v4.0"/> 5: </startup> 6: <appSettings> 7: <add key="announcementEndpointAddress" value="net.tcp://localhost:10010/announcement"/> 8: <add key="probeEndpointAddress" value="net.tcp://localhost:10011/probe"/> 9: <add key="bindingType" value="System.ServiceModel.NetTcpBinding, System.ServiceModel, Version=4.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089"/> 10: </appSettings> 11: </configuration> OK, now let’s have a test. Firstly start the discovery service, and then start our discoverable service. When it started it will announced to the discovery service and registered its endpoint into the repository, which is the local dictionary. And then start the client and type something. As you can see the client asked the discovery service for the endpoint and then establish the connection to the discoverable service. And more interesting, do NOT close the client console but terminate the discoverable service but press the enter key. This will make the service send the offline message to the discovery service. Then start the discoverable service again. Since we made it use a different address each time it started, currently it should be hosted on another address. If we enter something in the client we could see that it asked the discovery service and retrieve the new endpoint, and connect the the service.   Summary In this post I discussed the benefit of using the discovery service and the procedures of service announcement and probe. I also demonstrated how to leverage the WCF Discovery feature in WCF 4.0 to build a simple managed discovery service. For test purpose, in this example I used the in memory dictionary as the discovery endpoint metadata repository. And when finding I also just return the first matched endpoint back. I also hard coded the bindings between the discoverable service and the client. In next post I will show you how to solve the problem mentioned above, as well as some additional feature for production usage. You can download the code here.   Hope this helps, Shaun All documents and related graphics, codes are provided "AS IS" without warranty of any kind. Copyright © Shaun Ziyan Xu. This work is licensed under the Creative Commons License.

    Read the article

  • Custom ASP.NET Routing to an HttpHandler

    - by Rick Strahl
    As of version 4.0 ASP.NET natively supports routing via the now built-in System.Web.Routing namespace. Routing features are automatically integrated into the HtttpRuntime via a few custom interfaces. New Web Forms Routing Support In ASP.NET 4.0 there are a host of improvements including routing support baked into Web Forms via a RouteData property available on the Page class and RouteCollection.MapPageRoute() route handler that makes it easy to route to Web forms. To map ASP.NET Page routes is as simple as setting up the routes with MapPageRoute:protected void Application_Start(object sender, EventArgs e) { RegisterRoutes(RouteTable.Routes); } void RegisterRoutes(RouteCollection routes) { routes.MapPageRoute("StockQuote", "StockQuote/{symbol}", "StockQuote.aspx"); routes.MapPageRoute("StockQuotes", "StockQuotes/{symbolList}", "StockQuotes.aspx"); } and then accessing the route data in the page you can then use the new Page class RouteData property to retrieve the dynamic route data information:public partial class StockQuote1 : System.Web.UI.Page { protected StockQuote Quote = null; protected void Page_Load(object sender, EventArgs e) { string symbol = RouteData.Values["symbol"] as string; StockServer server = new StockServer(); Quote = server.GetStockQuote(symbol); // display stock data in Page View } } Simple, quick and doesn’t require much explanation. If you’re using WebForms most of your routing needs should be served just fine by this simple mechanism. Kudos to the ASP.NET team for putting this in the box and making it easy! How Routing Works To handle Routing in ASP.NET involves these steps: Registering Routes Creating a custom RouteHandler to retrieve an HttpHandler Attaching RouteData to your HttpHandler Picking up Route Information in your Request code Registering routes makes ASP.NET aware of the Routes you want to handle via the static RouteTable.Routes collection. You basically add routes to this collection to let ASP.NET know which URL patterns it should watch for. You typically hook up routes off a RegisterRoutes method that fires in Application_Start as I did in the example above to ensure routes are added only once when the application first starts up. When you create a route, you pass in a RouteHandler instance which ASP.NET caches and reuses as routes are matched. Once registered ASP.NET monitors the routes and if a match is found just prior to the HttpHandler instantiation, ASP.NET uses the RouteHandler registered for the route and calls GetHandler() on it to retrieve an HttpHandler instance. The RouteHandler.GetHandler() method is responsible for creating an instance of an HttpHandler that is to handle the request and – if necessary – to assign any additional custom data to the handler. At minimum you probably want to pass the RouteData to the handler so the handler can identify the request based on the route data available. To do this you typically add  a RouteData property to your handler and then assign the property from the RouteHandlers request context. This is essentially how Page.RouteData comes into being and this approach should work well for any custom handler implementation that requires RouteData. It’s a shame that ASP.NET doesn’t have a top level intrinsic object that’s accessible off the HttpContext object to provide route data more generically, but since RouteData is directly tied to HttpHandlers and not all handlers support it it might cause some confusion of when it’s actually available. Bottom line is that if you want to hold on to RouteData you have to assign it to a custom property of the handler or else pass it to the handler via Context.Items[] object that can be retrieved on an as needed basis. It’s important to understand that routing is hooked up via RouteHandlers that are responsible for loading HttpHandler instances. RouteHandlers are invoked for every request that matches a route and through this RouteHandler instance the Handler gains access to the current RouteData. Because of this logic it’s important to understand that Routing is really tied to HttpHandlers and not available prior to handler instantiation, which is pretty late in the HttpRuntime’s request pipeline. IOW, Routing works with Handlers but not with earlier in the pipeline within Modules. Specifically ASP.NET calls RouteHandler.GetHandler() from the PostResolveRequestCache HttpRuntime pipeline event. Here’s the call stack at the beginning of the GetHandler() call: which fires just before handler resolution. Non-Page Routing – You need to build custom RouteHandlers If you need to route to a custom Http Handler or other non-Page (and non-MVC) endpoint in the HttpRuntime, there is no generic mapping support available. You need to create a custom RouteHandler that can manage creating an instance of an HttpHandler that is fired in response to a routed request. Depending on what you are doing this process can be simple or fairly involved as your code is responsible based on the route data provided which handler to instantiate, and more importantly how to pass the route data on to the Handler. Luckily creating a RouteHandler is easy by implementing the IRouteHandler interface which has only a single GetHttpHandler(RequestContext context) method. In this method you can pick up the requestContext.RouteData, instantiate the HttpHandler of choice, and assign the RouteData to it. Then pass back the handler and you’re done.Here’s a simple example of GetHttpHandler() method that dynamically creates a handler based on a passed in Handler type./// <summary> /// Retrieves an Http Handler based on the type specified in the constructor /// </summary> /// <param name="requestContext"></param> /// <returns></returns> IHttpHandler IRouteHandler.GetHttpHandler(RequestContext requestContext) { IHttpHandler handler = Activator.CreateInstance(CallbackHandlerType) as IHttpHandler; // If we're dealing with a Callback Handler // pass the RouteData for this route to the Handler if (handler is CallbackHandler) ((CallbackHandler)handler).RouteData = requestContext.RouteData; return handler; } Note that this code checks for a specific type of handler and if it matches assigns the RouteData to this handler. This is optional but quite a common scenario if you want to work with RouteData. If the handler you need to instantiate isn’t under your control but you still need to pass RouteData to Handler code, an alternative is to pass the RouteData via the HttpContext.Items collection:IHttpHandler IRouteHandler.GetHttpHandler(RequestContext requestContext) { IHttpHandler handler = Activator.CreateInstance(CallbackHandlerType) as IHttpHandler; requestContext.HttpContext.Items["RouteData"] = requestContext.RouteData; return handler; } The code in the handler implementation can then pick up the RouteData from the context collection as needed:RouteData routeData = HttpContext.Current.Items["RouteData"] as RouteData This isn’t as clean as having an explicit RouteData property, but it does have the advantage that the route data is visible anywhere in the Handler’s code chain. It’s definitely preferable to create a custom property on your handler, but the Context work-around works in a pinch when you don’t’ own the handler code and have dynamic code executing as part of the handler execution. An Example of a Custom RouteHandler: Attribute Based Route Implementation In this post I’m going to discuss a custom routine implementation I built for my CallbackHandler class in the West Wind Web & Ajax Toolkit. CallbackHandler can be very easily used for creating AJAX, REST and POX requests following RPC style method mapping. You can pass parameters via URL query string, POST data or raw data structures, and you can retrieve results as JSON, XML or raw string/binary data. It’s a quick and easy way to build service interfaces with no fuss. As a quick review here’s how CallbackHandler works: You create an Http Handler that derives from CallbackHandler You implement methods that have a [CallbackMethod] Attribute and that’s it. Here’s an example of an CallbackHandler implementation in an ashx.cs based handler:// RestService.ashx.cs public class RestService : CallbackHandler { [CallbackMethod] public StockQuote GetStockQuote(string symbol) { StockServer server = new StockServer(); return server.GetStockQuote(symbol); } [CallbackMethod] public StockQuote[] GetStockQuotes(string symbolList) { StockServer server = new StockServer(); string[] symbols = symbolList.Split(new char[2] { ',',';' },StringSplitOptions.RemoveEmptyEntries); return server.GetStockQuotes(symbols); } } CallbackHandler makes it super easy to create a method on the server, pass data to it via POST, QueryString or raw JSON/XML data, and then retrieve the results easily back in various formats. This works wonderful and I’ve used these tools in many projects for myself and with clients. But one thing missing has been the ability to create clean URLs. Typical URLs looked like this: http://www.west-wind.com/WestwindWebToolkit/samples/Rest/StockService.ashx?Method=GetStockQuote&symbol=msfthttp://www.west-wind.com/WestwindWebToolkit/samples/Rest/StockService.ashx?Method=GetStockQuotes&symbolList=msft,intc,gld,slw,mwe&format=xml which works and is clear enough, but also clearly very ugly. It would be much nicer if URLs could look like this: http://www.west-wind.com//WestwindWebtoolkit/Samples/StockQuote/msfthttp://www.west-wind.com/WestwindWebtoolkit/Samples/StockQuotes/msft,intc,gld,slw?format=xml (the Virtual Root in this sample is WestWindWebToolkit/Samples and StockQuote/{symbol} is the route)(If you use FireFox try using the JSONView plug-in make it easier to view JSON content) So, taking a clue from the WCF REST tools that use RouteUrls I set out to create a way to specify RouteUrls for each of the endpoints. The change made basically allows changing the above to: [CallbackMethod(RouteUrl="RestService/StockQuote/{symbol}")] public StockQuote GetStockQuote(string symbol) { StockServer server = new StockServer(); return server.GetStockQuote(symbol); } [CallbackMethod(RouteUrl = "RestService/StockQuotes/{symbolList}")] public StockQuote[] GetStockQuotes(string symbolList) { StockServer server = new StockServer(); string[] symbols = symbolList.Split(new char[2] { ',',';' },StringSplitOptions.RemoveEmptyEntries); return server.GetStockQuotes(symbols); } where a RouteUrl is specified as part of the Callback attribute. And with the changes made with RouteUrls I can now get URLs like the second set shown earlier. So how does that work? Let’s find out… How to Create Custom Routes As mentioned earlier Routing is made up of several steps: Creating a custom RouteHandler to create HttpHandler instances Mapping the actual Routes to the RouteHandler Retrieving the RouteData and actually doing something useful with it in the HttpHandler In the CallbackHandler routing example above this works out to something like this: Create a custom RouteHandler that includes a property to track the method to call Set up the routes using Reflection against the class Looking for any RouteUrls in the CallbackMethod attribute Add a RouteData property to the CallbackHandler so we can access the RouteData in the code of the handler Creating a Custom Route Handler To make the above work I created a custom RouteHandler class that includes the actual IRouteHandler implementation as well as a generic and static method to automatically register all routes marked with the [CallbackMethod(RouteUrl="…")] attribute. Here’s the code:/// <summary> /// Route handler that can create instances of CallbackHandler derived /// callback classes. The route handler tracks the method name and /// creates an instance of the service in a predictable manner /// </summary> /// <typeparam name="TCallbackHandler">CallbackHandler type</typeparam> public class CallbackHandlerRouteHandler : IRouteHandler { /// <summary> /// Method name that is to be called on this route. /// Set by the automatically generated RegisterRoutes /// invokation. /// </summary> public string MethodName { get; set; } /// <summary> /// The type of the handler we're going to instantiate. /// Needed so we can semi-generically instantiate the /// handler and call the method on it. /// </summary> public Type CallbackHandlerType { get; set; } /// <summary> /// Constructor to pass in the two required components we /// need to create an instance of our handler. /// </summary> /// <param name="methodName"></param> /// <param name="callbackHandlerType"></param> public CallbackHandlerRouteHandler(string methodName, Type callbackHandlerType) { MethodName = methodName; CallbackHandlerType = callbackHandlerType; } /// <summary> /// Retrieves an Http Handler based on the type specified in the constructor /// </summary> /// <param name="requestContext"></param> /// <returns></returns> IHttpHandler IRouteHandler.GetHttpHandler(RequestContext requestContext) { IHttpHandler handler = Activator.CreateInstance(CallbackHandlerType) as IHttpHandler; // If we're dealing with a Callback Handler // pass the RouteData for this route to the Handler if (handler is CallbackHandler) ((CallbackHandler)handler).RouteData = requestContext.RouteData; return handler; } /// <summary> /// Generic method to register all routes from a CallbackHandler /// that have RouteUrls defined on the [CallbackMethod] attribute /// </summary> /// <typeparam name="TCallbackHandler">CallbackHandler Type</typeparam> /// <param name="routes"></param> public static void RegisterRoutes<TCallbackHandler>(RouteCollection routes) { // find all methods var methods = typeof(TCallbackHandler).GetMethods(BindingFlags.Instance | BindingFlags.Public); foreach (var method in methods) { var attrs = method.GetCustomAttributes(typeof(CallbackMethodAttribute), false); if (attrs.Length < 1) continue; CallbackMethodAttribute attr = attrs[0] as CallbackMethodAttribute; if (string.IsNullOrEmpty(attr.RouteUrl)) continue; // Add the route routes.Add(method.Name, new Route(attr.RouteUrl, new CallbackHandlerRouteHandler(method.Name, typeof(TCallbackHandler)))); } } } The RouteHandler implements IRouteHandler, and its responsibility via the GetHandler method is to create an HttpHandler based on the route data. When ASP.NET calls GetHandler it passes a requestContext parameter which includes a requestContext.RouteData property. This parameter holds the current request’s route data as well as an instance of the current RouteHandler. If you look at GetHttpHandler() you can see that the code creates an instance of the handler we are interested in and then sets the RouteData property on the handler. This is how you can pass the current request’s RouteData to the handler. The RouteData object also has a  RouteData.RouteHandler property that is also available to the Handler later, which is useful in order to get additional information about the current route. In our case here the RouteHandler includes a MethodName property that identifies the method to execute in the handler since that value no longer comes from the URL so we need to figure out the method name some other way. The method name is mapped explicitly when the RouteHandler is created and here the static method that auto-registers all CallbackMethods with RouteUrls sets the method name when it creates the routes while reflecting over the methods (more on this in a minute). The important point here is that you can attach additional properties to the RouteHandler and you can then later access the RouteHandler and its properties later in the Handler to pick up these custom values. This is a crucial feature in that the RouteHandler serves in passing additional context to the handler so it knows what actions to perform. The automatic route registration is handled by the static RegisterRoutes<TCallbackHandler> method. This method is generic and totally reusable for any CallbackHandler type handler. To register a CallbackHandler and any RouteUrls it has defined you simple use code like this in Application_Start (or other application startup code):protected void Application_Start(object sender, EventArgs e) { // Register Routes for RestService CallbackHandlerRouteHandler.RegisterRoutes<RestService>(RouteTable.Routes); } If you have multiple CallbackHandler style services you can make multiple calls to RegisterRoutes for each of the service types. RegisterRoutes internally uses reflection to run through all the methods of the Handler, looking for CallbackMethod attributes and whether a RouteUrl is specified. If it is a new instance of a CallbackHandlerRouteHandler is created and the name of the method and the type are set. routes.Add(method.Name,           new Route(attr.RouteUrl, new CallbackHandlerRouteHandler(method.Name, typeof(TCallbackHandler) )) ); While the routing with CallbackHandlerRouteHandler is set up automatically for all methods that use the RouteUrl attribute, you can also use code to hook up those routes manually and skip using the attribute. The code for this is straightforward and just requires that you manually map each individual route to each method you want a routed: protected void Application_Start(objectsender, EventArgs e){    RegisterRoutes(RouteTable.Routes);}void RegisterRoutes(RouteCollection routes) { routes.Add("StockQuote Route",new Route("StockQuote/{symbol}",                     new CallbackHandlerRouteHandler("GetStockQuote",typeof(RestService) ) ) );     routes.Add("StockQuotes Route",new Route("StockQuotes/{symbolList}",                     new CallbackHandlerRouteHandler("GetStockQuotes",typeof(RestService) ) ) );}I think it’s clearly easier to have CallbackHandlerRouteHandler.RegisterRoutes() do this automatically for you based on RouteUrl attributes, but some people have a real aversion to attaching logic via attributes. Just realize that the option to manually create your routes is available as well. Using the RouteData in the Handler A RouteHandler’s responsibility is to create an HttpHandler and as mentioned earlier, natively IHttpHandler doesn’t have any support for RouteData. In order to utilize RouteData in your handler code you have to pass the RouteData to the handler. In my CallbackHandlerRouteHandler when it creates the HttpHandler instance it creates the instance and then assigns the custom RouteData property on the handler:IHttpHandler handler = Activator.CreateInstance(CallbackHandlerType) as IHttpHandler; if (handler is CallbackHandler) ((CallbackHandler)handler).RouteData = requestContext.RouteData; return handler; Again this only works if you actually add a RouteData property to your handler explicitly as I did in my CallbackHandler implementation:/// <summary> /// Optionally store RouteData on this handler /// so we can access it internally /// </summary> public RouteData RouteData {get; set; } and the RouteHandler needs to set it when it creates the handler instance. Once you have the route data in your handler you can access Route Keys and Values and also the RouteHandler. Since my RouteHandler has a custom property for the MethodName to retrieve it from within the handler I can do something like this now to retrieve the MethodName (this example is actually not in the handler but target is an instance pass to the processor): // check for Route Data method name if (target is CallbackHandler) { var routeData = ((CallbackHandler)target).RouteData; if (routeData != null) methodToCall = ((CallbackHandlerRouteHandler)routeData.RouteHandler).MethodName; } When I need to access the dynamic values in the route ( symbol in StockQuote/{symbol}) I can retrieve it easily with the Values collection (RouteData.Values["symbol"]). In my CallbackHandler processing logic I’m basically looking for matching parameter names to Route parameters: // look for parameters in the routeif(routeData != null){    string parmString = routeData.Values[parameter.Name] as string;    adjustedParms[parmCounter] = ReflectionUtils.StringToTypedValue(parmString, parameter.ParameterType);} And with that we’ve come full circle. We’ve created a custom RouteHandler() that passes the RouteData to the handler it creates. We’ve registered our routes to use the RouteHandler, and we’ve utilized the route data in our handler. For completeness sake here’s the routine that executes a method call based on the parameters passed in and one of the options is to retrieve the inbound parameters off RouteData (as well as from POST data or QueryString parameters):internal object ExecuteMethod(string method, object target, string[] parameters, CallbackMethodParameterType paramType, ref CallbackMethodAttribute callbackMethodAttribute) { HttpRequest Request = HttpContext.Current.Request; object Result = null; // Stores parsed parameters (from string JSON or QUeryString Values) object[] adjustedParms = null; Type PageType = target.GetType(); MethodInfo MI = PageType.GetMethod(method, BindingFlags.Instance | BindingFlags.Public | BindingFlags.NonPublic); if (MI == null) throw new InvalidOperationException("Invalid Server Method."); object[] methods = MI.GetCustomAttributes(typeof(CallbackMethodAttribute), false); if (methods.Length < 1) throw new InvalidOperationException("Server method is not accessible due to missing CallbackMethod attribute"); if (callbackMethodAttribute != null) callbackMethodAttribute = methods[0] as CallbackMethodAttribute; ParameterInfo[] parms = MI.GetParameters(); JSONSerializer serializer = new JSONSerializer(); RouteData routeData = null; if (target is CallbackHandler) routeData = ((CallbackHandler)target).RouteData; int parmCounter = 0; adjustedParms = new object[parms.Length]; foreach (ParameterInfo parameter in parms) { // Retrieve parameters out of QueryString or POST buffer if (parameters == null) { // look for parameters in the route if (routeData != null) { string parmString = routeData.Values[parameter.Name] as string; adjustedParms[parmCounter] = ReflectionUtils.StringToTypedValue(parmString, parameter.ParameterType); } // GET parameter are parsed as plain string values - no JSON encoding else if (HttpContext.Current.Request.HttpMethod == "GET") { // Look up the parameter by name string parmString = Request.QueryString[parameter.Name]; adjustedParms[parmCounter] = ReflectionUtils.StringToTypedValue(parmString, parameter.ParameterType); } // POST parameters are treated as methodParameters that are JSON encoded else if (paramType == CallbackMethodParameterType.Json) //string newVariable = methodParameters.GetValue(parmCounter) as string; adjustedParms[parmCounter] = serializer.Deserialize(Request.Params["parm" + (parmCounter + 1).ToString()], parameter.ParameterType); else adjustedParms[parmCounter] = SerializationUtils.DeSerializeObject( Request.Params["parm" + (parmCounter + 1).ToString()], parameter.ParameterType); } else if (paramType == CallbackMethodParameterType.Json) adjustedParms[parmCounter] = serializer.Deserialize(parameters[parmCounter], parameter.ParameterType); else adjustedParms[parmCounter] = SerializationUtils.DeSerializeObject(parameters[parmCounter], parameter.ParameterType); parmCounter++; } Result = MI.Invoke(target, adjustedParms); return Result; } The code basically uses Reflection to loop through all the parameters available on the method and tries to assign the parameters from RouteData, QueryString or POST variables. The parameters are converted into their appropriate types and then used to eventually make a Reflection based method call. What’s sweet is that the RouteData retrieval is just another option for dealing with the inbound data in this scenario and it adds exactly two lines of code plus the code to retrieve the MethodName I showed previously – a seriously low impact addition that adds a lot of extra value to this endpoint callback processing implementation. Debugging your Routes If you create a lot of routes it’s easy to run into Route conflicts where multiple routes have the same path and overlap with each other. This can be difficult to debug especially if you are using automatically generated routes like the routes created by CallbackHandlerRouteHandler.RegisterRoutes. Luckily there’s a tool that can help you out with this nicely. Phill Haack created a RouteDebugging tool you can download and add to your project. The easiest way to do this is to grab and add this to your project is to use NuGet (Add Library Package from your Project’s Reference Nodes):   which adds a RouteDebug assembly to your project. Once installed you can easily debug your routes with this simple line of code which needs to be installed at application startup:protected void Application_Start(object sender, EventArgs e) { CallbackHandlerRouteHandler.RegisterRoutes<StockService>(RouteTable.Routes); // Debug your routes RouteDebug.RouteDebugger.RewriteRoutesForTesting(RouteTable.Routes); } Any routed URL then displays something like this: The screen shows you your current route data and all the routes that are mapped along with a flag that displays which route was actually matched. This is useful – if you have any overlap of routes you will be able to see which routes are triggered – the first one in the sequence wins. This tool has saved my ass on a few occasions – and with NuGet now it’s easy to add it to your project in a few seconds and then remove it when you’re done. Routing Around Custom routing seems slightly complicated on first blush due to its disconnected components of RouteHandler, route registration and mapping of custom handlers. But once you understand the relationship between a RouteHandler, the RouteData and how to pass it to a handler, utilizing of Routing becomes a lot easier as you can easily pass context from the registration to the RouteHandler and through to the HttpHandler. The most important thing to understand when building custom routing solutions is to figure out how to map URLs in such a way that the handler can figure out all the pieces it needs to process the request. This can be via URL routing parameters and as I did in my example by passing additional context information as part of the RouteHandler instance that provides the proper execution context. In my case this ‘context’ was the method name, but it could be an actual static value like an enum identifying an operation or category in an application. Basically user supplied data comes in through the url and static application internal data can be passed via RouteHandler property values. Routing can make your application URLs easier to read by non-techie types regardless of whether you’re building Service type or REST applications, or full on Web interfaces. Routing in ASP.NET 4.0 makes it possible to create just about any extensionless URLs you can dream up and custom RouteHanmdler References Sample ProjectIncludes the sample CallbackHandler service discussed here along with compiled versionsof the Westwind.Web and Westwind.Utilities assemblies.  (requires .NET 4.0/VS 2010) West Wind Web Toolkit includes full implementation of CallbackHandler and the Routing Handler West Wind Web Toolkit Source CodeContains the full source code to the Westwind.Web and Westwind.Utilities assemblies usedin these samples. Includes the source described in the post.(Latest build in the Subversion Repository) CallbackHandler Source(Relevant code to this article tree in Westwind.Web assembly) JSONView FireFoxPluginA simple FireFox Plugin to easily view JSON data natively in FireFox.For IE you can use a registry hack to display JSON as raw text.© Rick Strahl, West Wind Technologies, 2005-2011Posted in ASP.NET  AJAX  HTTP  

    Read the article

  • Windows Azure: Import/Export Hard Drives, VM ACLs, Web Sockets, Remote Debugging, Continuous Delivery, New Relic, Billing Alerts and More

    - by ScottGu
    Two weeks ago we released a giant set of improvements to Windows Azure, as well as a significant update of the Windows Azure SDK. This morning we released another massive set of enhancements to Windows Azure.  Today’s new capabilities include: Storage: Import/Export Hard Disk Drives to your Storage Accounts HDInsight: General Availability of our Hadoop Service in the cloud Virtual Machines: New VM Gallery, ACL support for VIPs Web Sites: WebSocket and Remote Debugging Support Notification Hubs: Segmented customer push notification support with tag expressions TFS & GIT: Continuous Delivery Support for Web Sites + Cloud Services Developer Analytics: New Relic support for Web Sites + Mobile Services Service Bus: Support for partitioned queues and topics Billing: New Billing Alert Service that sends emails notifications when your bill hits a threshold you define All of these improvements are now available to use immediately (note that some features are still in preview).  Below are more details about them. Storage: Import/Export Hard Disk Drives to Windows Azure I am excited to announce the preview of our new Windows Azure Import/Export Service! The Windows Azure Import/Export Service enables you to move large amounts of on-premises data into and out of your Windows Azure Storage accounts. It does this by enabling you to securely ship hard disk drives directly to our Windows Azure data centers. Once we receive the drives we’ll automatically transfer the data to or from your Windows Azure Storage account.  This enables you to import or export massive amounts of data more quickly and cost effectively (and not be constrained by available network bandwidth). Encrypted Transport Our Import/Export service provides built-in support for BitLocker disk encryption – which enables you to securely encrypt data on the hard drives before you send it, and not have to worry about it being compromised even if the disk is lost/stolen in transit (since the content on the transported hard drives is completely encrypted and you are the only one who has the key to it).  The drive preparation tool we are shipping today makes setting up bitlocker encryption on these hard drives easy. How to Import/Export your first Hard Drive of Data You can read our Getting Started Guide to learn more about how to begin using the import/export service.  You can create import and export jobs via the Windows Azure Management Portal as well as programmatically using our Server Management APIs. It is really easy to create a new import or export job using the Windows Azure Management Portal.  Simply navigate to a Windows Azure storage account, and then click the new Import/Export tab now available within it (note: if you don’t have this tab make sure to sign-up for the Import/Export preview): Then click the “Create Import Job” or “Create Export Job” commands at the bottom of it.  This will launch a wizard that easily walks you through the steps required: For more comprehensive information about Import/Export, refer to Windows Azure Storage team blog.  You can also send questions and comments to the [email protected] email address. We think you’ll find this new service makes it much easier to move data into and out of Windows Azure, and it will dramatically cut down the network bandwidth required when working on large data migration projects.  We hope you like it. HDInsight: 100% Compatible Hadoop Service in the Cloud Last week we announced the general availability release of Windows Azure HDInsight. HDInsight is a 100% compatible Hadoop service that allows you to easily provision and manage Hadoop clusters for big data processing in Windows Azure.  This release is now live in production, backed by an enterprise SLA, supported 24x7 by Microsoft Support, and is ready to use for production scenarios. HDInsight allows you to use Apache Hadoop tools, such as Pig and Hive, to process large amounts of data in Windows Azure Blob Storage. Because data is stored in Windows Azure Blob Storage, you can choose to dynamically create Hadoop clusters only when you need them, and then shut them down when they are no longer required (since you pay only for the time the Hadoop cluster instances are running this provides a super cost effective way to use them).  You can create Hadoop clusters using either the Windows Azure Management Portal (see below) or using our PowerShell and Cross Platform Command line tools: The import/export hard drive support that came out today is a perfect companion service to use with HDInsight – the combination allows you to easily ingest, process and optionally export a limitless amount of data.  We’ve also integrated HDInsight with our Business Intelligence tools, so users can leverage familiar tools like Excel in order to analyze the output of jobs.  You can find out more about how to get started with HDInsight here. Virtual Machines: VM Gallery Enhancements Today’s update of Windows Azure brings with it a new Virtual Machine gallery that you can use to create new VMs in the cloud.  You can launch the gallery by doing New->Compute->Virtual Machine->From Gallery within the Windows Azure Management Portal: The new Virtual Machine Gallery includes some nice enhancements that make it even easier to use: Search: You can now easily search and filter images using the search box in the top-right of the dialog.  For example, simply type “SQL” and we’ll filter to show those images in the gallery that contain that substring. Category Tree-view: Each month we add more built-in VM images to the gallery.  You can continue to browse these using the “All” view within the VM Gallery – or now quickly filter them using the category tree-view on the left-hand side of the dialog.  For example, by selecting “Oracle” in the tree-view you can now quickly filter to see the official Oracle supplied images. MSDN and Supported checkboxes: With today’s update we are also introducing filters that makes it easy to filter out types of images that you may not be interested in. The first checkbox is MSDN: using this filter you can exclude any image that is not part of the Windows Azure benefits for MSDN subscribers (which have highly discounted pricing - you can learn more about the MSDN pricing here). The second checkbox is Supported: this filter will exclude any image that contains prerelease software, so you can feel confident that the software you choose to deploy is fully supported by Windows Azure and our partners. Sort options: We sort gallery images by what we think customers are most interested in, but sometimes you might want to sort using different views. So we’re providing some additional sort options, like “Newest,” to customize the image list for what suits you best. Pricing information: We now provide additional pricing information about images and options on how to cost effectively run them directly within the VM Gallery. The above improvements make it even easier to use the VM Gallery and quickly create launch and run Virtual Machines in the cloud. Virtual Machines: ACL Support for VIPs A few months ago we exposed the ability to configure Access Control Lists (ACLs) for Virtual Machines using Windows PowerShell cmdlets and our Service Management API. With today’s release, you can now configure VM ACLs using the Windows Azure Management Portal as well. You can now do this by clicking the new Manage ACL command in the Endpoints tab of a virtual machine instance: This will enable you to configure an ordered list of permit and deny rules to scope the traffic that can access your VM’s network endpoints. For example, if you were on a virtual network, you could limit RDP access to a Windows Azure virtual machine to only a few computers attached to your enterprise. Or if you weren’t on a virtual network you could alternatively limit traffic from public IPs that can access your workloads: Here is the default behaviors for ACLs in Windows Azure: By default (i.e. no rules specified), all traffic is permitted. When using only Permit rules, all other traffic is denied. When using only Deny rules, all other traffic is permitted. When there is a combination of Permit and Deny rules, all other traffic is denied. Lastly, remember that configuring endpoints does not automatically configure them within the VM if it also has firewall rules enabled at the OS level.  So if you create an endpoint using the Windows Azure Management Portal, Windows PowerShell, or REST API, be sure to also configure your guest VM firewall appropriately as well. Web Sites: Web Sockets Support With today’s release you can now use Web Sockets with Windows Azure Web Sites.  This feature enables you to easily integrate real-time communication scenarios within your web based applications, and is available at no extra charge (it even works with the free tier).  Higher level programming libraries like SignalR and socket.io are also now supported with it. You can enable Web Sockets support on a web site by navigating to the Configure tab of a Web Site, and by toggling Web Sockets support to “on”: Once Web Sockets is enabled you can start to integrate some really cool scenarios into your web applications.  Check out the new SignalR documentation hub on www.asp.net to learn more about some of the awesome scenarios you can do with it. Web Sites: Remote Debugging Support The Windows Azure SDK 2.2 we released two weeks ago introduced remote debugging support for Windows Azure Cloud Services. With today’s Windows Azure release we are extending this remote debugging support to also work with Windows Azure Web Sites. With live, remote debugging support inside of Visual Studio, you are able to have more visibility than ever before into how your code is operating live in Windows Azure. It is now super easy to attach the debugger and quickly see what is going on with your application in the cloud. Remote Debugging of a Windows Azure Web Site using VS 2013 Enabling the remote debugging of a Windows Azure Web Site using VS 2013 is really easy.  Start by opening up your web application’s project within Visual Studio. Then navigate to the “Server Explorer” tab within Visual Studio, and click on the deployed web-site you want to debug that is running within Windows Azure using the Windows Azure->Web Sites node in the Server Explorer.  Then right-click and choose the “Attach Debugger” option on it: When you do this Visual Studio will remotely attach the debugger to the Web Site running within Windows Azure.  The debugger will then stop the web site’s execution when it hits any break points that you have set within your web application’s project inside Visual Studio.  For example, below I set a breakpoint on the “ViewBag.Message” assignment statement within the HomeController of the standard ASP.NET MVC project template.  When I hit refresh on the “About” page of the web site within the browser, the breakpoint was triggered and I am now able to debug the app remotely using Visual Studio: Note above how we can debug variables (including autos/watchlist/etc), as well as use the Immediate and Command Windows. In the debug session above I used the Immediate Window to explore some of the request object state, as well as to dynamically change the ViewBag.Message property.  When we click the the “Continue” button (or press F5) the app will continue execution and the Web Site will render the content back to the browser.  This makes it super easy to debug web apps remotely. Tips for Better Debugging To get the best experience while debugging, we recommend publishing your site using the Debug configuration within Visual Studio’s Web Publish dialog. This will ensure that debug symbol information is uploaded to the Web Site which will enable a richer debug experience within Visual Studio.  You can find this option on the Web Publish dialog on the Settings tab: When you ultimately deploy/run the application in production we recommend using the “Release” configuration setting – the release configuration is memory optimized and will provide the best production performance.  To learn more about diagnosing and debugging Windows Azure Web Sites read our new Troubleshooting Windows Azure Web Sites in Visual Studio guide. Notification Hubs: Segmented Push Notification support with tag expressions In August we announced the General Availability of Windows Azure Notification Hubs - a powerful Mobile Push Notifications service that makes it easy to send high volume push notifications with low latency from any mobile app back-end.  Notification hubs can be used with any mobile app back-end (including ones built using our Mobile Services capability) and can also be used with back-ends that run in the cloud as well as on-premises. Beginning with the initial release, Notification Hubs allowed developers to send personalized push notifications to both individual users as well as groups of users by interest, by associating their devices with tags representing the logical target of the notification. For example, by registering all devices of customers interested in a favorite MLB team with a corresponding tag, it is possible to broadcast one message to millions of Boston Red Sox fans and another message to millions of St. Louis Cardinals fans with a single API call respectively. New support for using tag expressions to enable advanced customer segmentation With today’s release we are adding support for even more advanced customer targeting.  You can now identify customers that you want to send push notifications to by defining rich tag expressions. With tag expressions, you can now not only broadcast notifications to Boston Red Sox fans, but take that segmenting a step farther and reach more granular segments. This opens up a variety of scenarios, for example: Offers based on multiple preferences—e.g. send a game day vegetarian special to users tagged as both a Boston Red Sox fan AND a vegetarian Push content to multiple segments in a single message—e.g. rain delay information only to users who are tagged as either a Boston Red Sox fan OR a St. Louis Cardinal fan Avoid presenting subsets of a segment with irrelevant content—e.g. season ticket availability reminder to users who are tagged as a Boston Red Sox fan but NOT also a season ticket holder To illustrate with code, consider a restaurant chain app that sends an offer related to a Red Sox vs Cardinals game for users in Boston. Devices can be tagged by your app with location tags (e.g. “Loc:Boston”) and interest tags (e.g. “Follows:RedSox”, “Follows:Cardinals”), and then a notification can be sent by your back-end to “(Follows:RedSox || Follows:Cardinals) && Loc:Boston” in order to deliver an offer to all devices in Boston that follow either the RedSox or the Cardinals. This can be done directly in your server backend send logic using the code below: var notification = new WindowsNotification(messagePayload); hub.SendNotificationAsync(notification, "(Follows:RedSox || Follows:Cardinals) && Loc:Boston"); In your expressions you can use all Boolean operators: AND (&&), OR (||), and NOT (!).  Some other cool use cases for tag expressions that are now supported include: Social: To “all my group except me” - group:id && !user:id Events: Touchdown event is sent to everybody following either team or any of the players involved in the action: Followteam:A || Followteam:B || followplayer:1 || followplayer:2 … Hours: Send notifications at specific times. E.g. Tag devices with time zone and when it is 12pm in Seattle send to: GMT8 && follows:thaifood Versions and platforms: Send a reminder to people still using your first version for Android - version:1.0 && platform:Android For help on getting started with Notification Hubs, visit the Notification Hub documentation center.  Then download the latest NuGet package (or use the Notification Hubs REST APIs directly) to start sending push notifications using tag expressions.  They are really powerful and enable a bunch of great new scenarios. TFS & GIT: Continuous Delivery Support for Web Sites + Cloud Services With today’s Windows Azure release we are making it really easy to enable continuous delivery support with Windows Azure and Team Foundation Services.  Team Foundation Services is a cloud based offering from Microsoft that provides integrated source control (with both TFS and Git support), build server, test execution, collaboration tools, and agile planning support.  It makes it really easy to setup a team project (complete with automated builds and test runners) in the cloud, and it has really rich integration with Visual Studio. With today’s Windows Azure release it is now really easy to enable continuous delivery support with both TFS and Git based repositories hosted using Team Foundation Services.  This enables a workflow where when code is checked in, built successfully on an automated build server, and all tests pass on it – I can automatically have the app deployed on Windows Azure with zero manual intervention or work required. The below screen-shots demonstrate how to quickly setup a continuous delivery workflow to Windows Azure with a Git-based ASP.NET MVC project hosted using Team Foundation Services. Enabling Continuous Delivery to Windows Azure with Team Foundation Services The project I’m going to enable continuous delivery with is a simple ASP.NET MVC project whose source code I’m hosting using Team Foundation Services.  I did this by creating a “SimpleContinuousDeploymentTest” repository there using Git – and then used the new built-in Git tooling support within Visual Studio 2013 to push the source code to it.  Below is a screen-shot of the Git repository hosted within Team Foundation Services: I can access the repository within Visual Studio 2013 and easily make commits with it (as well as branch, merge and do other tasks).  Using VS 2013 I can also setup automated builds to take place in the cloud using Team Foundation Services every time someone checks in code to the repository: The cool thing about this is that I don’t have to buy or rent my own build server – Team Foundation Services automatically maintains its own build server farm and can automatically queue up a build for me (for free) every time someone checks in code using the above settings.  This build server (and automated testing) support now works with both TFS and Git based source control repositories. Connecting a Team Foundation Services project to Windows Azure Once I have a source repository hosted in Team Foundation Services with Automated Builds and Testing set up, I can then go even further and set it up so that it will be automatically deployed to Windows Azure when a source code commit is made to the repository (assuming the Build + Tests pass).  Enabling this is now really easy.  To set this up with a Windows Azure Web Site simply use the New->Compute->Web Site->Custom Create command inside the Windows Azure Management Portal.  This will create a dialog like below.  I gave the web site a name and then made sure the “Publish from source control” checkbox was selected: When we click next we’ll be prompted for the location of the source repository.  We’ll select “Team Foundation Services”: Once we do this we’ll be prompted for our Team Foundation Services account that our source repository is hosted under (in this case my TFS account is “scottguthrie”): When we click the “Authorize Now” button we’ll be prompted to give Windows Azure permissions to connect to the Team Foundation Services account.  Once we do this we’ll be prompted to pick the source repository we want to connect to.  Starting with today’s Windows Azure release you can now connect to both TFS and Git based source repositories.  This new support allows me to connect to the “SimpleContinuousDeploymentTest” respository we created earlier: Clicking the finish button will then create the Web Site with the continuous delivery hooks setup with Team Foundation Services.  Now every time someone pushes source control to the repository in Team Foundation Services, it will kick off an automated build, run all of the unit tests in the solution , and if they pass the app will be automatically deployed to our Web Site in Windows Azure.  You can monitor the history and status of these automated deployments using the Deployments tab within the Web Site: This enables a really slick continuous delivery workflow, and enables you to build and deploy apps in a really nice way. Developer Analytics: New Relic support for Web Sites + Mobile Services With today’s Windows Azure release we are making it really easy to enable Developer Analytics and Monitoring support with both Windows Azure Web Site and Windows Azure Mobile Services.  We are partnering with New Relic, who provide a great dev analytics and app performance monitoring offering, to enable this - and we have updated the Windows Azure Management Portal to make it really easy to configure. Enabling New Relic with a Windows Azure Web Site Enabling New Relic support with a Windows Azure Web Site is now really easy.  Simply navigate to the Configure tab of a Web Site and scroll down to the “developer analytics” section that is now within it: Clicking the “add-on” button will display some additional UI.  If you don’t already have a New Relic subscription, you can click the “view windows azure store” button to obtain a subscription (note: New Relic has a perpetually free tier so you can enable it even without paying anything): Clicking the “view windows azure store” button will launch the integrated Windows Azure Store experience we have within the Windows Azure Management Portal.  You can use this to browse from a variety of great add-on services – including New Relic: Select “New Relic” within the dialog above, then click the next button, and you’ll be able to choose which type of New Relic subscription you wish to purchase.  For this demo we’ll simply select the “Free Standard Version” – which does not cost anything and can be used forever:  Once we’ve signed-up for our New Relic subscription and added it to our Windows Azure account, we can go back to the Web Site’s configuration tab and choose to use the New Relic add-on with our Windows Azure Web Site.  We can do this by simply selecting it from the “add-on” dropdown (it is automatically populated within it once we have a New Relic subscription in our account): Clicking the “Save” button will then cause the Windows Azure Management Portal to automatically populate all of the needed New Relic configuration settings to our Web Site: Deploying the New Relic Agent as part of a Web Site The final step to enable developer analytics using New Relic is to add the New Relic runtime agent to our web app.  We can do this within Visual Studio by right-clicking on our web project and selecting the “Manage NuGet Packages” context menu: This will bring up the NuGet package manager.  You can search for “New Relic” within it to find the New Relic agent.  Note that there is both a 32-bit and 64-bit edition of it – make sure to install the version that matches how your Web Site is running within Windows Azure (note: you can configure your Web Site to run in either 32-bit or 64-bit mode using the Web Site’s “Configuration” tab within the Windows Azure Management Portal): Once we install the NuGet package we are all set to go.  We’ll simply re-publish the web site again to Windows Azure and New Relic will now automatically start monitoring the application Monitoring a Web Site using New Relic Now that the application has developer analytics support with New Relic enabled, we can launch the New Relic monitoring portal to start monitoring the health of it.  We can do this by clicking on the “Add Ons” tab in the left-hand side of the Windows Azure Management Portal.  Then select the New Relic add-on we signed-up for within it.  The Windows Azure Management Portal will provide some default information about the add-on when we do this.  Clicking the “Manage” button in the tray at the bottom will launch a new browser tab and single-sign us into the New Relic monitoring portal associated with our account: When we do this a new browser tab will launch with the New Relic admin tool loaded within it: We can now see insights into how our app is performing – without having to have written a single line of monitoring code.  The New Relic service provides a ton of great built-in monitoring features allowing us to quickly see: Performance times (including browser rendering speed) for the overall site and individual pages.  You can optionally set alert thresholds to trigger if the speed does not meet a threshold you specify. Information about where in the world your customers are hitting the site from (and how performance varies by region) Details on the latency performance of external services your web apps are using (for example: SQL, Storage, Twitter, etc) Error information including call stack details for exceptions that have occurred at runtime SQL Server profiling information – including which queries executed against your database and what their performance was And a whole bunch more… The cool thing about New Relic is that you don’t need to write monitoring code within your application to get all of the above reports (plus a lot more).  The New Relic agent automatically enables the CLR profiler within applications and automatically captures the information necessary to identify these.  This makes it super easy to get started and immediately have a rich developer analytics view for your solutions with very little effort. If you haven’t tried New Relic out yet with Windows Azure I recommend you do so – I think you’ll find it helps you build even better cloud applications.  Following the above steps will help you get started and deliver you a really good application monitoring solution in only minutes. Service Bus: Support for partitioned queues and topics With today’s release, we are enabling support within Service Bus for partitioned queues and topics. Enabling partitioning enables you to achieve a higher message throughput and better availability from your queues and topics. Higher message throughput is achieved by implementing multiple message brokers for each partitioned queue and topic.  The  multiple messaging stores will also provide higher availability. You can create a partitioned queue or topic by simply checking the Enable Partitioning option in the custom create wizard for a Queue or Topic: Read this article to learn more about partitioned queues and topics and how to take advantage of them today. Billing: New Billing Alert Service Today’s Windows Azure update enables a new Billing Alert Service Preview that enables you to get proactive email notifications when your Windows Azure bill goes above a certain monetary threshold that you configure.  This makes it easier to manage your bill and avoid potential surprises at the end of the month. With the Billing Alert Service Preview, you can now create email alerts to monitor and manage your monetary credits or your current bill total.  To set up an alert first sign-up for the free Billing Alert Service Preview.  Then visit the account management page, click on a subscription you have setup, and then navigate to the new Alerts tab that is available: The alerts tab allows you to setup email alerts that will be sent automatically once a certain threshold is hit.  For example, by clicking the “add alert” button above I can setup a rule to send myself email anytime my Windows Azure bill goes above $100 for the month: The Billing Alert Service will evolve to support additional aspects of your bill as well as support multiple forms of alerts such as SMS.  Try out the new Billing Alert Service Preview today and give us feedback. Summary Today’s Windows Azure release enables a ton of great new scenarios, and makes building applications hosted in the cloud even easier. If you don’t already have a Windows Azure account, you can sign-up for a free trial and start using all of the above features today.  Then visit the Windows Azure Developer Center to learn more about how to build apps with it. Hope this helps, Scott P.S. In addition to blogging, I am also now using Twitter for quick updates and to share links. Follow me at: twitter.com/scottgu

    Read the article

  • Using HTML 5 SessionState to save rendered Page Content

    - by Rick Strahl
    HTML 5 SessionState and LocalStorage are very useful and super easy to use to manage client side state. For building rich client side or SPA style applications it's a vital feature to be able to cache user data as well as HTML content in order to swap pages in and out of the browser's DOM. What might not be so obvious is that you can also use the sessionState and localStorage objects even in classic server rendered HTML applications to provide caching features between pages. These APIs have been around for a long time and are supported by most relatively modern browsers and even all the way back to IE8, so you can use them safely in your Web applications. SessionState and LocalStorage are easy The APIs that make up sessionState and localStorage are very simple. Both object feature the same API interface which  is a simple, string based key value store that has getItem, setItem, removeitem, clear and  key methods. The objects are also pseudo array objects and so can be iterated like an array with  a length property and you have array indexers to set and get values with. Basic usage  for storing and retrieval looks like this (using sessionStorage, but the syntax is the same for localStorage - just switch the objects):// set var lastAccess = new Date().getTime(); if (sessionStorage) sessionStorage.setItem("myapp_time", lastAccess.toString()); // retrieve in another page or on a refresh var time = null; if (sessionStorage) time = sessionStorage.getItem("myapp_time"); if (time) time = new Date(time * 1); else time = new Date(); sessionState stores data that is browser session specific and that has a liftetime of the active browser session or window. Shut down the browser or tab and the storage goes away. localStorage uses the same API interface, but the lifetime of the data is permanently stored in the browsers storage area until deleted via code or by clearing out browser cookies (not the cache). Both sessionStorage and localStorage space is limited. The spec is ambiguous about this - supposedly sessionStorage should allow for unlimited size, but it appears that most WebKit browsers support only 2.5mb for either object. This means you have to be careful what you store especially since other applications might be running on the same domain and also use the storage mechanisms. That said 2.5mb worth of character data is quite a bit and would go a long way. The easiest way to get a feel for how sessionState and localStorage work is to look at a simple example. You can go check out the following example online in Plunker: http://plnkr.co/edit/0ICotzkoPjHaWa70GlRZ?p=preview which looks like this: Plunker is an online HTML/JavaScript editor that lets you write and run Javascript code and similar to JsFiddle, but a bit cleaner to work in IMHO (thanks to John Papa for turning me on to it). The sample has two text boxes with counts that update session/local storage every time you click the related button. The counts are 'cached' in Session and Local storage. The point of these examples is that both counters survive full page reloads, and the LocalStorage counter survives a complete browser shutdown and restart. Go ahead and try it out by clicking the Reload button after updating both counters and then shutting down the browser completely and going back to the same URL (with the same browser). What you should see is that reloads leave both counters intact at the counted values, while a browser restart will leave only the local storage counter intact. The code to deal with the SessionStorage (and LocalStorage not shown here) in the example is isolated into a couple of wrapper methods to simplify the code: function getSessionCount() { var count = 0; if (sessionStorage) { var count = sessionStorage.getItem("ss_count"); count = !count ? 0 : count * 1; } $("#txtSession").val(count); return count; } function setSessionCount(count) { if (sessionStorage) sessionStorage.setItem("ss_count", count.toString()); } These two functions essentially load and store a session counter value. The two key methods used here are: sessionStorage.getItem(key); sessionStorage.setItem(key,stringVal); Note that the value given to setItem and return by getItem has to be a string. If you pass another type you get an error. Don't let that limit you though - you can easily enough store JSON data in a variable so it's quite possible to pass complex objects and store them into a single sessionStorage value:var user = { name: "Rick", id="ricks", level=8 } sessionStorage.setItem("app_user",JSON.stringify(user)); to retrieve it:var user = sessionStorage.getItem("app_user"); if (user) user = JSON.parse(user); Simple! If you're using the Chrome Developer Tools (F12) you can also check out the session and local storage state on the Resource tab:   You can also use this tool to refresh or remove entries from storage. What we just looked at is a purely client side implementation where a couple of counters are stored. For rich client centric AJAX applications sessionStorage and localStorage provide a very nice and simple API to store application state while the application is running. But you can also use these storage mechanisms to manage server centric HTML applications when you combine server rendering with some JavaScript to perform client side data caching. You can both store some state information and data on the client (ie. store a JSON object and carry it forth between server rendered HTML requests) or you can use it for good old HTTP based caching where some rendered HTML is saved and then restored later. Let's look at the latter with a real life example. Why do I need Client-side Page Caching for Server Rendered HTML? I don't know about you, but in a lot of my existing server driven applications I have lists that display a fair amount of data. Typically these lists contain links to then drill down into more specific data either for viewing or editing. You can then click on a link and go off to a detail page that provides more concise content. So far so good. But now you're done with the detail page and need to get back to the list, so you click on a 'bread crumbs trail' or an application level 'back to list' button and… …you end up back at the top of the list - the scroll position, the current selection in some cases even filters conditions - all gone with the wind. You've left behind the state of the list and are starting from scratch in your browsing of the list from the top. Not cool! Sound familiar? This a pretty common scenario with server rendered HTML content where it's so common to display lists to drill into, only to lose state in the process of returning back to the original list. Look at just about any traditional forums application, or even StackOverFlow to see what I mean here. Scroll down a bit to look at a post or entry, drill in then use the bread crumbs or tab to go back… In some cases returning to the top of a list is not a big deal. On StackOverFlow that sort of works because content is turning around so quickly you probably want to actually look at the top posts. Not always though - if you're browsing through a list of search topics you're interested in and drill in there's no way back to that position. Essentially anytime you're actively browsing the items in the list, that's when state becomes important and if it's not handled the user experience can be really disrupting. Content Caching If you're building client centric SPA style applications this is a fairly easy to solve problem - you tend to render the list once and then update the page content to overlay the detail content, only hiding the list temporarily until it's used again later. It's relatively easy to accomplish this simply by hiding content on the page and later making it visible again. But if you use server rendered content, hanging on to all the detail like filters, selections and scroll position is not quite as easy. Or is it??? This is where sessionStorage comes in handy. What if we just save the rendered content of a previous page, and then restore it when we return to this page based on a special flag that tells us to use the cached version? Let's see how we can do this. A real World Use Case Recently my local ISP asked me to help out with updating an ancient classifieds application. They had a very busy, local classifieds app that was originally an ASP classic application. The old app was - wait for it: frames based - and even though I lobbied against it, the decision was made to keep the frames based layout to allow rapid browsing of the hundreds of posts that are made on a daily basis. The primary reason they wanted this was precisely for the ability to quickly browse content item by item. While I personally hate working with Frames, I have to admit that the UI actually works well with the frames layout as long as you're running on a large desktop screen. You can check out the frames based desktop site here: http://classifieds.gorge.net/ However when I rebuilt the app I also added a secondary view that doesn't use frames. The main reason for this of course was for mobile displays which work horribly with frames. So there's a somewhat mobile friendly interface to the interface, which ditches the frames and uses some responsive design tweaking for mobile capable operation: http://classifeds.gorge.net/mobile  (or browse the base url with your browser width under 800px)   Here's what the mobile, non-frames view looks like:   As you can see this means that the list of classifieds posts now is a list and there's a separate page for drilling down into the item. And of course… originally we ran into that usability issue I mentioned earlier where the browse, view detail, go back to the list cycle resulted in lost list state. Originally in mobile mode you scrolled through the list, found an item to look at and drilled in to display the item detail. Then you clicked back to the list and BAM - you've lost your place. Because there are so many items added on a daily basis the full list is never fully loaded, but rather there's a "Load Additional Listings"  entry at the button. Not only did we originally lose our place when coming back to the list, but any 'additionally loaded' items are no longer there because the list was now rendering  as if it was the first page hit. The additional listings, and any filters, the selection of an item all were lost. Major Suckage! Using Client SessionStorage to cache Server Rendered Content To work around this problem I decided to cache the rendered page content from the list in SessionStorage. Anytime the list renders or is updated with Load Additional Listings, the page HTML is cached and stored in Session Storage. Any back links from the detail page or the login or write entry forms then point back to the list page with a back=true query string parameter. If the server side sees this parameter it doesn't render the part of the page that is cached. Instead the client side code retrieves the data from the sessionState cache and simply inserts it into the page. It sounds pretty simple, and the overall the process is really easy, but there are a few gotchas that I'll discuss in a minute. But first let's look at the implementation. Let's start with the server side here because that'll give a quick idea of the doc structure. As I mentioned the server renders data from an ASP.NET MVC view. On the list page when returning to the list page from the display page (or a host of other pages) looks like this: https://classifieds.gorge.net/list?back=True The query string value is a flag, that indicates whether the server should render the HTML. Here's what the top level MVC Razor view for the list page looks like:@model MessageListViewModel @{ ViewBag.Title = "Classified Listing"; bool isBack = !string.IsNullOrEmpty(Request.QueryString["back"]); } <form method="post" action="@Url.Action("list")"> <div id="SizingContainer"> @if (!isBack) { @Html.Partial("List_CommandBar_Partial", Model) <div id="PostItemContainer" class="scrollbox" xstyle="-webkit-overflow-scrolling: touch;"> @Html.Partial("List_Items_Partial", Model) @if (Model.RequireLoadEntry) { <div class="postitem loadpostitems" style="padding: 15px;"> <div id="LoadProgress" class="smallprogressright"></div> <div class="control-progress"> Load additional listings... </div> </div> } </div> } </div> </form> As you can see the query string triggers a conditional block that if set is simply not rendered. The content inside of #SizingContainer basically holds  the entire page's HTML sans the headers and scripts, but including the filter options and menu at the top. In this case this makes good sense - in other situations the fact that the menu or filter options might be dynamically updated might make you only cache the list rather than essentially the entire page. In this particular instance all of the content works and produces the proper result as both the list along with any filter conditions in the form inputs are restored. Ok, let's move on to the client. On the client there are two page level functions that deal with saving and restoring state. Like the counter example I showed earlier, I like to wrap the logic to save and restore values from sessionState into a separate function because they are almost always used in several places.page.saveData = function(id) { if (!sessionStorage) return; var data = { id: id, scroll: $("#PostItemContainer").scrollTop(), html: $("#SizingContainer").html() }; sessionStorage.setItem("list_html",JSON.stringify(data)); }; page.restoreData = function() { if (!sessionStorage) return; var data = sessionStorage.getItem("list_html"); if (!data) return null; return JSON.parse(data); }; The data that is saved is an object which contains an ID which is the selected element when the user clicks and a scroll position. These two values are used to reset the scroll position when the data is used from the cache. Finally the html from the #SizingContainer element is stored, which makes for the bulk of the document's HTML. In this application the HTML captured could be a substantial bit of data. If you recall, I mentioned that the server side code renders a small chunk of data initially and then gets more data if the user reads through the first 50 or so items. The rest of the items retrieved can be rather sizable. Other than the JSON deserialization that's Ok. Since I'm using SessionStorage the storage space has no immediate limits. Next is the core logic to handle saving and restoring the page state. At first though this would seem pretty simple, and in some cases it might be, but as the following code demonstrates there are a few gotchas to watch out for. Here's the relevant code I use to save and restore:$( function() { … var isBack = getUrlEncodedKey("back", location.href); if (isBack) { // remove the back key from URL setUrlEncodedKey("back", "", location.href); var data = page.restoreData(); // restore from sessionState if (!data) { // no data - force redisplay of the server side default list window.location = "list"; return; } $("#SizingContainer").html(data.html); var el = $(".postitem[data-id=" + data.id + "]"); $(".postitem").removeClass("highlight"); el.addClass("highlight"); $("#PostItemContainer").scrollTop(data.scroll); setTimeout(function() { el.removeClass("highlight"); }, 2500); } else if (window.noFrames) page.saveData(null); // save when page loads $("#SizingContainer").on("click", ".postitem", function() { var id = $(this).attr("data-id"); if (!id) return true; if (window.noFrames) page.saveData(id); var contentFrame = window.parent.frames["Content"]; if (contentFrame) contentFrame.location.href = "show/" + id; else window.location.href = "show/" + id; return false; }); … The code starts out by checking for the back query string flag which triggers restoring from the client cache. If cached the cached data structure is read from sessionStorage. It's important here to check if data was returned. If the user had back=true on the querystring but there is no cached data, he likely bookmarked this page or otherwise shut down the browser and came back to this URL. In that case the server didn't render any detail and we have no cached data, so all we can do is redirect to the original default list view using window.location. If we continued the page would render no data - so make sure to always check the cache retrieval result. Always! If there is data the it's loaded and the data.html data is restored back into the document by simply injecting the HTML back into the document's #SizingContainer element:$("#SizingContainer").html(data.html); It's that simple and it's quite quick even with a fully loaded list of additional items and on a phone. The actual HTML data is stored to the cache on every page load initially and then again when the user clicks on an element to navigate to a particular listing. The former ensures that the client cache always has something in it, and the latter updates with additional information for the selected element. For the click handling I use a data-id attribute on the list item (.postitem) in the list and retrieve the id from that. That id is then used to navigate to the actual entry as well as storing that Id value in the saved cached data. The id is used to reset the selection by searching for the data-id value in the restored elements. The overall process of this save/restore process is pretty straight forward and it doesn't require a bunch of code, yet it yields a huge improvement in the usability of the site on mobile devices (or anybody who uses the non-frames view). Some things to watch out for As easy as it conceptually seems to simply store and retrieve cached content, you have to be quite aware what type of content you are caching. The code above is all that's specific to cache/restore cycle and it works, but it took a few tweaks to the rest of the script code and server code to make it all work. There were a few gotchas that weren't immediately obvious. Here are a few things to pay attention to: Event Handling Logic Timing of manipulating DOM events Inline Script Code Bookmarking to the Cache Url when no cache exists Do you have inline script code in your HTML? That script code isn't going to run if you restore from cache and simply assign or it may not run at the time you think it would normally in the DOM rendering cycle. JavaScript Event Hookups The biggest issue I ran into with this approach almost immediately is that originally I had various static event handlers hooked up to various UI elements that are now cached. If you have an event handler like:$("#btnSearch").click( function() {…}); that works fine when the page loads with server rendered HTML, but that code breaks when you now load the HTML from cache. Why? Because the elements you're trying to hook those events to may not actually be there - yet. Luckily there's an easy workaround for this by using deferred events. With jQuery you can use the .on() event handler instead:$("#SelectionContainer").on("click","#btnSearch", function() {…}); which monitors a parent element for the events and checks for the inner selector elements to handle events on. This effectively defers to runtime event binding, so as more items are added to the document bindings still work. For any cached content use deferred events. Timing of manipulating DOM Elements Along the same lines make sure that your DOM manipulation code follows the code that loads the cached content into the page so that you don't manipulate DOM elements that don't exist just yet. Ideally you'll want to check for the condition to restore cached content towards the top of your script code, but that can be tricky if you have components or other logic that might not all run in a straight line. Inline Script Code Here's another small problem I ran into: I use a DateTime Picker widget I built a while back that relies on the jQuery date time picker. I also created a helper function that allows keyboard date navigation into it that uses JavaScript logic. Because MVC's limited 'object model' the only way to embed widget content into the page is through inline script. This code broken when I inserted the cached HTML into the page because the script code was not available when the component actually got injected into the page. As the last bullet - it's a matter of timing. There's no good work around for this - in my case I pulled out the jQuery date picker and relied on native <input type="date" /> logic instead - a better choice these days anyway, especially since this view is meant to be primarily to serve mobile devices which actually support date input through the browser (unlike desktop browsers of which only WebKit seems to support it). Bookmarking Cached Urls When you cache HTML content you have to make a decision whether you cache on the client and also not render that same content on the server. In the Classifieds app I didn't render server side content so if the user comes to the page with back=True and there is no cached content I have to a have a Plan B. Typically this happens when somebody ends up bookmarking the back URL. The easiest and safest solution for this scenario is to ALWAYS check the cache result to make sure it exists and if not have a safe URL to go back to - in this case to the plain uncached list URL which amounts to effectively redirecting. This seems really obvious in hindsight, but it's easy to overlook and not see a problem until much later, when it's not obvious at all why the page is not rendering anything. Don't use <body> to replace Content Since we're practically replacing all the HTML in the page it may seem tempting to simply replace the HTML content of the <body> tag. Don't. The body tag usually contains key things that should stay in the page and be there when it loads. Specifically script tags and elements and possibly other embedded content. It's best to create a top level DOM element specifically as a placeholder container for your cached content and wrap just around the actual content you want to replace. In the app above the #SizingContainer is that container. Other Approaches The approach I've used for this application is kind of specific to the existing server rendered application we're running and so it's just one approach you can take with caching. However for server rendered content caching this is a pattern I've used in a few apps to retrofit some client caching into list displays. In this application I took the path of least resistance to the existing server rendering logic. Here are a few other ways that come to mind: Using Partial HTML Rendering via AJAXInstead of rendering the page initially on the server, the page would load empty and the client would render the UI by retrieving the respective HTML and embedding it into the page from a Partial View. This effectively makes the initial rendering and the cached rendering logic identical and removes the server having to decide whether this request needs to be rendered or not (ie. not checking for a back=true switch). All the logic related to caching is made on the client in this case. Using JSON Data and Client RenderingThe hardcore client option is to do the whole UI SPA style and pull data from the server and then use client rendering or databinding to pull the data down and render using templates or client side databinding with knockout/angular et al. As with the Partial Rendering approach the advantage is that there's no difference in the logic between pulling the data from cache or rendering from scratch other than the initial check for the cache request. Of course if the app is a  full on SPA app, then caching may not be required even - the list could just stay in memory and be hidden and reactivated. I'm sure there are a number of other ways this can be handled as well especially using  AJAX. AJAX rendering might simplify the logic, but it also complicates search engine optimization since there's no content loaded initially. So there are always tradeoffs and it's important to look at all angles before deciding on any sort of caching solution in general. State of the Session SessionState and LocalStorage are easy to use in client code and can be integrated even with server centric applications to provide nice caching features of content and data. In this post I've shown a very specific scenario of storing HTML content for the purpose of remembering list view data and state and making the browsing experience for lists a bit more friendly, especially if there's dynamically loaded content involved. If you haven't played with sessionStorage or localStorage I encourage you to give it a try. There's a lot of cool stuff that you can do with this beyond the specific scenario I've covered here… Resources Overview of localStorage (also applies to sessionStorage) Web Storage Compatibility Modernizr Test Suite© Rick Strahl, West Wind Technologies, 2005-2013Posted in JavaScript  HTML5  ASP.NET  MVC   Tweet !function(d,s,id){var js,fjs=d.getElementsByTagName(s)[0];if(!d.getElementById(id)){js=d.createElement(s);js.id=id;js.src="//platform.twitter.com/widgets.js";fjs.parentNode.insertBefore(js,fjs);}}(document,"script","twitter-wjs"); (function() { var po = document.createElement('script'); po.type = 'text/javascript'; po.async = true; po.src = 'https://apis.google.com/js/plusone.js'; var s = document.getElementsByTagName('script')[0]; s.parentNode.insertBefore(po, s); })();

    Read the article

  • Logging Into a site that uses Live.com authentication with C#

    - by Josh
    I've been trying to automate a log in to a website I frequent, www.bungie.net. The site is associated with Microsoft and Xbox Live, and as such makes uses of the Windows Live ID API when people log in to their site. I am relatively new to creating web spiders/robots, and I worry that I'm misunderstanding some of the most basic concepts. I've simulated logins to other sites such as Facebook and Gmail, but live.com has given me nothing but trouble. Anyways, I've been using Wireshark and the Firefox addon Tamper Data to try and figure out what I need to post, and what cookies I need to include with my requests. As far as I know these are the steps one must follow to log in to this site. 1. Visit https: //login.live.com/login.srf?wa=wsignin1.0&rpsnv=11&ct=1268167141&rver=5.5.4177.0&wp=LBI&wreply=http:%2F%2Fwww.bungie.net%2FDefault.aspx&id=42917 2. Recieve the cookies MSPRequ and MSPOK. 3. Post the values from the form ID "PPSX", the values from the form ID "PPFT", your username, your password all to a changing URL similar to: https: //login.live.com/ppsecure/post.srf?wa=wsignin1.0&rpsnv=11&ct= (there are a few numbers that change at the end of that URL) 4. Live.com returns the user a page with more hidden forms to post. The client then posts the values from the form "ANON", the value from the form "ANONExp" and the values from the form "t" to the URL: http ://www.bung ie.net/Default.aspx?wa=wsignin1.0 5. After posting that data, the user is returned a variety of cookies the most important of which is "BNGAuth" which is the log in cookie for the site. Where I am having trouble is on fifth step, but that doesn't neccesarily mean I've done all the other steps correctly. I post the data from "ANON", "ANONExp" and "t" but instead of being returned a BNGAuth cookie, I'm returned a cookie named "RSPMaybe" and redirected to the home page. When I review the Wireshark log, I noticed something that instantly stood out to me as different between the log when I logged in with Firefox and when my program ran. It could be nothing but I'll include the picture here for you to review. I'm being returned an HTTP packet from the site before I post the data in the fourth step. I'm not sure how this is happening, but it must be a side effect from something I'm doing wrong in the HTTPS steps. ![alt text][1] http://img391.imageshack.us/img391/6049/31394881.gif using System; using System.Collections.Generic; using System.Collections.Specialized; using System.Text; using System.Net; using System.IO; using System.IO.Compression; using System.Security.Cryptography; using System.Security.Cryptography.X509Certificates; using System.Web; namespace SpiderFromScratch { class Program { static void Main(string[] args) { CookieContainer cookies = new CookieContainer(); Uri url = new Uri("https://login.live.com/login.srf?wa=wsignin1.0&rpsnv=11&ct=1268167141&rver=5.5.4177.0&wp=LBI&wreply=http:%2F%2Fwww.bungie.net%2FDefault.aspx&id=42917"); HttpWebRequest http = (HttpWebRequest)HttpWebRequest.Create(url); http.Timeout = 30000; http.UserAgent = "Mozilla/5.0 (Windows; U; Windows NT 5.1; en-US; rv:1.9.1.8) Gecko/20100202 Firefox/3.5.8 (.NET CLR 3.5.30729)"; http.Accept = "text/html,application/xhtml+xml,application/xml;q=0.9,*/*;q=0.8"; http.Headers.Add("Accept-Language", "en-us,en;q=0.5"); http.Headers.Add("Accept-Charset", "ISO-8859-1,utf-8;q=0.7,*;q=0.7"); http.Headers.Add("Keep-Alive", "300"); http.Referer = "http://www.bungie.net/"; http.ContentType = "application/x-www-form-urlencoded"; http.CookieContainer = new CookieContainer(); http.Method = WebRequestMethods.Http.Get; HttpWebResponse response = (HttpWebResponse)http.GetResponse(); StreamReader readStream = new StreamReader(response.GetResponseStream()); string HTML = readStream.ReadToEnd(); readStream.Close(); //gets the cookies (they are set in the eighth header) string[] strCookies = response.Headers.GetValues(8); response.Close(); string name, value; Cookie manualCookie; for (int i = 0; i < strCookies.Length; i++) { name = strCookies[i].Substring(0, strCookies[i].IndexOf("=")); value = strCookies[i].Substring(strCookies[i].IndexOf("=") + 1, strCookies[i].IndexOf(";") - strCookies[i].IndexOf("=") - 1); manualCookie = new Cookie(name, "\"" + value + "\""); Uri manualURL = new Uri("http://login.live.com"); http.CookieContainer.Add(manualURL, manualCookie); } //stores the cookies to be used later cookies = http.CookieContainer; //Get the PPSX value string PPSX = HTML.Remove(0, HTML.IndexOf("PPSX")); PPSX = PPSX.Remove(0, PPSX.IndexOf("value") + 7); PPSX = PPSX.Substring(0, PPSX.IndexOf("\"")); //Get this random PPFT value string PPFT = HTML.Remove(0, HTML.IndexOf("PPFT")); PPFT = PPFT.Remove(0, PPFT.IndexOf("value") + 7); PPFT = PPFT.Substring(0, PPFT.IndexOf("\"")); //Get the random URL you POST to string POSTURL = HTML.Remove(0, HTML.IndexOf("https://login.live.com/ppsecure/post.srf?wa=wsignin1.0&rpsnv=11&ct=")); POSTURL = POSTURL.Substring(0, POSTURL.IndexOf("\"")); //POST with cookies http = (HttpWebRequest)HttpWebRequest.Create(POSTURL); http.UserAgent = "Mozilla/5.0 (Windows; U; Windows NT 5.1; en-US; rv:1.9.1.8) Gecko/20100202 Firefox/3.5.8 (.NET CLR 3.5.30729)"; http.Accept = "text/html,application/xhtml+xml,application/xml;q=0.9,*/*;q=0.8"; http.Headers.Add("Accept-Language", "en-us,en;q=0.5"); http.Headers.Add("Accept-Charset", "ISO-8859-1,utf-8;q=0.7,*;q=0.7"); http.Headers.Add("Keep-Alive", "300"); http.CookieContainer = cookies; http.Referer = "https://login.live.com/login.srf?wa=wsignin1.0&rpsnv=11&ct=1268158321&rver=5.5.4177.0&wp=LBI&wreply=http:%2F%2Fwww.bungie.net%2FDefault.aspx&id=42917"; http.ContentType = "application/x-www-form-urlencoded"; http.Method = WebRequestMethods.Http.Post; Stream ostream = http.GetRequestStream(); //used to convert strings into bytes System.Text.ASCIIEncoding encoding = new System.Text.ASCIIEncoding(); //Post information byte[] buffer = encoding.GetBytes("PPSX=" + PPSX +"&PwdPad=IfYouAreReadingThisYouHaveTooMuc&login=YOUREMAILGOESHERE&passwd=YOURWORDGOESHERE" + "&LoginOptions=2&PPFT=" + PPFT); ostream.Write(buffer, 0, buffer.Length); ostream.Close(); HttpWebResponse response2 = (HttpWebResponse)http.GetResponse(); readStream = new StreamReader(response2.GetResponseStream()); HTML = readStream.ReadToEnd(); response2.Close(); ostream.Dispose(); foreach (Cookie cookie in response2.Cookies) { Console.WriteLine(cookie.Name + ": "); Console.WriteLine(cookie.Value); Console.WriteLine(cookie.Expires); Console.WriteLine(); } //SET POSTURL value string POSTANON = "http://www.bungie.net/Default.aspx?wa=wsignin1.0"; //Get the ANON value string ANON = HTML.Remove(0, HTML.IndexOf("ANON")); ANON = ANON.Remove(0, ANON.IndexOf("value") + 7); ANON = ANON.Substring(0, ANON.IndexOf("\"")); ANON = HttpUtility.UrlEncode(ANON); //Get the ANONExp value string ANONExp = HTML.Remove(0, HTML.IndexOf("ANONExp")); ANONExp = ANONExp.Remove(0, ANONExp.IndexOf("value") + 7); ANONExp = ANONExp.Substring(0, ANONExp.IndexOf("\"")); ANONExp = HttpUtility.UrlEncode(ANONExp); //Get the t value string t = HTML.Remove(0, HTML.IndexOf("id=\"t\"")); t = t.Remove(0, t.IndexOf("value") + 7); t = t.Substring(0, t.IndexOf("\"")); t = HttpUtility.UrlEncode(t); //POST the Info and Accept the Bungie Cookies http = (HttpWebRequest)HttpWebRequest.Create(POSTANON); http.UserAgent = "Mozilla/5.0 (Windows; U; Windows NT 5.1; en-US; rv:1.9.1.8) Gecko/20100202 Firefox/3.5.8 (.NET CLR 3.5.30729)"; http.Accept = "text/html,application/xhtml+xml,application/xml;q=0.9,*/*;q=0.8"; http.Headers.Add("Accept-Language", "en-us,en;q=0.5"); http.Headers.Add("Accept-Encoding", "gzip,deflate"); http.Headers.Add("Accept-Charset", "ISO-8859-1,utf-8;q=0.7,*;q=0.7"); http.Headers.Add("Keep-Alive", "115"); http.CookieContainer = new CookieContainer(); http.ContentType = "application/x-www-form-urlencoded"; http.Method = WebRequestMethods.Http.Post; http.Expect = null; ostream = http.GetRequestStream(); int test = ANON.Length; int test1 = ANONExp.Length; int test2 = t.Length; buffer = encoding.GetBytes("ANON=" + ANON +"&ANONExp=" + ANONExp + "&t=" + t); ostream.Write(buffer, 0, buffer.Length); ostream.Close(); //Here lies the problem, I am not returned the correct cookies. HttpWebResponse response3 = (HttpWebResponse)http.GetResponse(); GZipStream gzip = new GZipStream(response3.GetResponseStream(), CompressionMode.Decompress); readStream = new StreamReader(gzip); HTML = readStream.ReadToEnd(); //gets both cookies string[] strCookies2 = response3.Headers.GetValues(11); response3.Close(); } } } This has given me problems and I've put many hours into learning about HTTP protocols so any help would be appreciated. If there is an article detailing a similar log in to live.com feel free to point the way. I've been looking far and wide for any articles with working solutions. If I could be clearer, feel free to ask as this is my first time using Stack Overflow. Cheers, --Josh

    Read the article

  • Logging Into a site that uses Live.com authentication

    - by Josh
    I've been trying to automate a log in to a website I frequent, www.bungie.net. The site is associated with Microsoft and Xbox Live, and as such makes uses of the Windows Live ID API when people log in to their site. I am relatively new to creating web spiders/robots, and I worry that I'm misunderstanding some of the most basic concepts. I've simulated logins to other sites such as Facebook and Gmail, but live.com has given me nothing but trouble. Anyways, I've been using Wireshark and the Firefox addon Tamper Data to try and figure out what I need to post, and what cookies I need to include with my requests. As far as I know these are the steps one must follow to log in to this site. 1. Visit https: //login.live.com/login.srf?wa=wsignin1.0&rpsnv=11&ct=1268167141&rver=5.5.4177.0&wp=LBI&wreply=http:%2F%2Fwww.bungie.net%2FDefault.aspx&id=42917 2. Recieve the cookies MSPRequ and MSPOK. 3. Post the values from the form ID "PPSX", the values from the form ID "PPFT", your username, your password all to a changing URL similar to: https: //login.live.com/ppsecure/post.srf?wa=wsignin1.0&rpsnv=11&ct= (there are a few numbers that change at the end of that URL) 4. Live.com returns the user a page with more hidden forms to post. The client then posts the values from the form "ANON", the value from the form "ANONExp" and the values from the form "t" to the URL: http ://www.bung ie.net/Default.aspx?wa=wsignin1.0 5. After posting that data, the user is returned a variety of cookies the most important of which is "BNGAuth" which is the log in cookie for the site. Where I am having trouble is on fifth step, but that doesn't neccesarily mean I've done all the other steps correctly. I post the data from "ANON", "ANONExp" and "t" but instead of being returned a BNGAuth cookie, I'm returned a cookie named "RSPMaybe" and redirected to the home page. When I review the Wireshark log, I noticed something that instantly stood out to me as different between the log when I logged in with Firefox and when my program ran. It could be nothing but I'll include the picture here for you to review. I'm being returned an HTTP packet from the site before I post the data in the fourth step. I'm not sure how this is happening, but it must be a side effect from something I'm doing wrong in the HTTPS steps. using System; using System.Collections.Generic; using System.Collections.Specialized; using System.Text; using System.Net; using System.IO; using System.IO.Compression; using System.Security.Cryptography; using System.Security.Cryptography.X509Certificates; using System.Web; namespace SpiderFromScratch { class Program { static void Main(string[] args) { CookieContainer cookies = new CookieContainer(); Uri url = new Uri("https://login.live.com/login.srf?wa=wsignin1.0&rpsnv=11&ct=1268167141&rver=5.5.4177.0&wp=LBI&wreply=http:%2F%2Fwww.bungie.net%2FDefault.aspx&id=42917"); HttpWebRequest http = (HttpWebRequest)HttpWebRequest.Create(url); http.Timeout = 30000; http.UserAgent = "Mozilla/5.0 (Windows; U; Windows NT 5.1; en-US; rv:1.9.1.8) Gecko/20100202 Firefox/3.5.8 (.NET CLR 3.5.30729)"; http.Accept = "text/html,application/xhtml+xml,application/xml;q=0.9,*/*;q=0.8"; http.Headers.Add("Accept-Language", "en-us,en;q=0.5"); http.Headers.Add("Accept-Charset", "ISO-8859-1,utf-8;q=0.7,*;q=0.7"); http.Headers.Add("Keep-Alive", "300"); http.Referer = "http://www.bungie.net/"; http.ContentType = "application/x-www-form-urlencoded"; http.CookieContainer = new CookieContainer(); http.Method = WebRequestMethods.Http.Get; HttpWebResponse response = (HttpWebResponse)http.GetResponse(); StreamReader readStream = new StreamReader(response.GetResponseStream()); string HTML = readStream.ReadToEnd(); readStream.Close(); //gets the cookies (they are set in the eighth header) string[] strCookies = response.Headers.GetValues(8); response.Close(); string name, value; Cookie manualCookie; for (int i = 0; i < strCookies.Length; i++) { name = strCookies[i].Substring(0, strCookies[i].IndexOf("=")); value = strCookies[i].Substring(strCookies[i].IndexOf("=") + 1, strCookies[i].IndexOf(";") - strCookies[i].IndexOf("=") - 1); manualCookie = new Cookie(name, "\"" + value + "\""); Uri manualURL = new Uri("http://login.live.com"); http.CookieContainer.Add(manualURL, manualCookie); } //stores the cookies to be used later cookies = http.CookieContainer; //Get the PPSX value string PPSX = HTML.Remove(0, HTML.IndexOf("PPSX")); PPSX = PPSX.Remove(0, PPSX.IndexOf("value") + 7); PPSX = PPSX.Substring(0, PPSX.IndexOf("\"")); //Get this random PPFT value string PPFT = HTML.Remove(0, HTML.IndexOf("PPFT")); PPFT = PPFT.Remove(0, PPFT.IndexOf("value") + 7); PPFT = PPFT.Substring(0, PPFT.IndexOf("\"")); //Get the random URL you POST to string POSTURL = HTML.Remove(0, HTML.IndexOf("https://login.live.com/ppsecure/post.srf?wa=wsignin1.0&rpsnv=11&ct=")); POSTURL = POSTURL.Substring(0, POSTURL.IndexOf("\"")); //POST with cookies http = (HttpWebRequest)HttpWebRequest.Create(POSTURL); http.UserAgent = "Mozilla/5.0 (Windows; U; Windows NT 5.1; en-US; rv:1.9.1.8) Gecko/20100202 Firefox/3.5.8 (.NET CLR 3.5.30729)"; http.Accept = "text/html,application/xhtml+xml,application/xml;q=0.9,*/*;q=0.8"; http.Headers.Add("Accept-Language", "en-us,en;q=0.5"); http.Headers.Add("Accept-Charset", "ISO-8859-1,utf-8;q=0.7,*;q=0.7"); http.Headers.Add("Keep-Alive", "300"); http.CookieContainer = cookies; http.Referer = "https://login.live.com/login.srf?wa=wsignin1.0&rpsnv=11&ct=1268158321&rver=5.5.4177.0&wp=LBI&wreply=http:%2F%2Fwww.bungie.net%2FDefault.aspx&id=42917"; http.ContentType = "application/x-www-form-urlencoded"; http.Method = WebRequestMethods.Http.Post; Stream ostream = http.GetRequestStream(); //used to convert strings into bytes System.Text.ASCIIEncoding encoding = new System.Text.ASCIIEncoding(); //Post information byte[] buffer = encoding.GetBytes("PPSX=" + PPSX +"&PwdPad=IfYouAreReadingThisYouHaveTooMuc&login=YOUREMAILGOESHERE&passwd=YOURWORDGOESHERE" + "&LoginOptions=2&PPFT=" + PPFT); ostream.Write(buffer, 0, buffer.Length); ostream.Close(); HttpWebResponse response2 = (HttpWebResponse)http.GetResponse(); readStream = new StreamReader(response2.GetResponseStream()); HTML = readStream.ReadToEnd(); response2.Close(); ostream.Dispose(); foreach (Cookie cookie in response2.Cookies) { Console.WriteLine(cookie.Name + ": "); Console.WriteLine(cookie.Value); Console.WriteLine(cookie.Expires); Console.WriteLine(); } //SET POSTURL value string POSTANON = "http://www.bungie.net/Default.aspx?wa=wsignin1.0"; //Get the ANON value string ANON = HTML.Remove(0, HTML.IndexOf("ANON")); ANON = ANON.Remove(0, ANON.IndexOf("value") + 7); ANON = ANON.Substring(0, ANON.IndexOf("\"")); ANON = HttpUtility.UrlEncode(ANON); //Get the ANONExp value string ANONExp = HTML.Remove(0, HTML.IndexOf("ANONExp")); ANONExp = ANONExp.Remove(0, ANONExp.IndexOf("value") + 7); ANONExp = ANONExp.Substring(0, ANONExp.IndexOf("\"")); ANONExp = HttpUtility.UrlEncode(ANONExp); //Get the t value string t = HTML.Remove(0, HTML.IndexOf("id=\"t\"")); t = t.Remove(0, t.IndexOf("value") + 7); t = t.Substring(0, t.IndexOf("\"")); t = HttpUtility.UrlEncode(t); //POST the Info and Accept the Bungie Cookies http = (HttpWebRequest)HttpWebRequest.Create(POSTANON); http.UserAgent = "Mozilla/5.0 (Windows; U; Windows NT 5.1; en-US; rv:1.9.1.8) Gecko/20100202 Firefox/3.5.8 (.NET CLR 3.5.30729)"; http.Accept = "text/html,application/xhtml+xml,application/xml;q=0.9,*/*;q=0.8"; http.Headers.Add("Accept-Language", "en-us,en;q=0.5"); http.Headers.Add("Accept-Encoding", "gzip,deflate"); http.Headers.Add("Accept-Charset", "ISO-8859-1,utf-8;q=0.7,*;q=0.7"); http.Headers.Add("Keep-Alive", "115"); http.CookieContainer = new CookieContainer(); http.ContentType = "application/x-www-form-urlencoded"; http.Method = WebRequestMethods.Http.Post; http.Expect = null; ostream = http.GetRequestStream(); int test = ANON.Length; int test1 = ANONExp.Length; int test2 = t.Length; buffer = encoding.GetBytes("ANON=" + ANON +"&ANONExp=" + ANONExp + "&t=" + t); ostream.Write(buffer, 0, buffer.Length); ostream.Close(); //Here lies the problem, I am not returned the correct cookies. HttpWebResponse response3 = (HttpWebResponse)http.GetResponse(); GZipStream gzip = new GZipStream(response3.GetResponseStream(), CompressionMode.Decompress); readStream = new StreamReader(gzip); HTML = readStream.ReadToEnd(); //gets both cookies string[] strCookies2 = response3.Headers.GetValues(11); response3.Close(); } } } This has given me problems and I've put many hours into learning about HTTP protocols so any help would be appreciated. If there is an article detailing a similar log in to live.com feel free to point the way. I've been looking far and wide for any articles with working solutions. If I could be clearer, feel free to ask as this is my first time using Stack Overflow.

    Read the article

  • undefined reference to function, despite giving reference in c

    - by Jamie Edwards
    I'm following a tutorial, but when it comes to compiling and linking the code I get the following error: /tmp/cc8gRrVZ.o: In function `main': main.c:(.text+0xa): undefined reference to `monitor_clear' main.c:(.text+0x16): undefined reference to `monitor_write' collect2: ld returned 1 exit status make: *** [obj/main.o] Error 1 What that is telling me is that I haven't defined both 'monitor_clear' and 'monitor_write'. But I have, in both the header and source files. They are as follows: monitor.c: // monitor.c -- Defines functions for writing to the monitor. // heavily based on Bran's kernel development tutorials, // but rewritten for JamesM's kernel tutorials. #include "monitor.h" // The VGA framebuffer starts at 0xB8000. u16int *video_memory = (u16int *)0xB8000; // Stores the cursor position. u8int cursor_x = 0; u8int cursor_y = 0; // Updates the hardware cursor. static void move_cursor() { // The screen is 80 characters wide... u16int cursorLocation = cursor_y * 80 + cursor_x; outb(0x3D4, 14); // Tell the VGA board we are setting the high cursor byte. outb(0x3D5, cursorLocation >> 8); // Send the high cursor byte. outb(0x3D4, 15); // Tell the VGA board we are setting the low cursor byte. outb(0x3D5, cursorLocation); // Send the low cursor byte. } // Scrolls the text on the screen up by one line. static void scroll() { // Get a space character with the default colour attributes. u8int attributeByte = (0 /*black*/ << 4) | (15 /*white*/ & 0x0F); u16int blank = 0x20 /* space */ | (attributeByte << 8); // Row 25 is the end, this means we need to scroll up if(cursor_y >= 25) { // Move the current text chunk that makes up the screen // back in the buffer by a line int i; for (i = 0*80; i < 24*80; i++) { video_memory[i] = video_memory[i+80]; } // The last line should now be blank. Do this by writing // 80 spaces to it. for (i = 24*80; i < 25*80; i++) { video_memory[i] = blank; } // The cursor should now be on the last line. cursor_y = 24; } } // Writes a single character out to the screen. void monitor_put(char c) { // The background colour is black (0), the foreground is white (15). u8int backColour = 0; u8int foreColour = 15; // The attribute byte is made up of two nibbles - the lower being the // foreground colour, and the upper the background colour. u8int attributeByte = (backColour << 4) | (foreColour & 0x0F); // The attribute byte is the top 8 bits of the word we have to send to the // VGA board. u16int attribute = attributeByte << 8; u16int *location; // Handle a backspace, by moving the cursor back one space if (c == 0x08 && cursor_x) { cursor_x--; } // Handle a tab by increasing the cursor's X, but only to a point // where it is divisible by 8. else if (c == 0x09) { cursor_x = (cursor_x+8) & ~(8-1); } // Handle carriage return else if (c == '\r') { cursor_x = 0; } // Handle newline by moving cursor back to left and increasing the row else if (c == '\n') { cursor_x = 0; cursor_y++; } // Handle any other printable character. else if(c >= ' ') { location = video_memory + (cursor_y*80 + cursor_x); *location = c | attribute; cursor_x++; } // Check if we need to insert a new line because we have reached the end // of the screen. if (cursor_x >= 80) { cursor_x = 0; cursor_y ++; } // Scroll the screen if needed. scroll(); // Move the hardware cursor. move_cursor(); } // Clears the screen, by copying lots of spaces to the framebuffer. void monitor_clear() { // Make an attribute byte for the default colours u8int attributeByte = (0 /*black*/ << 4) | (15 /*white*/ & 0x0F); u16int blank = 0x20 /* space */ | (attributeByte << 8); int i; for (i = 0; i < 80*25; i++) { video_memory[i] = blank; } // Move the hardware cursor back to the start. cursor_x = 0; cursor_y = 0; move_cursor(); } // Outputs a null-terminated ASCII string to the monitor. void monitor_write(char *c) { int i = 0; while (c[i]) { monitor_put(c[i++]); } } void monitor_write_hex(u32int n) { s32int tmp; monitor_write("0x"); char noZeroes = 1; int i; for (i = 28; i > 0; i -= 4) { tmp = (n >> i) & 0xF; if (tmp == 0 && noZeroes != 0) { continue; } if (tmp >= 0xA) { noZeroes = 0; monitor_put (tmp-0xA+'a' ); } else { noZeroes = 0; monitor_put( tmp+'0' ); } } tmp = n & 0xF; if (tmp >= 0xA) { monitor_put (tmp-0xA+'a'); } else { monitor_put (tmp+'0'); } } void monitor_write_dec(u32int n) { if (n == 0) { monitor_put('0'); return; } s32int acc = n; char c[32]; int i = 0; while (acc > 0) { c[i] = '0' + acc%10; acc /= 10; i++; } c[i] = 0; char c2[32]; c2[i--] = 0; int j = 0; while(i >= 0) { c2[i--] = c[j++]; } monitor_write(c2); } monitor.h: // monitor.h -- Defines the interface for monitor.h // From JamesM's kernel development tutorials. #ifndef MONITOR_H #define MONITOR_H #include "common.h" // Write a single character out to the screen. void monitor_put(char c); // Clear the screen to all black. void monitor_clear(); // Output a null-terminated ASCII string to the monitor. void monitor_write(char *c); #endif // MONITOR_H common.c: // common.c -- Defines some global functions. // From JamesM's kernel development tutorials. #include "common.h" // Write a byte out to the specified port. void outb ( u16int port, u8int value ) { asm volatile ( "outb %1, %0" : : "dN" ( port ), "a" ( value ) ); } u8int inb ( u16int port ) { u8int ret; asm volatile ( "inb %1, %0" : "=a" ( ret ) : "dN" ( port ) ); return ret; } u16int inw ( u16int port ) { u16int ret; asm volatile ( "inw %1, %0" : "=a" ( ret ) : "dN" ( port ) ); return ret; } // Copy len bytes from src to dest. void memcpy(u8int *dest, const u8int *src, u32int len) { const u8int *sp = ( const u8int * ) src; u8int *dp = ( u8int * ) dest; for ( ; len != 0; len-- ) *dp++ =*sp++; } // Write len copies of val into dest. void memset(u8int *dest, u8int val, u32int len) { u8int *temp = ( u8int * ) dest; for ( ; len != 0; len-- ) *temp++ = val; } // Compare two strings. Should return -1 if // str1 < str2, 0 if they are equal or 1 otherwise. int strcmp(char *str1, char *str2) { int i = 0; int failed = 0; while ( str1[i] != '\0' && str2[i] != '\0' ) { if ( str1[i] != str2[i] ) { failed = 1; break; } i++; } // Why did the loop exit? if ( ( str1[i] == '\0' && str2[i] != '\0' || (str1[i] != '\0' && str2[i] =='\0' ) ) failed =1; return failed; } // Copy the NULL-terminated string src into dest, and // return dest. char *strcpy(char *dest, const char *src) { do { *dest++ = *src++; } while ( *src != 0 ); } // Concatenate the NULL-terminated string src onto // the end of dest, and return dest. char *strcat(char *dest, const char *src) { while ( *dest != 0 ) { *dest = *dest++; } do { *dest++ = *src++; } while ( *src != 0 ); return dest; } common.h: // common.h -- Defines typedefs and some global functions. // From JamesM's kernel development tutorials. #ifndef COMMON_H #define COMMON_H // Some nice typedefs, to standardise sizes across platforms. // These typedefs are written for 32-bit x86. typedef unsigned int u32int; typedef int s32int; typedef unsigned short u16int; typedef short s16int; typedef unsigned char u8int; typedef char s8int; void outb ( u16int port, u8int value ); u8int inb ( u16int port ); u16int inw ( u16int port ); #endif //COMMON_H main.c: // main.c -- Defines the C-code kernel entry point, calls initialisation routines. // Made for JamesM's tutorials <www.jamesmolloy.co.uk> #include "monitor.h" int main(struct multiboot *mboot_ptr) { monitor_clear(); monitor_write ( "hello, world!" ); return 0; } here is my makefile: C_SOURCES= main.c monitor.c common.c S_SOURCES= boot.s C_OBJECTS=$(patsubst %.c, obj/%.o, $(C_SOURCES)) S_OBJECTS=$(patsubst %.s, obj/%.o, $(S_SOURCES)) CFLAGS=-nostdlib -nostdinc -fno-builtin -fno-stack-protector -m32 -Iheaders LDFLAGS=-Tlink.ld -melf_i386 --oformat=elf32-i386 ASFLAGS=-felf all: kern/kernel .PHONY: clean clean: -rm -f kern/kernel kern/kernel: $(S_OBJECTS) $(C_OBJECTS) ld $(LDFLAGS) -o $@ $^ $(C_OBJECTS): obj/%.o : %.c gcc $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ vpath %.c source $(S_OBJECTS): obj/%.o : %.s nasm $(ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ vpath %.s asem Hopefully this will help you understand what is going wrong and how to fix it :L Thanks in advance. Jamie.

    Read the article

  • Using libgrib2c in c++ application, linker error "Undefined reference to..."

    - by Rich
    EDIT: If you're going to be doing things with GRIB files I would recommend the GDAL library which is backed by the Open Source Geospatial Foundation. You will save yourself a lot of headache :) I'm using Qt creator in Ubuntu creating a c++ app. I am attempting to use an external lib, libgrib2c.a, that has a header grib2.h. Everything compiles, but when it tries to link I get the error: undefined reference to 'seekgb(_IO_FILE*, long, long, long*, long*) I have tried wrapping the header file with: extern "C"{ #include "grib2.h" } But it didn't fix anything so I figured that was not my problem. In the .pro file I have the line: include($${ROOT}/Shared/common/commonLibs.pri) and in commonLibs.pri I have: INCLUDEPATH+=$${ROOT}/external_libs/g2clib/include LIBS+=-L$${ROOT}/external_libs/g2clib/lib LIBS+=-lgrib2c I am not encountering an error finding the library. If I do a nm command on the libgrib2c.a I get: nm libgrib2c.a | grep seekgb seekgb.o: 00000000 T seekgb And when I run qmake with the additional argument of LIBS+=-Wl,--verbose I can find the lib file in the output: attempt to open /usr/lib/libgrib2c.so failed attempt to open /usr/lib/libgrib2c.a failed attempt to open /mnt/sdb1/ESMF/App/ESMF_App/../external_libs/linux/qwt_6.0.2/lib/libgrib2c.so failed attempt to open /mnt/sdb1/ESMF/App/ESMF_App/../external_libs/linux/qwt_6.0.2/lib/libgrib2c.a failed attempt to open ..//Shared/Config/lib/libgrib2c.so failed attempt to open ..//Shared/Config/lib/libgrib2c.a failed attempt to open ..//external_libs/libssh2/lib/libgrib2c.so failed attempt to open ..//external_libs/libssh2/lib/libgrib2c.a failed attempt to open ..//external_libs/openssl/lib/libgrib2c.so failed attempt to open ..//external_libs/openssl/lib/libgrib2c.a failed attempt to open ..//external_libs/g2clib/lib/libgrib2c.so failed attempt to open ..//external_libs/g2clib/lib/libgrib2c.a succeeded Although it doesn't show any of the .o files in the library is this because it is a c library in my c++ app? in the .cpp file that I am trying to use the library I have: #include "gribreader.h" #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <external_libs/g2clib/include/grib2.h> #include <Shared/logging/Logger.hpp> //------------------------------------------------------------------------------ /// Opens a GRIB file from disk. /// /// This function opens the grib file and searches through it for how many GRIB /// messages are contained as well as their starting locations. /// /// \param a_filePath. The path to the file to be opened. /// \return True if successful, false if not. //------------------------------------------------------------------------------ bool GRIBReader::OpenGRIB(std::string a_filePath) { LOG(notification)<<"Attempting to open grib file: "<< a_filePath; if(isOpen()) { CloseGRIB(); } m_filePath = a_filePath; m_filePtr = fopen(a_filePath.c_str(), "r"); if(m_filePtr == NULL) { LOG(error)<<"Unable to open file: " << a_filePath; return false; } LOG(notification)<<"Successfully opened GRIB file"; g2int currentMessageSize(1); g2int seekPosition(0); g2int lengthToBeginningOfGrib(0); g2int seekLength(32000); int i(0); int iterationLimit(300); m_GRIBMessageLocations.clear(); m_GRIBMessageSizes.clear(); while(i < iterationLimit) { seekgb(m_filePtr, seekPosition, seekLength, &lengthToBeginningOfGrib, &currentMessageSize); if(currentMessageSize != 0) { LOG(verbose) << "Adding GRIB message location " << lengthToBeginningOfGrib << " with length " << currentMessageSize; m_GRIBMessageLocations.push_back(lengthToBeginningOfGrib); m_GRIBMessageSizes.push_back(currentMessageSize); seekPosition = lengthToBeginningOfGrib + currentMessageSize; LOG(verbose) << "GRIB seek position moved to " << seekPosition; } else { LOG(notification)<<"End of GRIB file found, after "<< i << " GRIB messages."; break; } } if(i >= iterationLimit) { LOG(warning) << "The iteration limit of " << iterationLimit << "was reached while searching for GRIB messages"; } return true; } And the header grib2.h is as follows: #ifndef _grib2_H #define _grib2_H #include<stdio.h> #define G2_VERSION "g2clib-1.4.0" #ifdef __64BIT__ typedef int g2int; typedef unsigned int g2intu; #else typedef long g2int; typedef unsigned long g2intu; #endif typedef float g2float; struct gtemplate { g2int type; /* 3=Grid Defintion Template. */ /* 4=Product Defintion Template. */ /* 5=Data Representation Template. */ g2int num; /* template number. */ g2int maplen; /* number of entries in the static part */ /* of the template. */ g2int *map; /* num of octets of each entry in the */ /* static part of the template. */ g2int needext; /* indicates whether or not the template needs */ /* to be extended. */ g2int extlen; /* number of entries in the template extension. */ g2int *ext; /* num of octets of each entry in the extension */ /* part of the template. */ }; typedef struct gtemplate gtemplate; struct gribfield { g2int version,discipline; g2int *idsect; g2int idsectlen; unsigned char *local; g2int locallen; g2int ifldnum; g2int griddef,ngrdpts; g2int numoct_opt,interp_opt,num_opt; g2int *list_opt; g2int igdtnum,igdtlen; g2int *igdtmpl; g2int ipdtnum,ipdtlen; g2int *ipdtmpl; g2int num_coord; g2float *coord_list; g2int ndpts,idrtnum,idrtlen; g2int *idrtmpl; g2int unpacked; g2int expanded; g2int ibmap; g2int *bmap; g2float *fld; }; typedef struct gribfield gribfield; /* Prototypes for unpacking API */ void seekgb(FILE *,g2int ,g2int ,g2int *,g2int *); g2int g2_info(unsigned char *,g2int *,g2int *,g2int *,g2int *); g2int g2_getfld(unsigned char *,g2int ,g2int ,g2int ,gribfield **); void g2_free(gribfield *); /* Prototypes for packing API */ g2int g2_create(unsigned char *,g2int *,g2int *); g2int g2_addlocal(unsigned char *,unsigned char *,g2int ); g2int g2_addgrid(unsigned char *,g2int *,g2int *,g2int *,g2int ); g2int g2_addfield(unsigned char *,g2int ,g2int *, g2float *,g2int ,g2int ,g2int *, g2float *,g2int ,g2int ,g2int *); g2int g2_gribend(unsigned char *); /* Prototypes for supporting routines */ extern double int_power(double, g2int ); extern void mkieee(g2float *,g2int *,g2int); void rdieee(g2int *,g2float *,g2int ); extern gtemplate *getpdstemplate(g2int); extern gtemplate *extpdstemplate(g2int,g2int *); extern gtemplate *getdrstemplate(g2int); extern gtemplate *extdrstemplate(g2int,g2int *); extern gtemplate *getgridtemplate(g2int); extern gtemplate *extgridtemplate(g2int,g2int *); extern void simpack(g2float *,g2int,g2int *,unsigned char *,g2int *); extern void compack(g2float *,g2int,g2int,g2int *,unsigned char *,g2int *); void misspack(g2float *,g2int ,g2int ,g2int *, unsigned char *, g2int *); void gbit(unsigned char *,g2int *,g2int ,g2int ); void sbit(unsigned char *,g2int *,g2int ,g2int ); void gbits(unsigned char *,g2int *,g2int ,g2int ,g2int ,g2int ); void sbits(unsigned char *,g2int *,g2int ,g2int ,g2int ,g2int ); int pack_gp(g2int *, g2int *, g2int *, g2int *, g2int *, g2int *, g2int *, g2int *, g2int *, g2int *, g2int *, g2int *, g2int *, g2int *, g2int *, g2int *, g2int *, g2int *, g2int *, g2int *); #endif /* _grib2_H */ I have been scratching my head for two days on this. If anyone has an idea on what to do or can point me in some sort of direction, I'm stumped. Also, if you have any comments on how I can improve this post I'd love to hear them, kinda new at this posting thing. Usually I'm able to find an answer in the vast stores of knowledge already contained on the web.

    Read the article

  • Zen and the Art of File and Folder Organization

    - by Mark Virtue
    Is your desk a paragon of neatness, or does it look like a paper-bomb has gone off? If you’ve been putting off getting organized because the task is too huge or daunting, or you don’t know where to start, we’ve got 40 tips to get you on the path to zen mastery of your filing system. For all those readers who would like to get their files and folders organized, or, if they’re already organized, better organized—we have compiled a complete guide to getting organized and staying organized, a comprehensive article that will hopefully cover every possible tip you could want. Signs that Your Computer is Poorly Organized If your computer is a mess, you’re probably already aware of it.  But just in case you’re not, here are some tell-tale signs: Your Desktop has over 40 icons on it “My Documents” contains over 300 files and 60 folders, including MP3s and digital photos You use the Windows’ built-in search facility whenever you need to find a file You can’t find programs in the out-of-control list of programs in your Start Menu You save all your Word documents in one folder, all your spreadsheets in a second folder, etc Any given file that you’re looking for may be in any one of four different sets of folders But before we start, here are some quick notes: We’re going to assume you know what files and folders are, and how to create, save, rename, copy and delete them The organization principles described in this article apply equally to all computer systems.  However, the screenshots here will reflect how things look on Windows (usually Windows 7).  We will also mention some useful features of Windows that can help you get organized. Everyone has their own favorite methodology of organizing and filing, and it’s all too easy to get into “My Way is Better than Your Way” arguments.  The reality is that there is no perfect way of getting things organized.  When I wrote this article, I tried to keep a generalist and objective viewpoint.  I consider myself to be unusually well organized (to the point of obsession, truth be told), and I’ve had 25 years experience in collecting and organizing files on computers.  So I’ve got a lot to say on the subject.  But the tips I have described here are only one way of doing it.  Hopefully some of these tips will work for you too, but please don’t read this as any sort of “right” way to do it. At the end of the article we’ll be asking you, the reader, for your own organization tips. Why Bother Organizing At All? For some, the answer to this question is self-evident. And yet, in this era of powerful desktop search software (the search capabilities built into the Windows Vista and Windows 7 Start Menus, and third-party programs like Google Desktop Search), the question does need to be asked, and answered. I have a friend who puts every file he ever creates, receives or downloads into his My Documents folder and doesn’t bother filing them into subfolders at all.  He relies on the search functionality built into his Windows operating system to help him find whatever he’s looking for.  And he always finds it.  He’s a Search Samurai.  For him, filing is a waste of valuable time that could be spent enjoying life! It’s tempting to follow suit.  On the face of it, why would anyone bother to take the time to organize their hard disk when such excellent search software is available?  Well, if all you ever want to do with the files you own is to locate and open them individually (for listening, editing, etc), then there’s no reason to ever bother doing one scrap of organization.  But consider these common tasks that are not achievable with desktop search software: Find files manually.  Often it’s not convenient, speedy or even possible to utilize your desktop search software to find what you want.  It doesn’t work 100% of the time, or you may not even have it installed.  Sometimes its just plain faster to go straight to the file you want, if you know it’s in a particular sub-folder, rather than trawling through hundreds of search results. Find groups of similar files (e.g. all your “work” files, all the photos of your Europe holiday in 2008, all your music videos, all the MP3s from Dark Side of the Moon, all your letters you wrote to your wife, all your tax returns).  Clever naming of the files will only get you so far.  Sometimes it’s the date the file was created that’s important, other times it’s the file format, and other times it’s the purpose of the file.  How do you name a collection of files so that they’re easy to isolate based on any of the above criteria?  Short answer, you can’t. Move files to a new computer.  It’s time to upgrade your computer.  How do you quickly grab all the files that are important to you?  Or you decide to have two computers now – one for home and one for work.  How do you quickly isolate only the work-related files to move them to the work computer? Synchronize files to other computers.  If you have more than one computer, and you need to mirror some of your files onto the other computer (e.g. your music collection), then you need a way to quickly determine which files are to be synced and which are not.  Surely you don’t want to synchronize everything? Choose which files to back up.  If your backup regime calls for multiple backups, or requires speedy backups, then you’ll need to be able to specify which files are to be backed up, and which are not.  This is not possible if they’re all in the same folder. Finally, if you’re simply someone who takes pleasure in being organized, tidy and ordered (me! me!), then you don’t even need a reason.  Being disorganized is simply unthinkable. Tips on Getting Organized Here we present our 40 best tips on how to get organized.  Or, if you’re already organized, to get better organized. Tip #1.  Choose Your Organization System Carefully The reason that most people are not organized is that it takes time.  And the first thing that takes time is deciding upon a system of organization.  This is always a matter of personal preference, and is not something that a geek on a website can tell you.  You should always choose your own system, based on how your own brain is organized (which makes the assumption that your brain is, in fact, organized). We can’t instruct you, but we can make suggestions: You may want to start off with a system based on the users of the computer.  i.e. “My Files”, “My Wife’s Files”, My Son’s Files”, etc.  Inside “My Files”, you might then break it down into “Personal” and “Business”.  You may then realize that there are overlaps.  For example, everyone may want to share access to the music library, or the photos from the school play.  So you may create another folder called “Family”, for the “common” files. You may decide that the highest-level breakdown of your files is based on the “source” of each file.  In other words, who created the files.  You could have “Files created by ME (business or personal)”, “Files created by people I know (family, friends, etc)”, and finally “Files created by the rest of the world (MP3 music files, downloaded or ripped movies or TV shows, software installation files, gorgeous desktop wallpaper images you’ve collected, etc).”  This system happens to be the one I use myself.  See below:  Mark is for files created by meVC is for files created by my company (Virtual Creations)Others is for files created by my friends and familyData is the rest of the worldAlso, Settings is where I store the configuration files and other program data files for my installed software (more on this in tip #34, below). Each folder will present its own particular set of requirements for further sub-organization.  For example, you may decide to organize your music collection into sub-folders based on the artist’s name, while your digital photos might get organized based on the date they were taken.  It can be different for every sub-folder! Another strategy would be based on “currentness”.  Files you have yet to open and look at live in one folder.  Ones that have been looked at but not yet filed live in another place.  Current, active projects live in yet another place.  All other files (your “archive”, if you like) would live in a fourth folder. (And of course, within that last folder you’d need to create a further sub-system based on one of the previous bullet points). Put some thought into this – changing it when it proves incomplete can be a big hassle!  Before you go to the trouble of implementing any system you come up with, examine a wide cross-section of the files you own and see if they will all be able to find a nice logical place to sit within your system. Tip #2.  When You Decide on Your System, Stick to It! There’s nothing more pointless than going to all the trouble of creating a system and filing all your files, and then whenever you create, receive or download a new file, you simply dump it onto your Desktop.  You need to be disciplined – forever!  Every new file you get, spend those extra few seconds to file it where it belongs!  Otherwise, in just a month or two, you’ll be worse off than before – half your files will be organized and half will be disorganized – and you won’t know which is which! Tip #3.  Choose the Root Folder of Your Structure Carefully Every data file (document, photo, music file, etc) that you create, own or is important to you, no matter where it came from, should be found within one single folder, and that one single folder should be located at the root of your C: drive (as a sub-folder of C:\).  In other words, do not base your folder structure in standard folders like “My Documents”.  If you do, then you’re leaving it up to the operating system engineers to decide what folder structure is best for you.  And every operating system has a different system!  In Windows 7 your files are found in C:\Users\YourName, whilst on Windows XP it was C:\Documents and Settings\YourName\My Documents.  In UNIX systems it’s often /home/YourName. These standard default folders tend to fill up with junk files and folders that are not at all important to you.  “My Documents” is the worst offender.  Every second piece of software you install, it seems, likes to create its own folder in the “My Documents” folder.  These folders usually don’t fit within your organizational structure, so don’t use them!  In fact, don’t even use the “My Documents” folder at all.  Allow it to fill up with junk, and then simply ignore it.  It sounds heretical, but: Don’t ever visit your “My Documents” folder!  Remove your icons/links to “My Documents” and replace them with links to the folders you created and you care about! Create your own file system from scratch!  Probably the best place to put it would be on your D: drive – if you have one.  This way, all your files live on one drive, while all the operating system and software component files live on the C: drive – simply and elegantly separated.  The benefits of that are profound.  Not only are there obvious organizational benefits (see tip #10, below), but when it comes to migrate your data to a new computer, you can (sometimes) simply unplug your D: drive and plug it in as the D: drive of your new computer (this implies that the D: drive is actually a separate physical disk, and not a partition on the same disk as C:).  You also get a slight speed improvement (again, only if your C: and D: drives are on separate physical disks). Warning:  From tip #12, below, you will see that it’s actually a good idea to have exactly the same file system structure – including the drive it’s filed on – on all of the computers you own.  So if you decide to use the D: drive as the storage system for your own files, make sure you are able to use the D: drive on all the computers you own.  If you can’t ensure that, then you can still use a clever geeky trick to store your files on the D: drive, but still access them all via the C: drive (see tip #17, below). If you only have one hard disk (C:), then create a dedicated folder that will contain all your files – something like C:\Files.  The name of the folder is not important, but make it a single, brief word. There are several reasons for this: When creating a backup regime, it’s easy to decide what files should be backed up – they’re all in the one folder! If you ever decide to trade in your computer for a new one, you know exactly which files to migrate You will always know where to begin a search for any file If you synchronize files with other computers, it makes your synchronization routines very simple.   It also causes all your shortcuts to continue to work on the other machines (more about this in tip #24, below). Once you’ve decided where your files should go, then put all your files in there – Everything!  Completely disregard the standard, default folders that are created for you by the operating system (“My Music”, “My Pictures”, etc).  In fact, you can actually relocate many of those folders into your own structure (more about that below, in tip #6). The more completely you get all your data files (documents, photos, music, etc) and all your configuration settings into that one folder, then the easier it will be to perform all of the above tasks. Once this has been done, and all your files live in one folder, all the other folders in C:\ can be thought of as “operating system” folders, and therefore of little day-to-day interest for us. Here’s a screenshot of a nicely organized C: drive, where all user files are located within the \Files folder:   Tip #4.  Use Sub-Folders This would be our simplest and most obvious tip.  It almost goes without saying.  Any organizational system you decide upon (see tip #1) will require that you create sub-folders for your files.  Get used to creating folders on a regular basis. Tip #5.  Don’t be Shy About Depth Create as many levels of sub-folders as you need.  Don’t be scared to do so.  Every time you notice an opportunity to group a set of related files into a sub-folder, do so.  Examples might include:  All the MP3s from one music CD, all the photos from one holiday, or all the documents from one client. It’s perfectly okay to put files into a folder called C:\Files\Me\From Others\Services\WestCo Bank\Statements\2009.  That’s only seven levels deep.  Ten levels is not uncommon.  Of course, it’s possible to take this too far.  If you notice yourself creating a sub-folder to hold only one file, then you’ve probably become a little over-zealous.  On the other hand, if you simply create a structure with only two levels (for example C:\Files\Work) then you really haven’t achieved any level of organization at all (unless you own only six files!).  Your “Work” folder will have become a dumping ground, just like your Desktop was, with most likely hundreds of files in it. Tip #6.  Move the Standard User Folders into Your Own Folder Structure Most operating systems, including Windows, create a set of standard folders for each of its users.  These folders then become the default location for files such as documents, music files, digital photos and downloaded Internet files.  In Windows 7, the full list is shown below: Some of these folders you may never use nor care about (for example, the Favorites folder, if you’re not using Internet Explorer as your browser).  Those ones you can leave where they are.  But you may be using some of the other folders to store files that are important to you.  Even if you’re not using them, Windows will still often treat them as the default storage location for many types of files.  When you go to save a standard file type, it can become annoying to be automatically prompted to save it in a folder that’s not part of your own file structure. But there’s a simple solution:  Move the folders you care about into your own folder structure!  If you do, then the next time you go to save a file of the corresponding type, Windows will prompt you to save it in the new, moved location. Moving the folders is easy.  Simply drag-and-drop them to the new location.  Here’s a screenshot of the default My Music folder being moved to my custom personal folder (Mark): Tip #7.  Name Files and Folders Intelligently This is another one that almost goes without saying, but we’ll say it anyway:  Do not allow files to be created that have meaningless names like Document1.doc, or folders called New Folder (2).  Take that extra 20 seconds and come up with a meaningful name for the file/folder – one that accurately divulges its contents without repeating the entire contents in the name. Tip #8.  Watch Out for Long Filenames Another way to tell if you have not yet created enough depth to your folder hierarchy is that your files often require really long names.  If you need to call a file Johnson Sales Figures March 2009.xls (which might happen to live in the same folder as Abercrombie Budget Report 2008.xls), then you might want to create some sub-folders so that the first file could be simply called March.xls, and living in the Clients\Johnson\Sales Figures\2009 folder. A well-placed file needs only a brief filename! Tip #9.  Use Shortcuts!  Everywhere! This is probably the single most useful and important tip we can offer.  A shortcut allows a file to be in two places at once. Why would you want that?  Well, the file and folder structure of every popular operating system on the market today is hierarchical.  This means that all objects (files and folders) always live within exactly one parent folder.  It’s a bit like a tree.  A tree has branches (folders) and leaves (files).  Each leaf, and each branch, is supported by exactly one parent branch, all the way back to the root of the tree (which, incidentally, is exactly why C:\ is called the “root folder” of the C: drive). That hard disks are structured this way may seem obvious and even necessary, but it’s only one way of organizing data.  There are others:  Relational databases, for example, organize structured data entirely differently.  The main limitation of hierarchical filing structures is that a file can only ever be in one branch of the tree – in only one folder – at a time.  Why is this a problem?  Well, there are two main reasons why this limitation is a problem for computer users: The “correct” place for a file, according to our organizational rationale, is very often a very inconvenient place for that file to be located.  Just because it’s correctly filed doesn’t mean it’s easy to get to.  Your file may be “correctly” buried six levels deep in your sub-folder structure, but you may need regular and speedy access to this file every day.  You could always move it to a more convenient location, but that would mean that you would need to re-file back to its “correct” location it every time you’d finished working on it.  Most unsatisfactory. A file may simply “belong” in two or more different locations within your file structure.  For example, say you’re an accountant and you have just completed the 2009 tax return for John Smith.  It might make sense to you to call this file 2009 Tax Return.doc and file it under Clients\John Smith.  But it may also be important to you to have the 2009 tax returns from all your clients together in the one place.  So you might also want to call the file John Smith.doc and file it under Tax Returns\2009.  The problem is, in a purely hierarchical filing system, you can’t put it in both places.  Grrrrr! Fortunately, Windows (and most other operating systems) offers a way for you to do exactly that:  It’s called a “shortcut” (also known as an “alias” on Macs and a “symbolic link” on UNIX systems).  Shortcuts allow a file to exist in one place, and an icon that represents the file to be created and put anywhere else you please.  In fact, you can create a dozen such icons and scatter them all over your hard disk.  Double-clicking on one of these icons/shortcuts opens up the original file, just as if you had double-clicked on the original file itself. Consider the following two icons: The one on the left is the actual Word document, while the one on the right is a shortcut that represents the Word document.  Double-clicking on either icon will open the same file.  There are two main visual differences between the icons: The shortcut will have a small arrow in the lower-left-hand corner (on Windows, anyway) The shortcut is allowed to have a name that does not include the file extension (the “.docx” part, in this case) You can delete the shortcut at any time without losing any actual data.  The original is still intact.  All you lose is the ability to get to that data from wherever the shortcut was. So why are shortcuts so great?  Because they allow us to easily overcome the main limitation of hierarchical file systems, and put a file in two (or more) places at the same time.  You will always have files that don’t play nice with your organizational rationale, and can’t be filed in only one place.  They demand to exist in two places.  Shortcuts allow this!  Furthermore, they allow you to collect your most often-opened files and folders together in one spot for convenient access.  The cool part is that the original files stay where they are, safe forever in their perfectly organized location. So your collection of most often-opened files can – and should – become a collection of shortcuts! If you’re still not convinced of the utility of shortcuts, consider the following well-known areas of a typical Windows computer: The Start Menu (and all the programs that live within it) The Quick Launch bar (or the Superbar in Windows 7) The “Favorite folders” area in the top-left corner of the Windows Explorer window (in Windows Vista or Windows 7) Your Internet Explorer Favorites or Firefox Bookmarks Each item in each of these areas is a shortcut!  Each of those areas exist for one purpose only:  For convenience – to provide you with a collection of the files and folders you access most often. It should be easy to see by now that shortcuts are designed for one single purpose:  To make accessing your files more convenient.  Each time you double-click on a shortcut, you are saved the hassle of locating the file (or folder, or program, or drive, or control panel icon) that it represents. Shortcuts allow us to invent a golden rule of file and folder organization: “Only ever have one copy of a file – never have two copies of the same file.  Use a shortcut instead” (this rule doesn’t apply to copies created for backup purposes, of course!) There are also lesser rules, like “don’t move a file into your work area – create a shortcut there instead”, and “any time you find yourself frustrated with how long it takes to locate a file, create a shortcut to it and place that shortcut in a convenient location.” So how to we create these massively useful shortcuts?  There are two main ways: “Copy” the original file or folder (click on it and type Ctrl-C, or right-click on it and select Copy):  Then right-click in an empty area of the destination folder (the place where you want the shortcut to go) and select Paste shortcut: Right-drag (drag with the right mouse button) the file from the source folder to the destination folder.  When you let go of the mouse button at the destination folder, a menu pops up: Select Create shortcuts here. Note that when shortcuts are created, they are often named something like Shortcut to Budget Detail.doc (windows XP) or Budget Detail – Shortcut.doc (Windows 7).   If you don’t like those extra words, you can easily rename the shortcuts after they’re created, or you can configure Windows to never insert the extra words in the first place (see our article on how to do this). And of course, you can create shortcuts to folders too, not just to files! Bottom line: Whenever you have a file that you’d like to access from somewhere else (whether it’s convenience you’re after, or because the file simply belongs in two places), create a shortcut to the original file in the new location. Tip #10.  Separate Application Files from Data Files Any digital organization guru will drum this rule into you.  Application files are the components of the software you’ve installed (e.g. Microsoft Word, Adobe Photoshop or Internet Explorer).  Data files are the files that you’ve created for yourself using that software (e.g. Word Documents, digital photos, emails or playlists). Software gets installed, uninstalled and upgraded all the time.  Hopefully you always have the original installation media (or downloaded set-up file) kept somewhere safe, and can thus reinstall your software at any time.  This means that the software component files are of little importance.  Whereas the files you have created with that software is, by definition, important.  It’s a good rule to always separate unimportant files from important files. So when your software prompts you to save a file you’ve just created, take a moment and check out where it’s suggesting that you save the file.  If it’s suggesting that you save the file into the same folder as the software itself, then definitely don’t follow that suggestion.  File it in your own folder!  In fact, see if you can find the program’s configuration option that determines where files are saved by default (if it has one), and change it. Tip #11.  Organize Files Based on Purpose, Not on File Type If you have, for example a folder called Work\Clients\Johnson, and within that folder you have two sub-folders, Word Documents and Spreadsheets (in other words, you’re separating “.doc” files from “.xls” files), then chances are that you’re not optimally organized.  It makes little sense to organize your files based on the program that created them.  Instead, create your sub-folders based on the purpose of the file.  For example, it would make more sense to create sub-folders called Correspondence and Financials.  It may well be that all the files in a given sub-folder are of the same file-type, but this should be more of a coincidence and less of a design feature of your organization system. Tip #12.  Maintain the Same Folder Structure on All Your Computers In other words, whatever organizational system you create, apply it to every computer that you can.  There are several benefits to this: There’s less to remember.  No matter where you are, you always know where to look for your files If you copy or synchronize files from one computer to another, then setting up the synchronization job becomes very simple Shortcuts can be copied or moved from one computer to another with ease (assuming the original files are also copied/moved).  There’s no need to find the target of the shortcut all over again on the second computer Ditto for linked files (e.g Word documents that link to data in a separate Excel file), playlists, and any files that reference the exact file locations of other files. This applies even to the drive that your files are stored on.  If your files are stored on C: on one computer, make sure they’re stored on C: on all your computers.  Otherwise all your shortcuts, playlists and linked files will stop working! Tip #13.  Create an “Inbox” Folder Create yourself a folder where you store all files that you’re currently working on, or that you haven’t gotten around to filing yet.  You can think of this folder as your “to-do” list.  You can call it “Inbox” (making it the same metaphor as your email system), or “Work”, or “To-Do”, or “Scratch”, or whatever name makes sense to you.  It doesn’t matter what you call it – just make sure you have one! Once you have finished working on a file, you then move it from the “Inbox” to its correct location within your organizational structure. You may want to use your Desktop as this “Inbox” folder.  Rightly or wrongly, most people do.  It’s not a bad place to put such files, but be careful:  If you do decide that your Desktop represents your “to-do” list, then make sure that no other files find their way there.  In other words, make sure that your “Inbox”, wherever it is, Desktop or otherwise, is kept free of junk – stray files that don’t belong there. So where should you put this folder, which, almost by definition, lives outside the structure of the rest of your filing system?  Well, first and foremost, it has to be somewhere handy.  This will be one of your most-visited folders, so convenience is key.  Putting it on the Desktop is a great option – especially if you don’t have any other folders on your Desktop:  the folder then becomes supremely easy to find in Windows Explorer: You would then create shortcuts to this folder in convenient spots all over your computer (“Favorite Links”, “Quick Launch”, etc). Tip #14.  Ensure You have Only One “Inbox” Folder Once you’ve created your “Inbox” folder, don’t use any other folder location as your “to-do list”.  Throw every incoming or created file into the Inbox folder as you create/receive it.  This keeps the rest of your computer pristine and free of randomly created or downloaded junk.  The last thing you want to be doing is checking multiple folders to see all your current tasks and projects.  Gather them all together into one folder. Here are some tips to help ensure you only have one Inbox: Set the default “save” location of all your programs to this folder. Set the default “download” location for your browser to this folder. If this folder is not your desktop (recommended) then also see if you can make a point of not putting “to-do” files on your desktop.  This keeps your desktop uncluttered and Zen-like: (the Inbox folder is in the bottom-right corner) Tip #15.  Be Vigilant about Clearing Your “Inbox” Folder This is one of the keys to staying organized.  If you let your “Inbox” overflow (i.e. allow there to be more than, say, 30 files or folders in there), then you’re probably going to start feeling like you’re overwhelmed:  You’re not keeping up with your to-do list.  Once your Inbox gets beyond a certain point (around 30 files, studies have shown), then you’ll simply start to avoid it.  You may continue to put files in there, but you’ll be scared to look at it, fearing the “out of control” feeling that all overworked, chaotic or just plain disorganized people regularly feel. So, here’s what you can do: Visit your Inbox/to-do folder regularly (at least five times per day). Scan the folder regularly for files that you have completed working on and are ready for filing.  File them immediately. Make it a source of pride to keep the number of files in this folder as small as possible.  If you value peace of mind, then make the emptiness of this folder one of your highest (computer) priorities If you know that a particular file has been in the folder for more than, say, six weeks, then admit that you’re not actually going to get around to processing it, and move it to its final resting place. Tip #16.  File Everything Immediately, and Use Shortcuts for Your Active Projects As soon as you create, receive or download a new file, store it away in its “correct” folder immediately.  Then, whenever you need to work on it (possibly straight away), create a shortcut to it in your “Inbox” (“to-do”) folder or your desktop.  That way, all your files are always in their “correct” locations, yet you still have immediate, convenient access to your current, active files.  When you finish working on a file, simply delete the shortcut. Ideally, your “Inbox” folder – and your Desktop – should contain no actual files or folders.  They should simply contain shortcuts. Tip #17.  Use Directory Symbolic Links (or Junctions) to Maintain One Unified Folder Structure Using this tip, we can get around a potential hiccup that we can run into when creating our organizational structure – the issue of having more than one drive on our computer (C:, D:, etc).  We might have files we need to store on the D: drive for space reasons, and yet want to base our organized folder structure on the C: drive (or vice-versa). Your chosen organizational structure may dictate that all your files must be accessed from the C: drive (for example, the root folder of all your files may be something like C:\Files).  And yet you may still have a D: drive and wish to take advantage of the hundreds of spare Gigabytes that it offers.  Did you know that it’s actually possible to store your files on the D: drive and yet access them as if they were on the C: drive?  And no, we’re not talking about shortcuts here (although the concept is very similar). By using the shell command mklink, you can essentially take a folder that lives on one drive and create an alias for it on a different drive (you can do lots more than that with mklink – for a full rundown on this programs capabilities, see our dedicated article).  These aliases are called directory symbolic links (and used to be known as junctions).  You can think of them as “virtual” folders.  They function exactly like regular folders, except they’re physically located somewhere else. For example, you may decide that your entire D: drive contains your complete organizational file structure, but that you need to reference all those files as if they were on the C: drive, under C:\Files.  If that was the case you could create C:\Files as a directory symbolic link – a link to D:, as follows: mklink /d c:\files d:\ Or it may be that the only files you wish to store on the D: drive are your movie collection.  You could locate all your movie files in the root of your D: drive, and then link it to C:\Files\Media\Movies, as follows: mklink /d c:\files\media\movies d:\ (Needless to say, you must run these commands from a command prompt – click the Start button, type cmd and press Enter) Tip #18. Customize Your Folder Icons This is not strictly speaking an organizational tip, but having unique icons for each folder does allow you to more quickly visually identify which folder is which, and thus saves you time when you’re finding files.  An example is below (from my folder that contains all files downloaded from the Internet): To learn how to change your folder icons, please refer to our dedicated article on the subject. Tip #19.  Tidy Your Start Menu The Windows Start Menu is usually one of the messiest parts of any Windows computer.  Every program you install seems to adopt a completely different approach to placing icons in this menu.  Some simply put a single program icon.  Others create a folder based on the name of the software.  And others create a folder based on the name of the software manufacturer.  It’s chaos, and can make it hard to find the software you want to run. Thankfully we can avoid this chaos with useful operating system features like Quick Launch, the Superbar or pinned start menu items. Even so, it would make a lot of sense to get into the guts of the Start Menu itself and give it a good once-over.  All you really need to decide is how you’re going to organize your applications.  A structure based on the purpose of the application is an obvious candidate.  Below is an example of one such structure: In this structure, Utilities means software whose job it is to keep the computer itself running smoothly (configuration tools, backup software, Zip programs, etc).  Applications refers to any productivity software that doesn’t fit under the headings Multimedia, Graphics, Internet, etc. In case you’re not aware, every icon in your Start Menu is a shortcut and can be manipulated like any other shortcut (copied, moved, deleted, etc). With the Windows Start Menu (all version of Windows), Microsoft has decided that there be two parallel folder structures to store your Start Menu shortcuts.  One for you (the logged-in user of the computer) and one for all users of the computer.  Having two parallel structures can often be redundant:  If you are the only user of the computer, then having two parallel structures is totally redundant.  Even if you have several users that regularly log into the computer, most of your installed software will need to be made available to all users, and should thus be moved out of the “just you” version of the Start Menu and into the “all users” area. To take control of your Start Menu, so you can start organizing it, you’ll need to know how to access the actual folders and shortcut files that make up the Start Menu (both versions of it).  To find these folders and files, click the Start button and then right-click on the All Programs text (Windows XP users should right-click on the Start button itself): The Open option refers to the “just you” version of the Start Menu, while the Open All Users option refers to the “all users” version.  Click on the one you want to organize. A Windows Explorer window then opens with your chosen version of the Start Menu selected.  From there it’s easy.  Double-click on the Programs folder and you’ll see all your folders and shortcuts.  Now you can delete/rename/move until it’s just the way you want it. Note:  When you’re reorganizing your Start Menu, you may want to have two Explorer windows open at the same time – one showing the “just you” version and one showing the “all users” version.  You can drag-and-drop between the windows. Tip #20.  Keep Your Start Menu Tidy Once you have a perfectly organized Start Menu, try to be a little vigilant about keeping it that way.  Every time you install a new piece of software, the icons that get created will almost certainly violate your organizational structure. So to keep your Start Menu pristine and organized, make sure you do the following whenever you install a new piece of software: Check whether the software was installed into the “just you” area of the Start Menu, or the “all users” area, and then move it to the correct area. Remove all the unnecessary icons (like the “Read me” icon, the “Help” icon (you can always open the help from within the software itself when it’s running), the “Uninstall” icon, the link(s)to the manufacturer’s website, etc) Rename the main icon(s) of the software to something brief that makes sense to you.  For example, you might like to rename Microsoft Office Word 2010 to simply Word Move the icon(s) into the correct folder based on your Start Menu organizational structure And don’t forget:  when you uninstall a piece of software, the software’s uninstall routine is no longer going to be able to remove the software’s icon from the Start Menu (because you moved and/or renamed it), so you’ll need to remove that icon manually. Tip #21.  Tidy C:\ The root of your C: drive (C:\) is a common dumping ground for files and folders – both by the users of your computer and by the software that you install on your computer.  It can become a mess. There’s almost no software these days that requires itself to be installed in C:\.  99% of the time it can and should be installed into C:\Program Files.  And as for your own files, well, it’s clear that they can (and almost always should) be stored somewhere else. In an ideal world, your C:\ folder should look like this (on Windows 7): Note that there are some system files and folders in C:\ that are usually and deliberately “hidden” (such as the Windows virtual memory file pagefile.sys, the boot loader file bootmgr, and the System Volume Information folder).  Hiding these files and folders is a good idea, as they need to stay where they are and are almost never needed to be opened or even seen by you, the user.  Hiding them prevents you from accidentally messing with them, and enhances your sense of order and well-being when you look at your C: drive folder. Tip #22.  Tidy Your Desktop The Desktop is probably the most abused part of a Windows computer (from an organization point of view).  It usually serves as a dumping ground for all incoming files, as well as holding icons to oft-used applications, plus some regularly opened files and folders.  It often ends up becoming an uncontrolled mess.  See if you can avoid this.  Here’s why… Application icons (Word, Internet Explorer, etc) are often found on the Desktop, but it’s unlikely that this is the optimum place for them.  The “Quick Launch” bar (or the Superbar in Windows 7) is always visible and so represents a perfect location to put your icons.  You’ll only be able to see the icons on your Desktop when all your programs are minimized.  It might be time to get your application icons off your desktop… You may have decided that the Inbox/To-do folder on your computer (see tip #13, above) should be your Desktop.  If so, then enough said.  Simply be vigilant about clearing it and preventing it from being polluted by junk files (see tip #15, above).  On the other hand, if your Desktop is not acting as your “Inbox” folder, then there’s no reason for it to have any data files or folders on it at all, except perhaps a couple of shortcuts to often-opened files and folders (either ongoing or current projects).  Everything else should be moved to your “Inbox” folder. In an ideal world, it might look like this: Tip #23.  Move Permanent Items on Your Desktop Away from the Top-Left Corner When files/folders are dragged onto your desktop in a Windows Explorer window, or when shortcuts are created on your Desktop from Internet Explorer, those icons are always placed in the top-left corner – or as close as they can get.  If you have other files, folders or shortcuts that you keep on the Desktop permanently, then it’s a good idea to separate these permanent icons from the transient ones, so that you can quickly identify which ones the transients are.  An easy way to do this is to move all your permanent icons to the right-hand side of your Desktop.  That should keep them separated from incoming items. Tip #24.  Synchronize If you have more than one computer, you’ll almost certainly want to share files between them.  If the computers are permanently attached to the same local network, then there’s no need to store multiple copies of any one file or folder – shortcuts will suffice.  However, if the computers are not always on the same network, then you will at some point need to copy files between them.  For files that need to permanently live on both computers, the ideal way to do this is to synchronize the files, as opposed to simply copying them. We only have room here to write a brief summary of synchronization, not a full article.  In short, there are several different types of synchronization: Where the contents of one folder are accessible anywhere, such as with Dropbox Where the contents of any number of folders are accessible anywhere, such as with Windows Live Mesh Where any files or folders from anywhere on your computer are synchronized with exactly one other computer, such as with the Windows “Briefcase”, Microsoft SyncToy, or (much more powerful, yet still free) SyncBack from 2BrightSparks.  This only works when both computers are on the same local network, at least temporarily. A great advantage of synchronization solutions is that once you’ve got it configured the way you want it, then the sync process happens automatically, every time.  Click a button (or schedule it to happen automatically) and all your files are automagically put where they’re supposed to be. If you maintain the same file and folder structure on both computers, then you can also sync files depend upon the correct location of other files, like shortcuts, playlists and office documents that link to other office documents, and the synchronized files still work on the other computer! Tip #25.  Hide Files You Never Need to See If you have your files well organized, you will often be able to tell if a file is out of place just by glancing at the contents of a folder (for example, it should be pretty obvious if you look in a folder that contains all the MP3s from one music CD and see a Word document in there).  This is a good thing – it allows you to determine if there are files out of place with a quick glance.  Yet sometimes there are files in a folder that seem out of place but actually need to be there, such as the “folder art” JPEGs in music folders, and various files in the root of the C: drive.  If such files never need to be opened by you, then a good idea is to simply hide them.  Then, the next time you glance at the folder, you won’t have to remember whether that file was supposed to be there or not, because you won’t see it at all! To hide a file, simply right-click on it and choose Properties: Then simply tick the Hidden tick-box:   Tip #26.  Keep Every Setup File These days most software is downloaded from the Internet.  Whenever you download a piece of software, keep it.  You’ll never know when you need to reinstall the software. Further, keep with it an Internet shortcut that links back to the website where you originally downloaded it, in case you ever need to check for updates. See tip #33 below for a full description of the excellence of organizing your setup files. Tip #27.  Try to Minimize the Number of Folders that Contain Both Files and Sub-folders Some of the folders in your organizational structure will contain only files.  Others will contain only sub-folders.  And you will also have some folders that contain both files and sub-folders.  You will notice slight improvements in how long it takes you to locate a file if you try to avoid this third type of folder.  It’s not always possible, of course – you’ll always have some of these folders, but see if you can avoid it. One way of doing this is to take all the leftover files that didn’t end up getting stored in a sub-folder and create a special “Miscellaneous” or “Other” folder for them. Tip #28.  Starting a Filename with an Underscore Brings it to the Top of a List Further to the previous tip, if you name that “Miscellaneous” or “Other” folder in such a way that its name begins with an underscore “_”, then it will appear at the top of the list of files/folders. The screenshot below is an example of this.  Each folder in the list contains a set of digital photos.  The folder at the top of the list, _Misc, contains random photos that didn’t deserve their own dedicated folder: Tip #29.  Clean Up those CD-ROMs and (shudder!) Floppy Disks Have you got a pile of CD-ROMs stacked on a shelf of your office?  Old photos, or files you archived off onto CD-ROM (or even worse, floppy disks!) because you didn’t have enough disk space at the time?  In the meantime have you upgraded your computer and now have 500 Gigabytes of space you don’t know what to do with?  If so, isn’t it time you tidied up that stack of disks and filed them into your gorgeous new folder structure? So what are you waiting for?  Bite the bullet, copy them all back onto your computer, file them in their appropriate folders, and then back the whole lot up onto a shiny new 1000Gig external hard drive! Useful Folders to Create This next section suggests some useful folders that you might want to create within your folder structure.  I’ve personally found them to be indispensable. The first three are all about convenience – handy folders to create and then put somewhere that you can always access instantly.  For each one, it’s not so important where the actual folder is located, but it’s very important where you put the shortcut(s) to the folder.  You might want to locate the shortcuts: On your Desktop In your “Quick Launch” area (or pinned to your Windows 7 Superbar) In your Windows Explorer “Favorite Links” area Tip #30.  Create an “Inbox” (“To-Do”) Folder This has already been mentioned in depth (see tip #13), but we wanted to reiterate its importance here.  This folder contains all the recently created, received or downloaded files that you have not yet had a chance to file away properly, and it also may contain files that you have yet to process.  In effect, it becomes a sort of “to-do list”.  It doesn’t have to be called “Inbox” – you can call it whatever you want. Tip #31.  Create a Folder where Your Current Projects are Collected Rather than going hunting for them all the time, or dumping them all on your desktop, create a special folder where you put links (or work folders) for each of the projects you’re currently working on. You can locate this folder in your “Inbox” folder, on your desktop, or anywhere at all – just so long as there’s a way of getting to it quickly, such as putting a link to it in Windows Explorer’s “Favorite Links” area: Tip #32.  Create a Folder for Files and Folders that You Regularly Open You will always have a few files that you open regularly, whether it be a spreadsheet of your current accounts, or a favorite playlist.  These are not necessarily “current projects”, rather they’re simply files that you always find yourself opening.  Typically such files would be located on your desktop (or even better, shortcuts to those files).  Why not collect all such shortcuts together and put them in their own special folder? As with the “Current Projects” folder (above), you would want to locate that folder somewhere convenient.  Below is an example of a folder called “Quick links”, with about seven files (shortcuts) in it, that is accessible through the Windows Quick Launch bar: See tip #37 below for a full explanation of the power of the Quick Launch bar. Tip #33.  Create a “Set-ups” Folder A typical computer has dozens of applications installed on it.  For each piece of software, there are often many different pieces of information you need to keep track of, including: The original installation setup file(s).  This can be anything from a simple 100Kb setup.exe file you downloaded from a website, all the way up to a 4Gig ISO file that you copied from a DVD-ROM that you purchased. The home page of the software manufacturer (in case you need to look up something on their support pages, their forum or their online help) The page containing the download link for your actual file (in case you need to re-download it, or download an upgraded version) The serial number Your proof-of-purchase documentation Any other template files, plug-ins, themes, etc that also need to get installed For each piece of software, it’s a great idea to gather all of these files together and put them in a single folder.  The folder can be the name of the software (plus possibly a very brief description of what it’s for – in case you can’t remember what the software does based in its name).  Then you would gather all of these folders together into one place, and call it something like “Software” or “Setups”. If you have enough of these folders (I have several hundred, being a geek, collected over 20 years), then you may want to further categorize them.  My own categorization structure is based on “platform” (operating system): The last seven folders each represents one platform/operating system, while _Operating Systems contains set-up files for installing the operating systems themselves.  _Hardware contains ROMs for hardware I own, such as routers. Within the Windows folder (above), you can see the beginnings of the vast library of software I’ve compiled over the years: An example of a typical application folder looks like this: Tip #34.  Have a “Settings” Folder We all know that our documents are important.  So are our photos and music files.  We save all of these files into folders, and then locate them afterwards and double-click on them to open them.  But there are many files that are important to us that can’t be saved into folders, and then searched for and double-clicked later on.  These files certainly contain important information that we need, but are often created internally by an application, and saved wherever that application feels is appropriate. A good example of this is the “PST” file that Outlook creates for us and uses to store all our emails, contacts, appointments and so forth.  Another example would be the collection of Bookmarks that Firefox stores on your behalf. And yet another example would be the customized settings and configuration files of our all our software.  Granted, most Windows programs store their configuration in the Registry, but there are still many programs that use configuration files to store their settings. Imagine if you lost all of the above files!  And yet, when people are backing up their computers, they typically only back up the files they know about – those that are stored in the “My Documents” folder, etc.  If they had a hard disk failure or their computer was lost or stolen, their backup files would not include some of the most vital files they owned.  Also, when migrating to a new computer, it’s vital to ensure that these files make the journey. It can be a very useful idea to create yourself a folder to store all your “settings” – files that are important to you but which you never actually search for by name and double-click on to open them.  Otherwise, next time you go to set up a new computer just the way you want it, you’ll need to spend hours recreating the configuration of your previous computer! So how to we get our important files into this folder?  Well, we have a few options: Some programs (such as Outlook and its PST files) allow you to place these files wherever you want.  If you delve into the program’s options, you will find a setting somewhere that controls the location of the important settings files (or “personal storage” – PST – when it comes to Outlook) Some programs do not allow you to change such locations in any easy way, but if you get into the Registry, you can sometimes find a registry key that refers to the location of the file(s).  Simply move the file into your Settings folder and adjust the registry key to refer to the new location. Some programs stubbornly refuse to allow their settings files to be placed anywhere other then where they stipulate.  When faced with programs like these, you have three choices:  (1) You can ignore those files, (2) You can copy the files into your Settings folder (let’s face it – settings don’t change very often), or (3) you can use synchronization software, such as the Windows Briefcase, to make synchronized copies of all your files in your Settings folder.  All you then have to do is to remember to run your sync software periodically (perhaps just before you run your backup software!). There are some other things you may decide to locate inside this new “Settings” folder: Exports of registry keys (from the many applications that store their configurations in the Registry).  This is useful for backup purposes or for migrating to a new computer Notes you’ve made about all the specific customizations you have made to a particular piece of software (so that you’ll know how to do it all again on your next computer) Shortcuts to webpages that detail how to tweak certain aspects of your operating system or applications so they are just the way you like them (such as how to remove the words “Shortcut to” from the beginning of newly created shortcuts).  In other words, you’d want to create shortcuts to half the pages on the How-To Geek website! Here’s an example of a “Settings” folder: Windows Features that Help with Organization This section details some of the features of Microsoft Windows that are a boon to anyone hoping to stay optimally organized. Tip #35.  Use the “Favorite Links” Area to Access Oft-Used Folders Once you’ve created your great new filing system, work out which folders you access most regularly, or which serve as great starting points for locating the rest of the files in your folder structure, and then put links to those folders in your “Favorite Links” area of the left-hand side of the Windows Explorer window (simply called “Favorites” in Windows 7):   Some ideas for folders you might want to add there include: Your “Inbox” folder (or whatever you’ve called it) – most important! The base of your filing structure (e.g. C:\Files) A folder containing shortcuts to often-accessed folders on other computers around the network (shown above as Network Folders) A folder containing shortcuts to your current projects (unless that folder is in your “Inbox” folder) Getting folders into this area is very simple – just locate the folder you’re interested in and drag it there! Tip #36.  Customize the Places Bar in the File/Open and File/Save Boxes Consider the screenshot below: The highlighted icons (collectively known as the “Places Bar”) can be customized to refer to any folder location you want, allowing instant access to any part of your organizational structure. Note:  These File/Open and File/Save boxes have been superseded by new versions that use the Windows Vista/Windows 7 “Favorite Links”, but the older versions (shown above) are still used by a surprisingly large number of applications. The easiest way to customize these icons is to use the Group Policy Editor, but not everyone has access to this program.  If you do, open it up and navigate to: User Configuration > Administrative Templates > Windows Components > Windows Explorer > Common Open File Dialog If you don’t have access to the Group Policy Editor, then you’ll need to get into the Registry.  Navigate to: HKEY_CURRENT_USER \ Software \ Microsoft  \ Windows \ CurrentVersion \ Policies \ comdlg32 \ Placesbar It should then be easy to make the desired changes.  Log off and log on again to allow the changes to take effect. Tip #37.  Use the Quick Launch Bar as a Application and File Launcher That Quick Launch bar (to the right of the Start button) is a lot more useful than people give it credit for.  Most people simply have half a dozen icons in it, and use it to start just those programs.  But it can actually be used to instantly access just about anything in your filing system: For complete instructions on how to set this up, visit our dedicated article on this topic. Tip #38.  Put a Shortcut to Windows Explorer into Your Quick Launch Bar This is only necessary in Windows Vista and Windows XP.  The Microsoft boffins finally got wise and added it to the Windows 7 Superbar by default. Windows Explorer – the program used for managing your files and folders – is one of the most useful programs in Windows.  Anyone who considers themselves serious about being organized needs instant access to this program at any time.  A great place to create a shortcut to this program is in the Windows XP and Windows Vista “Quick Launch” bar: To get it there, locate it in your Start Menu (usually under “Accessories”) and then right-drag it down into your Quick Launch bar (and create a copy). Tip #39.  Customize the Starting Folder for Your Windows 7 Explorer Superbar Icon If you’re on Windows 7, your Superbar will include a Windows Explorer icon.  Clicking on the icon will launch Windows Explorer (of course), and will start you off in your “Libraries” folder.  Libraries may be fine as a starting point, but if you have created yourself an “Inbox” folder, then it would probably make more sense to start off in this folder every time you launch Windows Explorer. To change this default/starting folder location, then first right-click the Explorer icon in the Superbar, and then right-click Properties:Then, in Target field of the Windows Explorer Properties box that appears, type %windir%\explorer.exe followed by the path of the folder you wish to start in.  For example: %windir%\explorer.exe C:\Files If that folder happened to be on the Desktop (and called, say, “Inbox”), then you would use the following cleverness: %windir%\explorer.exe shell:desktop\Inbox Then click OK and test it out. Tip #40.  Ummmmm…. No, that’s it.  I can’t think of another one.  That’s all of the tips I can come up with.  I only created this one because 40 is such a nice round number… Case Study – An Organized PC To finish off the article, I have included a few screenshots of my (main) computer (running Vista).  The aim here is twofold: To give you a sense of what it looks like when the above, sometimes abstract, tips are applied to a real-life computer, and To offer some ideas about folders and structure that you may want to steal to use on your own PC. Let’s start with the C: drive itself.  Very minimal.  All my files are contained within C:\Files.  I’ll confine the rest of the case study to this folder: That folder contains the following: Mark: My personal files VC: My business (Virtual Creations, Australia) Others contains files created by friends and family Data contains files from the rest of the world (can be thought of as “public” files, usually downloaded from the Net) Settings is described above in tip #34 The Data folder contains the following sub-folders: Audio:  Radio plays, audio books, podcasts, etc Development:  Programmer and developer resources, sample source code, etc (see below) Humour:  Jokes, funnies (those emails that we all receive) Movies:  Downloaded and ripped movies (all legal, of course!), their scripts, DVD covers, etc. Music:  (see below) Setups:  Installation files for software (explained in full in tip #33) System:  (see below) TV:  Downloaded TV shows Writings:  Books, instruction manuals, etc (see below) The Music folder contains the following sub-folders: Album covers:  JPEG scans Guitar tabs:  Text files of guitar sheet music Lists:  e.g. “Top 1000 songs of all time” Lyrics:  Text files MIDI:  Electronic music files MP3 (representing 99% of the Music folder):  MP3s, either ripped from CDs or downloaded, sorted by artist/album name Music Video:  Video clips Sheet Music:  usually PDFs The Data\Writings folder contains the following sub-folders: (all pretty self-explanatory) The Data\Development folder contains the following sub-folders: Again, all pretty self-explanatory (if you’re a geek) The Data\System folder contains the following sub-folders: These are usually themes, plug-ins and other downloadable program-specific resources. The Mark folder contains the following sub-folders: From Others:  Usually letters that other people (friends, family, etc) have written to me For Others:  Letters and other things I have created for other people Green Book:  None of your business Playlists:  M3U files that I have compiled of my favorite songs (plus one M3U playlist file for every album I own) Writing:  Fiction, philosophy and other musings of mine Mark Docs:  Shortcut to C:\Users\Mark Settings:  Shortcut to C:\Files\Settings\Mark The Others folder contains the following sub-folders: The VC (Virtual Creations, my business – I develop websites) folder contains the following sub-folders: And again, all of those are pretty self-explanatory. Conclusion These tips have saved my sanity and helped keep me a productive geek, but what about you? What tips and tricks do you have to keep your files organized?  Please share them with us in the comments.  Come on, don’t be shy… Similar Articles Productive Geek Tips Fix For When Windows Explorer in Vista Stops Showing File NamesWhy Did Windows Vista’s Music Folder Icon Turn Yellow?Print or Create a Text File List of the Contents in a Directory the Easy WayCustomize the Windows 7 or Vista Send To MenuAdd Copy To / Move To on Windows 7 or Vista Right-Click Menu TouchFreeze Alternative in AutoHotkey The Icy Undertow Desktop Windows Home Server – Backup to LAN The Clear & Clean Desktop Use This Bookmarklet to Easily Get Albums Use AutoHotkey to Assign a Hotkey to a Specific Window Latest Software Reviews Tinyhacker Random Tips Acronis Online Backup DVDFab 6 Revo Uninstaller Pro Registry Mechanic 9 for Windows Track Daily Goals With 42Goals Video Toolbox is a Superb Online Video Editor Fun with 47 charts and graphs Tomorrow is Mother’s Day Check the Average Speed of YouTube Videos You’ve Watched OutlookStatView Scans and Displays General Usage Statistics

    Read the article

  • Is there a Telecommunications Reference Architecture?

    - by raul.goycoolea
    @font-face { font-family: "Arial"; }@font-face { font-family: "Courier New"; }@font-face { font-family: "Wingdings"; }@font-face { font-family: "Cambria"; }p.MsoNormal, li.MsoNormal, div.MsoNormal { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoListParagraph, li.MsoListParagraph, div.MsoListParagraph { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoListParagraphCxSpFirst, li.MsoListParagraphCxSpFirst, div.MsoListParagraphCxSpFirst { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoListParagraphCxSpMiddle, li.MsoListParagraphCxSpMiddle, div.MsoListParagraphCxSpMiddle { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoListParagraphCxSpLast, li.MsoListParagraphCxSpLast, div.MsoListParagraphCxSpLast { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }div.Section1 { page: Section1; }ol { margin-bottom: 0cm; }ul { margin-bottom: 0cm; } Abstract   Reference architecture provides needed architectural information that can be provided in advance to an enterprise to enable consistent architectural best practices. Enterprise Reference Architecture helps business owners to actualize their strategies, vision, objectives, and principles. It evaluates the IT systems, based on Reference Architecture goals, principles, and standards. It helps to reduce IT costs by increasing functionality, availability, scalability, etc. Telecom Reference Architecture provides customers with the flexibility to view bundled service bills online with the provision of multiple services. It provides real-time, flexible billing and charging systems, to handle complex promotions, discounts, and settlements with multiple parties. This paper attempts to describe the Reference Architecture for the Telecom Enterprises. It lays the foundation for a Telecom Reference Architecture by articulating the requirements, drivers, and pitfalls for telecom service providers. It describes generic reference architecture for telecom enterprises and moves on to explain how to achieve Enterprise Reference Architecture by using SOA.   Introduction   A Reference Architecture provides a methodology, set of practices, template, and standards based on a set of successful solutions implemented earlier. These solutions have been generalized and structured for the depiction of both a logical and a physical architecture, based on the harvesting of a set of patterns that describe observations in a number of successful implementations. It helps as a reference for the various architectures that an enterprise can implement to solve various problems. It can be used as the starting point or the point of comparisons for various departments/business entities of a company, or for the various companies for an enterprise. It provides multiple views for multiple stakeholders.   Major artifacts of the Enterprise Reference Architecture are methodologies, standards, metadata, documents, design patterns, etc.   Purpose of Reference Architecture   In most cases, architects spend a lot of time researching, investigating, defining, and re-arguing architectural decisions. It is like reinventing the wheel as their peers in other organizations or even the same organization have already spent a lot of time and effort defining their own architectural practices. This prevents an organization from learning from its own experiences and applying that knowledge for increased effectiveness.   Reference architecture provides missing architectural information that can be provided in advance to project team members to enable consistent architectural best practices.   Enterprise Reference Architecture helps an enterprise to achieve the following at the abstract level:   ·       Reference architecture is more of a communication channel to an enterprise ·       Helps the business owners to accommodate to their strategies, vision, objectives, and principles. ·       Evaluates the IT systems based on Reference Architecture Principles ·       Reduces IT spending through increasing functionality, availability, scalability, etc ·       A Real-time Integration Model helps to reduce the latency of the data updates Is used to define a single source of Information ·       Provides a clear view on how to manage information and security ·       Defines the policy around the data ownership, product boundaries, etc. ·       Helps with cost optimization across project and solution portfolios by eliminating unused or duplicate investments and assets ·       Has a shorter implementation time and cost   Once the reference architecture is in place, the set of architectural principles, standards, reference models, and best practices ensure that the aligned investments have the greatest possible likelihood of success in both the near term and the long term (TCO).     Common pitfalls for Telecom Service Providers   Telecom Reference Architecture serves as the first step towards maturity for a telecom service provider. During the course of our assignments/experiences with telecom players, we have come across the following observations – Some of these indicate a lack of maturity of the telecom service provider:   ·       In markets that are growing and not so mature, it has been observed that telcos have a significant amount of in-house or home-grown applications. In some of these markets, the growth has been so rapid that IT has been unable to cope with business demands. Telcos have shown a tendency to come up with workarounds in their IT applications so as to meet business needs. ·       Even for core functions like provisioning or mediation, some telcos have tried to manage with home-grown applications. ·       Most of the applications do not have the required scalability or maintainability to sustain growth in volumes or functionality. ·       Applications face interoperability issues with other applications in the operator's landscape. Integrating a new application or network element requires considerable effort on the part of the other applications. ·       Application boundaries are not clear, and functionality that is not in the initial scope of that application gets pushed onto it. This results in the development of the multiple, small applications without proper boundaries. ·       Usage of Legacy OSS/BSS systems, poor Integration across Multiple COTS Products and Internal Systems. Most of the Integrations are developed on ad-hoc basis and Point-to-Point Integration. ·       Redundancy of the business functions in different applications • Fragmented data across the different applications and no integrated view of the strategic data • Lot of performance Issues due to the usage of the complex integration across OSS and BSS systems   However, this is where the maturity of the telecom industry as a whole can be of help. The collaborative efforts of telcos to overcome some of these problems have resulted in bodies like the TM Forum. They have come up with frameworks for business processes, data, applications, and technology for telecom service providers. These could be a good starting point for telcos to clean up their enterprise landscape.   Industry Trends in Telecom Reference Architecture   Telecom reference architectures are evolving rapidly because telcos are facing business and IT challenges.   “The reality is that there probably is no killer application, no silver bullet that the telcos can latch onto to carry them into a 21st Century.... Instead, there are probably hundreds – perhaps thousands – of niche applications.... And the only way to find which of these works for you is to try out lots of them, ramp up the ones that work, and discontinue the ones that fail.” – Martin Creaner President & CTO TM Forum.   The following trends have been observed in telecom reference architecture:   ·       Transformation of business structures to align with customer requirements ·       Adoption of more Internet-like technical architectures. The Web 2.0 concept is increasingly being used. ·       Virtualization of the traditional operations support system (OSS) ·       Adoption of SOA to support development of IP-based services ·       Adoption of frameworks like Service Delivery Platforms (SDPs) and IP Multimedia Subsystem ·       (IMS) to enable seamless deployment of various services over fixed and mobile networks ·       Replacement of in-house, customized, and stove-piped OSS/BSS with standards-based COTS products ·       Compliance with industry standards and frameworks like eTOM, SID, and TAM to enable seamless integration with other standards-based products   Drivers of Reference Architecture   The drivers of the Reference Architecture are Reference Architecture Goals, Principles, and Enterprise Vision and Telecom Transformation. The details are depicted below diagram. @font-face { font-family: "Cambria"; }p.MsoNormal, li.MsoNormal, div.MsoNormal { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoCaption, li.MsoCaption, div.MsoCaption { margin: 0cm 0cm 10pt; font-size: 9pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-weight: bold; }div.Section1 { page: Section1; } Figure 1. Drivers for Reference Architecture @font-face { font-family: "Arial"; }@font-face { font-family: "Courier New"; }@font-face { font-family: "Wingdings"; }@font-face { font-family: "Cambria"; }p.MsoNormal, li.MsoNormal, div.MsoNormal { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoListParagraph, li.MsoListParagraph, div.MsoListParagraph { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoListParagraphCxSpFirst, li.MsoListParagraphCxSpFirst, div.MsoListParagraphCxSpFirst { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoListParagraphCxSpMiddle, li.MsoListParagraphCxSpMiddle, div.MsoListParagraphCxSpMiddle { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoListParagraphCxSpLast, li.MsoListParagraphCxSpLast, div.MsoListParagraphCxSpLast { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }div.Section1 { page: Section1; }ol { margin-bottom: 0cm; }ul { margin-bottom: 0cm; } Today’s telecom reference architectures should seamlessly integrate traditional legacy-based applications and transition to next-generation network technologies (e.g., IP multimedia subsystems). This has resulted in new requirements for flexible, real-time billing and OSS/BSS systems and implications on the service provider’s organizational requirements and structure.   Telecom reference architectures are today expected to:   ·       Integrate voice, messaging, email and other VAS over fixed and mobile networks, back end systems ·       Be able to provision multiple services and service bundles • Deliver converged voice, video and data services ·       Leverage the existing Network Infrastructure ·       Provide real-time, flexible billing and charging systems to handle complex promotions, discounts, and settlements with multiple parties. ·       Support charging of advanced data services such as VoIP, On-Demand, Services (e.g.  Video), IMS/SIP Services, Mobile Money, Content Services and IPTV. ·       Help in faster deployment of new services • Serve as an effective platform for collaboration between network IT and business organizations ·       Harness the potential of converging technology, networks, devices and content to develop multimedia services and solutions of ever-increasing sophistication on a single Internet Protocol (IP) ·       Ensure better service delivery and zero revenue leakage through real-time balance and credit management ·       Lower operating costs to drive profitability   Enterprise Reference Architecture   The Enterprise Reference Architecture (RA) fills the gap between the concepts and vocabulary defined by the reference model and the implementation. Reference architecture provides detailed architectural information in a common format such that solutions can be repeatedly designed and deployed in a consistent, high-quality, supportable fashion. This paper attempts to describe the Reference Architecture for the Telecom Application Usage and how to achieve the Enterprise Level Reference Architecture using SOA.   • Telecom Reference Architecture • Enterprise SOA based Reference Architecture   Telecom Reference Architecture   Tele Management Forum’s New Generation Operations Systems and Software (NGOSS) is an architectural framework for organizing, integrating, and implementing telecom systems. NGOSS is a component-based framework consisting of the following elements:   ·       The enhanced Telecom Operations Map (eTOM) is a business process framework. ·       The Shared Information Data (SID) model provides a comprehensive information framework that may be specialized for the needs of a particular organization. ·       The Telecom Application Map (TAM) is an application framework to depict the functional footprint of applications, relative to the horizontal processes within eTOM. ·       The Technology Neutral Architecture (TNA) is an integrated framework. TNA is an architecture that is sustainable through technology changes.   NGOSS Architecture Standards are:   ·       Centralized data ·       Loosely coupled distributed systems ·       Application components/re-use  ·       A technology-neutral system framework with technology specific implementations ·       Interoperability to service provider data/processes ·       Allows more re-use of business components across multiple business scenarios ·       Workflow automation   The traditional operator systems architecture consists of four layers,   ·       Business Support System (BSS) layer, with focus toward customers and business partners. Manages order, subscriber, pricing, rating, and billing information. ·       Operations Support System (OSS) layer, built around product, service, and resource inventories. ·       Networks layer – consists of Network elements and 3rd Party Systems. ·       Integration Layer – to maximize application communication and overall solution flexibility.   Reference architecture for telecom enterprises is depicted below. @font-face { font-family: "Arial"; }@font-face { font-family: "Courier New"; }@font-face { font-family: "Wingdings"; }@font-face { font-family: "Cambria"; }p.MsoNormal, li.MsoNormal, div.MsoNormal { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoCaption, li.MsoCaption, div.MsoCaption { margin: 0cm 0cm 10pt; font-size: 9pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-weight: bold; }p.MsoListParagraph, li.MsoListParagraph, div.MsoListParagraph { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoListParagraphCxSpFirst, li.MsoListParagraphCxSpFirst, div.MsoListParagraphCxSpFirst { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoListParagraphCxSpMiddle, li.MsoListParagraphCxSpMiddle, div.MsoListParagraphCxSpMiddle { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoListParagraphCxSpLast, li.MsoListParagraphCxSpLast, div.MsoListParagraphCxSpLast { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }div.Section1 { page: Section1; }ol { margin-bottom: 0cm; }ul { margin-bottom: 0cm; } Figure 2. Telecom Reference Architecture   The major building blocks of any Telecom Service Provider architecture are as follows:   1. Customer Relationship Management   CRM encompasses the end-to-end lifecycle of the customer: customer initiation/acquisition, sales, ordering, and service activation, customer care and support, proactive campaigns, cross sell/up sell, and retention/loyalty.   CRM also includes the collection of customer information and its application to personalize, customize, and integrate delivery of service to a customer, as well as to identify opportunities for increasing the value of the customer to the enterprise.   The key functionalities related to Customer Relationship Management are   ·       Manage the end-to-end lifecycle of a customer request for products. ·       Create and manage customer profiles. ·       Manage all interactions with customers – inquiries, requests, and responses. ·       Provide updates to Billing and other south bound systems on customer/account related updates such as customer/ account creation, deletion, modification, request bills, final bill, duplicate bills, credit limits through Middleware. ·       Work with Order Management System, Product, and Service Management components within CRM. ·       Manage customer preferences – Involve all the touch points and channels to the customer, including contact center, retail stores, dealers, self service, and field service, as well as via any media (phone, face to face, web, mobile device, chat, email, SMS, mail, the customer's bill, etc.). ·       Support single interface for customer contact details, preferences, account details, offers, customer premise equipment, bill details, bill cycle details, and customer interactions.   CRM applications interact with customers through customer touch points like portals, point-of-sale terminals, interactive voice response systems, etc. The requests by customers are sent via fulfillment/provisioning to billing system for ordering processing.   2. Billing and Revenue Management   Billing and Revenue Management handles the collection of appropriate usage records and production of timely and accurate bills – for providing pre-bill usage information and billing to customers; for processing their payments; and for performing payment collections. In addition, it handles customer inquiries about bills, provides billing inquiry status, and is responsible for resolving billing problems to the customer's satisfaction in a timely manner. This process grouping also supports prepayment for services.   The key functionalities provided by these applications are   ·       To ensure that enterprise revenue is billed and invoices delivered appropriately to customers. ·       To manage customers’ billing accounts, process their payments, perform payment collections, and monitor the status of the account balance. ·       To ensure the timely and effective fulfillment of all customer bill inquiries and complaints. ·       Collect the usage records from mediation and ensure appropriate rating and discounting of all usage and pricing. ·       Support revenue sharing; split charging where usage is guided to an account different from the service consumer. ·       Support prepaid and post-paid rating. ·       Send notification on approach / exceeding the usage thresholds as enforced by the subscribed offer, and / or as setup by the customer. ·       Support prepaid, post paid, and hybrid (where some services are prepaid and the rest of the services post paid) customers and conversion from post paid to prepaid, and vice versa. ·       Support different billing function requirements like charge prorating, promotion, discount, adjustment, waiver, write-off, account receivable, GL Interface, late payment fee, credit control, dunning, account or service suspension, re-activation, expiry, termination, contract violation penalty, etc. ·       Initiate direct debit to collect payment against an invoice outstanding. ·       Send notification to Middleware on different events; for example, payment receipt, pre-suspension, threshold exceed, etc.   Billing systems typically get usage data from mediation systems for rating and billing. They get provisioning requests from order management systems and inquiries from CRM systems. Convergent and real-time billing systems can directly get usage details from network elements.   3. Mediation   Mediation systems transform/translate the Raw or Native Usage Data Records into a general format that is acceptable to billing for their rating purposes.   The following lists the high-level roles and responsibilities executed by the Mediation system in the end-to-end solution.   ·       Collect Usage Data Records from different data sources – like network elements, routers, servers – via different protocol and interfaces. ·       Process Usage Data Records – Mediation will process Usage Data Records as per the source format. ·       Validate Usage Data Records from each source. ·       Segregates Usage Data Records coming from each source to multiple, based on the segregation requirement of end Application. ·       Aggregates Usage Data Records based on the aggregation rule if any from different sources. ·       Consolidates multiple Usage Data Records from each source. ·       Delivers formatted Usage Data Records to different end application like Billing, Interconnect, Fraud Management, etc. ·       Generates audit trail for incoming Usage Data Records and keeps track of all the Usage Data Records at various stages of mediation process. ·       Checks duplicate Usage Data Records across files for a given time window.   4. Fulfillment   This area is responsible for providing customers with their requested products in a timely and correct manner. It translates the customer's business or personal need into a solution that can be delivered using the specific products in the enterprise's portfolio. This process informs the customers of the status of their purchase order, and ensures completion on time, as well as ensuring a delighted customer. These processes are responsible for accepting and issuing orders. They deal with pre-order feasibility determination, credit authorization, order issuance, order status and tracking, customer update on customer order activities, and customer notification on order completion. Order management and provisioning applications fall into this category.   The key functionalities provided by these applications are   ·       Issuing new customer orders, modifying open customer orders, or canceling open customer orders; ·       Verifying whether specific non-standard offerings sought by customers are feasible and supportable; ·       Checking the credit worthiness of customers as part of the customer order process; ·       Testing the completed offering to ensure it is working correctly; ·       Updating of the Customer Inventory Database to reflect that the specific product offering has been allocated, modified, or cancelled; ·       Assigning and tracking customer provisioning activities; ·       Managing customer provisioning jeopardy conditions; and ·       Reporting progress on customer orders and other processes to customer.   These applications typically get orders from CRM systems. They interact with network elements and billing systems for fulfillment of orders.   5. Enterprise Management   This process area includes those processes that manage enterprise-wide activities and needs, or have application within the enterprise as a whole. They encompass all business management processes that   ·       Are necessary to support the whole of the enterprise, including processes for financial management, legal management, regulatory management, process, cost, and quality management, etc.;   ·       Are responsible for setting corporate policies, strategies, and directions, and for providing guidelines and targets for the whole of the business, including strategy development and planning for areas, such as Enterprise Architecture, that are integral to the direction and development of the business;   ·       Occur throughout the enterprise, including processes for project management, performance assessments, cost assessments, etc.     (i) Enterprise Risk Management:   Enterprise Risk Management focuses on assuring that risks and threats to the enterprise value and/or reputation are identified, and appropriate controls are in place to minimize or eliminate the identified risks. The identified risks may be physical or logical/virtual. Successful risk management ensures that the enterprise can support its mission critical operations, processes, applications, and communications in the face of serious incidents such as security threats/violations and fraud attempts. Two key areas covered in Risk Management by telecom operators are:   ·       Revenue Assurance: Revenue assurance system will be responsible for identifying revenue loss scenarios across components/systems, and will help in rectifying the problems. The following lists the high-level roles and responsibilities executed by the Revenue Assurance system in the end-to-end solution. o   Identify all usage information dropped when networks are being upgraded. o   Interconnect bill verification. o   Identify where services are routinely provisioned but never billed. o   Identify poor sales policies that are intensifying collections problems. o   Find leakage where usage is sent to error bucket and never billed for. o   Find leakage where field service, CRM, and network build-out are not optimized.   ·       Fraud Management: Involves collecting data from different systems to identify abnormalities in traffic patterns, usage patterns, and subscription patterns to report suspicious activity that might suggest fraudulent usage of resources, resulting in revenue losses to the operator.   The key roles and responsibilities of the system component are as follows:   o   Fraud management system will capture and monitor high usage (over a certain threshold) in terms of duration, value, and number of calls for each subscriber. The threshold for each subscriber is decided by the system and fixed automatically. o   Fraud management will be able to detect the unauthorized access to services for certain subscribers. These subscribers may have been provided unauthorized services by employees. The component will raise the alert to the operator the very first time of such illegal calls or calls which are not billed. o   The solution will be to have an alarm management system that will deliver alarms to the operator/provider whenever it detects a fraud, thus minimizing fraud by catching it the first time it occurs. o   The Fraud Management system will be capable of interfacing with switches, mediation systems, and billing systems   (ii) Knowledge Management   This process focuses on knowledge management, technology research within the enterprise, and the evaluation of potential technology acquisitions.   Key responsibilities of knowledge base management are to   ·       Maintain knowledge base – Creation and updating of knowledge base on ongoing basis. ·       Search knowledge base – Search of knowledge base on keywords or category browse ·       Maintain metadata – Management of metadata on knowledge base to ensure effective management and search. ·       Run report generator. ·       Provide content – Add content to the knowledge base, e.g., user guides, operational manual, etc.   (iii) Document Management   It focuses on maintaining a repository of all electronic documents or images of paper documents relevant to the enterprise using a system.   (iv) Data Management   It manages data as a valuable resource for any enterprise. For telecom enterprises, the typical areas covered are Master Data Management, Data Warehousing, and Business Intelligence. It is also responsible for data governance, security, quality, and database management.   Key responsibilities of Data Management are   ·       Using ETL, extract the data from CRM, Billing, web content, ERP, campaign management, financial, network operations, asset management info, customer contact data, customer measures, benchmarks, process data, e.g., process inputs, outputs, and measures, into Enterprise Data Warehouse. ·       Management of data traceability with source, data related business rules/decisions, data quality, data cleansing data reconciliation, competitors data – storage for all the enterprise data (customer profiles, products, offers, revenues, etc.) ·       Get online update through night time replication or physical backup process at regular frequency. ·       Provide the data access to business intelligence and other systems for their analysis, report generation, and use.   (v) Business Intelligence   It uses the Enterprise Data to provide the various analysis and reports that contain prospects and analytics for customer retention, acquisition of new customers due to the offers, and SLAs. It will generate right and optimized plans – bolt-ons for the customers.   The following lists the high-level roles and responsibilities executed by the Business Intelligence system at the Enterprise Level:   ·       It will do Pattern analysis and reports problem. ·       It will do Data Analysis – Statistical analysis, data profiling, affinity analysis of data, customer segment wise usage patterns on offers, products, service and revenue generation against services and customer segments. ·       It will do Performance (business, system, and forecast) analysis, churn propensity, response time, and SLAs analysis. ·       It will support for online and offline analysis, and report drill down capability. ·       It will collect, store, and report various SLA data. ·       It will provide the necessary intelligence for marketing and working on campaigns, etc., with cost benefit analysis and predictions.   It will advise on customer promotions with additional services based on loyalty and credit history of customer   ·       It will Interface with Enterprise Data Management system for data to run reports and analysis tasks. It will interface with the campaign schedules, based on historical success evidence.   (vi) Stakeholder and External Relations Management   It manages the enterprise's relationship with stakeholders and outside entities. Stakeholders include shareholders, employee organizations, etc. Outside entities include regulators, local community, and unions. Some of the processes within this grouping are Shareholder Relations, External Affairs, Labor Relations, and Public Relations.   (vii) Enterprise Resource Planning   It is used to manage internal and external resources, including tangible assets, financial resources, materials, and human resources. Its purpose is to facilitate the flow of information between all business functions inside the boundaries of the enterprise and manage the connections to outside stakeholders. ERP systems consolidate all business operations into a uniform and enterprise wide system environment.   The key roles and responsibilities for Enterprise System are given below:   ·        It will handle responsibilities such as core accounting, financial, and management reporting. ·       It will interface with CRM for capturing customer account and details. ·       It will interface with billing to capture the billing revenue and other financial data. ·       It will be responsible for executing the dunning process. Billing will send the required feed to ERP for execution of dunning. ·       It will interface with the CRM and Billing through batch interfaces. Enterprise management systems are like horizontals in the enterprise and typically interact with all major telecom systems. E.g., an ERP system interacts with CRM, Fulfillment, and Billing systems for different kinds of data exchanges.   6. External Interfaces/Touch Points   The typical external parties are customers, suppliers/partners, employees, shareholders, and other stakeholders. External interactions from/to a Service Provider to other parties can be achieved by a variety of mechanisms, including:   ·       Exchange of emails or faxes ·       Call Centers ·       Web Portals ·       Business-to-Business (B2B) automated transactions   These applications provide an Internet technology driven interface to external parties to undertake a variety of business functions directly for themselves. These can provide fully or partially automated service to external parties through various touch points.   Typical characteristics of these touch points are   ·       Pre-integrated self-service system, including stand-alone web framework or integration front end with a portal engine ·       Self services layer exposing atomic web services/APIs for reuse by multiple systems across the architectural environment ·       Portlets driven connectivity exposing data and services interoperability through a portal engine or web application   These touch points mostly interact with the CRM systems for requests, inquiries, and responses.   7. Middleware   The component will be primarily responsible for integrating the different systems components under a common platform. It should provide a Standards-Based Platform for building Service Oriented Architecture and Composite Applications. The following lists the high-level roles and responsibilities executed by the Middleware component in the end-to-end solution.   ·       As an integration framework, covering to and fro interfaces ·       Provide a web service framework with service registry. ·       Support SOA framework with SOA service registry. ·       Each of the interfaces from / to Middleware to other components would handle data transformation, translation, and mapping of data points. ·       Receive data from the caller / activate and/or forward the data to the recipient system in XML format. ·       Use standard XML for data exchange. ·       Provide the response back to the service/call initiator. ·       Provide a tracking until the response completion. ·       Keep a store transitional data against each call/transaction. ·       Interface through Middleware to get any information that is possible and allowed from the existing systems to enterprise systems; e.g., customer profile and customer history, etc. ·       Provide the data in a common unified format to the SOA calls across systems, and follow the Enterprise Architecture directive. ·       Provide an audit trail for all transactions being handled by the component.   8. Network Elements   The term Network Element means a facility or equipment used in the provision of a telecommunications service. Such terms also includes features, functions, and capabilities that are provided by means of such facility or equipment, including subscriber numbers, databases, signaling systems, and information sufficient for billing and collection or used in the transmission, routing, or other provision of a telecommunications service.   Typical network elements in a GSM network are Home Location Register (HLR), Intelligent Network (IN), Mobile Switching Center (MSC), SMS Center (SMSC), and network elements for other value added services like Push-to-talk (PTT), Ring Back Tone (RBT), etc.   Network elements are invoked when subscribers use their telecom devices for any kind of usage. These elements generate usage data and pass it on to downstream systems like mediation and billing system for rating and billing. They also integrate with provisioning systems for order/service fulfillment.   9. 3rd Party Applications   3rd Party systems are applications like content providers, payment gateways, point of sale terminals, and databases/applications maintained by the Government.   Depending on applicability and the type of functionality provided by 3rd party applications, the integration with different telecom systems like CRM, provisioning, and billing will be done.   10. Service Delivery Platform   A service delivery platform (SDP) provides the architecture for the rapid deployment, provisioning, execution, management, and billing of value added telecom services. SDPs are based on the concept of SOA and layered architecture. They support the delivery of voice, data services, and content in network and device-independent fashion. They allow application developers to aggregate network capabilities, services, and sources of content. SDPs typically contain layers for web services exposure, service application development, and network abstraction.   SOA Reference Architecture   SOA concept is based on the principle of developing reusable business service and building applications by composing those services, instead of building monolithic applications in silos. It’s about bridging the gap between business and IT through a set of business-aligned IT services, using a set of design principles, patterns, and techniques.   In an SOA, resources are made available to participants in a value net, enterprise, line of business (typically spanning multiple applications within an enterprise or across multiple enterprises). It consists of a set of business-aligned IT services that collectively fulfill an organization’s business processes and goals. We can choreograph these services into composite applications and invoke them through standard protocols. SOA, apart from agility and reusability, enables:   ·       The business to specify processes as orchestrations of reusable services ·       Technology agnostic business design, with technology hidden behind service interface ·       A contractual-like interaction between business and IT, based on service SLAs ·       Accountability and governance, better aligned to business services ·       Applications interconnections untangling by allowing access only through service interfaces, reducing the daunting side effects of change ·       Reduced pressure to replace legacy and extended lifetime for legacy applications, through encapsulation in services   ·       A Cloud Computing paradigm, using web services technologies, that makes possible service outsourcing on an on-demand, utility-like, pay-per-usage basis   The following section represents the Reference Architecture of logical view for the Telecom Solution. The new custom built application needs to align with this logical architecture in the long run to achieve EA benefits.   Packaged implementation applications, such as ERP billing applications, need to expose their functions as service providers (as other applications consume) and interact with other applications as service consumers.   COT applications need to expose services through wrappers such as adapters to utilize existing resources and at the same time achieve Enterprise Architecture goal and objectives.   The following are the various layers for Enterprise level deployment of SOA. This diagram captures the abstract view of Enterprise SOA layers and important components of each layer. Layered architecture means decomposition of services such that most interactions occur between adjacent layers. However, there is no strict rule that top layers should not directly communicate with bottom layers.   The diagram below represents the important logical pieces that would result from overall SOA transformation. @font-face { font-family: "Arial"; }@font-face { font-family: "Courier New"; }@font-face { font-family: "Wingdings"; }@font-face { font-family: "Cambria"; }p.MsoNormal, li.MsoNormal, div.MsoNormal { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoCaption, li.MsoCaption, div.MsoCaption { margin: 0cm 0cm 10pt; font-size: 9pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-weight: bold; }p.MsoListParagraph, li.MsoListParagraph, div.MsoListParagraph { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoListParagraphCxSpFirst, li.MsoListParagraphCxSpFirst, div.MsoListParagraphCxSpFirst { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoListParagraphCxSpMiddle, li.MsoListParagraphCxSpMiddle, div.MsoListParagraphCxSpMiddle { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoListParagraphCxSpLast, li.MsoListParagraphCxSpLast, div.MsoListParagraphCxSpLast { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }div.Section1 { page: Section1; }ol { margin-bottom: 0cm; }ul { margin-bottom: 0cm; } Figure 3. Enterprise SOA Reference Architecture 1.          Operational System Layer: This layer consists of all packaged applications like CRM, ERP, custom built applications, COTS based applications like Billing, Revenue Management, Fulfilment, and the Enterprise databases that are essential and contribute directly or indirectly to the Enterprise OSS/BSS Transformation.   ERP holds the data of Asset Lifecycle Management, Supply Chain, and Advanced Procurement and Human Capital Management, etc.   CRM holds the data related to Order, Sales, and Marketing, Customer Care, Partner Relationship Management, Loyalty, etc.   Content Management handles Enterprise Search and Query. Billing application consists of the following components:   ·       Collections Management, Customer Billing Management, Invoices, Real-Time Rating, Discounting, and Applying of Charges ·       Enterprise databases will hold both the application and service data, whether structured or unstructured.   MDM - Master data majorly consists of Customer, Order, Product, and Service Data.     2.          Enterprise Component Layer:   This layer consists of the Application Services and Common Services that are responsible for realizing the functionality and maintaining the QoS of the exposed services. This layer uses container-based technologies such as application servers to implement the components, workload management, high availability, and load balancing.   Application Services: This Service Layer enables application, technology, and database abstraction so that the complex accessing logic is hidden from the other service layers. This is a basic service layer, which exposes application functionalities and data as reusable services. The three types of the Application access services are:   ·       Application Access Service: This Service Layer exposes application level functionalities as a reusable service between BSS to BSS and BSS to OSS integration. This layer is enabled using disparate technology such as Web Service, Integration Servers, and Adaptors, etc.   ·       Data Access Service: This Service Layer exposes application data services as a reusable reference data service. This is done via direct interaction with application data. and provides the federated query.   ·       Network Access Service: This Service Layer exposes provisioning layer as a reusable service from OSS to OSS integration. This integration service emphasizes the need for high performance, stateless process flows, and distributed design.   Common Services encompasses management of structured, semi-structured, and unstructured data such as information services, portal services, interaction services, infrastructure services, and security services, etc.   3.          Integration Layer:   This consists of service infrastructure components like service bus, service gateway for partner integration, service registry, service repository, and BPEL processor. Service bus will carry the service invocation payloads/messages between consumers and providers. The other important functions expected from it are itinerary based routing, distributed caching of routing information, transformations, and all qualities of service for messaging-like reliability, scalability, and availability, etc. Service registry will hold all contracts (wsdl) of services, and it helps developers to locate or discover service during design time or runtime.   • BPEL processor would be useful in orchestrating the services to compose a complex business scenario or process. • Workflow and business rules management are also required to support manual triggering of certain activities within business process. based on the rules setup and also the state machine information. Application, data, and service mediation layer typically forms the overall composite application development framework or SOA Framework.   4.          Business Process Layer: These are typically the intermediate services layer and represent Shared Business Process Services. At Enterprise Level, these services are from Customer Management, Order Management, Billing, Finance, and Asset Management application domains.   5.          Access Layer: This layer consists of portals for Enterprise and provides a single view of Enterprise information management and dashboard services.   6.          Channel Layer: This consists of various devices; applications that form part of extended enterprise; browsers through which users access the applications.   7.          Client Layer: This designates the different types of users accessing the enterprise applications. The type of user typically would be an important factor in determining the level of access to applications.   8.          Vertical pieces like management, monitoring, security, and development cut across all horizontal layers Management and monitoring involves all aspects of SOA-like services, SLAs, and other QoS lifecycle processes for both applications and services surrounding SOA governance.     9.          EA Governance, Reference Architecture, Roadmap, Principles, and Best Practices:   EA Governance is important in terms of providing the overall direction to SOA implementation within the enterprise. This involves board-level involvement, in addition to business and IT executives. At a high level, this involves managing the SOA projects implementation, managing SOA infrastructure, and controlling the entire effort through all fine-tuned IT processes in accordance with COBIT (Control Objectives for Information Technology).   Devising tools and techniques to promote reuse culture, and the SOA way of doing things needs competency centers to be established in addition to training the workforce to take up new roles that are suited to SOA journey.   Conclusions   Reference Architectures can serve as the basis for disparate architecture efforts throughout the organization, even if they use different tools and technologies. Reference architectures provide best practices and approaches in the independent way a vendor deals with technology and standards. Reference Architectures model the abstract architectural elements for an enterprise independent of the technologies, protocols, and products that are used to implement an SOA. Telecom enterprises today are facing significant business and technology challenges due to growing competition, a multitude of services, and convergence. Adopting architectural best practices could go a long way in meeting these challenges. The use of SOA-based architecture for communication to each of the external systems like Billing, CRM, etc., in OSS/BSS system has made the architecture very loosely coupled, with greater flexibility. Any change in the external systems would be absorbed at the Integration Layer without affecting the rest of the ecosystem. The use of a Business Process Management (BPM) tool makes the management and maintenance of the business processes easy, with better performance in terms of lead time, quality, and cost. Since the Architecture is based on standards, it will lower the cost of deploying and managing OSS/BSS applications over their lifecycles.

    Read the article

  • Re: Help with Boost Grammar

    - by Decmac04
    I have redesigned and extended the grammar I asked about earlier as shown below: // BIFAnalyser.cpp : Defines the entry point for the console application. // // /*============================================================================= Copyright (c) Temitope Jos Onunkun 2010 http://www.dcs.kcl.ac.uk/pg/onun/ Use, modification and distribution is subject to the Boost Software License, Version 1.0. (See accompanying file LICENSE_1_0.txt or copy at http://www.boost.org/LICENSE_1_0.txt) =============================================================================*/ //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// // // // B Machine parser using the Boost "Grammar" and "Semantic Actions". // // // //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// include include include include include include //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// using namespace std; using namespace boost::spirit; //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// // // Semantic Actions // //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// // // namespace { //semantic action function on individual lexeme void do_noint(char const* start, char const* end) { string str(start, end); if (str != "NAT1") cout << "PUSH(" << str << ')' << endl; } //semantic action function on addition of lexemes void do_add(char const*, char const*) { cout << "ADD" << endl; // for(vector::iterator vi = strVect.begin(); vi < strVect.end(); ++vi) // cout << *vi << " "; } //semantic action function on subtraction of lexemes void do_subt(char const*, char const*) { cout << "SUBTRACT" << endl; } //semantic action function on multiplication of lexemes void do_mult(char const*, char const*) { cout << "\nMULTIPLY" << endl; } //semantic action function on division of lexemes void do_div(char const*, char const*) { cout << "\nDIVIDE" << endl; } // // vector flowTable; //semantic action function on simple substitution void do_sSubst(char const* start, char const* end) { string str(start, end); //use boost tokenizer to break down tokens typedef boost::tokenizer Tokenizer; boost::char_separator sep(" -+/*:=()",0,boost::drop_empty_tokens); // char separator definition Tokenizer tok(str, sep); Tokenizer::iterator tok_iter = tok.begin(); pair dependency; //create a pair object for dependencies //create a vector object to store all tokens vector dx; // int counter = 0; // tracks token position for(tok.begin(); tok_iter != tok.end(); ++tok_iter) //save all tokens in vector { dx.push_back(*tok_iter ); } counter = dx.size(); // vector d_hat; //stores set of dependency pairs string dep; //pairs variables as string object // dependency.first = *tok.begin(); vector FV; for(int unsigned i=1; i < dx.size(); i++) { // if(!atoi(dx.at(i).c_str()) && (dx.at(i) !=" ")) { dependency.second = dx.at(i); dep = dependency.first + "|-" + dependency.second + " "; d_hat.push_back(dep); vector<string> row; row.push_back(dependency.first); //push x_hat into first column of each row for(unsigned int j=0; j<2; j++) { row.push_back(dependency.second);//push an element (column) into the row } flowTable.push_back(row); //Add the row to the main vector } } //displays internal representation of information flow table cout << "\n****************\nDependency Table\n****************\n"; cout << "X_Hat\tDx\tG_Hat\n"; cout << "-----------------------------\n"; for(unsigned int i=0; i < flowTable.size(); i++) { for(unsigned int j=0; j<2; j++) { cout << flowTable[i][j] << "\t "; } if (*tok.begin() != "WHILE" ) //if there are no global flows, cout << "\t{}"; //display empty set cout << "\n"; } cout << "***************\n\n"; for(int unsigned j=0; j < FV.size(); j++) { if(FV.at(j) != dependency.second) dep = dependency.first + "|-" + dependency.second + " "; d_hat.push_back(dep); } cout << "PUSH(" << str << ')' << endl; cout << "\n*******\nDependency pairs\n*******\n"; for(int unsigned i=0; i < d_hat.size(); i++) cout << d_hat.at(i) << "\n...\n"; cout << "\nSIMPLE SUBSTITUTION\n\n"; } //semantic action function on multiple substitution void do_mSubst(char const* start, char const* end) { string str(start, end); cout << "PUSH(" << str << ')' << endl; //cout << "\nMULTIPLE SUBSTITUTION\n\n"; } //semantic action function on unbounded choice substitution void do_mChoice(char const* start, char const* end) { string str(start, end); cout << "PUSH(" << str << ')' << endl; cout << "\nUNBOUNDED CHOICE SUBSTITUTION\n\n"; } void do_logicExpr(char const* start, char const* end) { string str(start, end); //use boost tokenizer to break down tokens typedef boost::tokenizer Tokenizer; boost::char_separator sep(" -+/*=:()<",0,boost::drop_empty_tokens); // char separator definition Tokenizer tok(str, sep); Tokenizer::iterator tok_iter = tok.begin(); //pair dependency; //create a pair object for dependencies //create a vector object to store all tokens vector dx; for(tok.begin(); tok_iter != tok.end(); ++tok_iter) //save all tokens in vector { dx.push_back(*tok_iter ); } for(unsigned int i=0; i cout << "PUSH(" << str << ')' << endl; cout << "\nPREDICATE\n\n"; } void do_predicate(char const* start, char const* end) { string str(start, end); cout << "PUSH(" << str << ')' << endl; cout << "\nMULTIPLE PREDICATE\n\n"; } void do_ifSelectPre(char const* start, char const* end) { string str(start, end); //if cout << "PUSH(" << str << ')' << endl; cout << "\nPROTECTED SUBSTITUTION\n\n"; } //semantic action function on machine substitution void do_machSubst(char const* start, char const* end) { string str(start, end); cout << "PUSH(" << str << ')' << endl; cout << "\nMACHINE SUBSTITUTION\n\n"; } } //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// // // Machine Substitution Grammar // //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// // Simple substitution grammar parser with integer values removed struct Substitution : public grammar { template struct definition { definition(Substitution const& ) { machine_subst = ( (simple_subst) | (multi_subst) | (if_select_pre_subst) | (unbounded_choice) )[&do_machSubst] ; unbounded_choice = str_p("ANY") ide_list str_p("WHERE") predicate str_p("THEN") machine_subst str_p("END") ; if_select_pre_subst = ( ( str_p("IF") predicate str_p("THEN") machine_subst *( str_p("ELSIF") predicate machine_subst ) !( str_p("ELSE") machine_subst) str_p("END") ) | ( str_p("SELECT") predicate str_p("THEN") machine_subst *( str_p("WHEN") predicate machine_subst ) !( str_p("ELSE") machine_subst) str_p("END")) | ( str_p("PRE") predicate str_p("THEN") machine_subst str_p("END") ) )[&do_ifSelectPre] ; multi_subst = ( (machine_subst) *( ( str_p("||") (machine_subst) ) | ( str_p("[]") (machine_subst) ) ) ) [&do_mSubst] ; simple_subst = (identifier str_p(":=") arith_expr) [&do_sSubst] ; expression = predicate | arith_expr ; predicate = ( (logic_expr) *( ( ch_p('&') (logic_expr) ) | ( str_p("OR") (logic_expr) ) ) )[&do_predicate] ; logic_expr = ( identifier (str_p("<") arith_expr) | (str_p("<") arith_expr) | (str_p("/:") arith_expr) | (str_p("<:") arith_expr) | (str_p("/<:") arith_expr) | (str_p("<<:") arith_expr) | (str_p("/<<:") arith_expr) | (str_p("<=") arith_expr) | (str_p("=") arith_expr) | (str_p("=") arith_expr) | (str_p("=") arith_expr) ) [&do_logicExpr] ; arith_expr = term *( ('+' term)[&do_add] | ('-' term)[&do_subt] ) ; term = factor ( ('' factor)[&do_mult] | ('/' factor)[&do_div] ) ; factor = lexeme_d[( identifier | +digit_p)[&do_noint]] | '(' expression ')' | ('+' factor) ; ide_list = identifier *( ch_p(',') identifier ) ; identifier = alpha_p +( alnum_p | ch_p('_') ) ; } rule machine_subst, unbounded_choice, if_select_pre_subst, multi_subst, simple_subst, expression, predicate, logic_expr, arith_expr, term, factor, ide_list, identifier; rule<ScannerT> const& start() const { return predicate; //return multi_subst; //return machine_subst; } }; }; //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// // // Main program // //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// int main() { cout << "*********************************\n\n"; cout << "\t\t...Machine Parser...\n\n"; cout << "*********************************\n\n"; // cout << "Type an expression...or [q or Q] to quit\n\n"; string str; int machineCount = 0; char strFilename[256]; //file name store as a string object do { cout << "Please enter a filename...or [q or Q] to quit:\n\n "; //prompt for file name to be input //char strFilename[256]; //file name store as a string object cin strFilename; if(*strFilename == 'q' || *strFilename == 'Q') //termination condition return 0; ifstream inFile(strFilename); // opens file object for reading //output file for truncated machine (operations only) if (inFile.fail()) cerr << "\nUnable to open file for reading.\n" << endl; inFile.unsetf(std::ios::skipws); Substitution elementary_subst; // Simple substitution parser object string next; while (inFile str) { getline(inFile, next); str += next; if (str.empty() || str[0] == 'q' || str[0] == 'Q') break; parse_info< info = parse(str.c_str(), elementary_subst !end_p, space_p); if (info.full) { cout << "\n-------------------------\n"; cout << "Parsing succeeded\n"; cout << "\n-------------------------\n"; } else { cout << "\n-------------------------\n"; cout << "Parsing failed\n"; cout << "stopped at: " << info.stop << "\"\n"; cout << "\n-------------------------\n"; } } } while ( (*strFilename != 'q' || *strFilename !='Q')); return 0; } However, I am experiencing the following unexpected behaviours on testing: The text files I used are: f1.txt, ... containing ...: debt:=(LoanRequest+outstandingLoan1)*20 . f2.txt, ... containing ...: debt:=(LoanRequest+outstandingLoan1)*20 || newDebt := loanammount-paidammount || price := purchasePrice + overhead + bb . f3.txt, ... containing ...: yy < (xx+7+ww) . f4.txt, ... containing ...: yy < (xx+7+ww) & yy : NAT . When I use multi_subst as start rule both files (f1 and f2) are parsed correctly; When I use machine_subst as start rule file f1 parse correctly, while file f2 fails, producing the error: “Parsing failed stopped at: || newDebt := loanammount-paidammount || price := purchasePrice + overhead + bb” When I use predicate as start symbol, file f3 parse correctly, but file f4 yields the error: “ “Parsing failed stopped at: & yy : NAT” Can anyone help with the grammar, please? It appears there are problems with the grammar that I have so far been unable to spot.

    Read the article

  • client problems - misaligned expectations & not following SDLC protocols

    - by louism
    hi guys, im having some serious problems with a client on a project - i could use some advice please the short version i have been working with this client now for almost 6 months without any problems (a classified website project in the range of 500 hours) over the last few days things have drastically deteriorated to the point where ive had to place the project on-hold whilst i work-out what to do (this has pissed the client off even more) to be simplistic, the root cause of the issue is this: the client doesnt read the specs i make for him, i code the feature, he than wants to change things, i tell him its not to the agreed spec and that that change will have to be postponed and possibly charged for, he gets upset and rants saying 'hes paid for the feature' and im not keeping to the agreement (<- misalignment of expectations) i think the root cause of the root cause is my clients failure to take my SDLC protocols seriously. i have a bug tracking system in place which he practically refuses to use (he still emails me bugs), he doesnt seem to care to much for the protocols i use for dealing with scope creep and change control the whole situation came to a head recently where he 'cracked it' (an aussie term for being fed-up). the more terms like 'postponed for post-launch implementation', 'costed feature addition', and 'not to agreed spec' i kept using, the worse it got finally, he began to bully me - basically insisting i shut-up and do the work im being paid for. i wrote a long-winded email explaining how wrong he was on all these different points, and explaining what all the SDLC protocols do to protect the success of the project. than i deleted that email and wrote a new one in the new email, i suggested as a solution i write up a list of grievances we both had. we than review the list and compromise on different points: he gets some things he wants, i get some things i want. sometimes youve got to give ground to get ground his response to this suggestion was flat-out refusal, and a restatement that i should just get on with the work ive been paid to do so there you have the very subjective short version. if you have the time and inclination, the long version may be a little less bias as it has the email communiques between me and my client the long version (with background) the long version works by me showing you the email communiques which lead to the situation coming to a head. so here it is, judge for yourself where the trouble started... 1. client asked me why something was missing from a feature i just uploaded, my response was to show him what was in the spec: it basically said the item he was looking for was never going to be included 2. [clients response...] Memo Louis, We are following your own title fields and keeping a consistent layout. Why the big fuss about not adding "Part". It simply replaces "model" and is consistent with your current title fields. 3. [my response...] hi [client], the 'part' field appeared to me as a redundancy / mistake. i requested clarification but never received any in a timely manner (about 2 weeks ago) the specification for this feature also indicated it wasnt going to be included: RE: "Why the big fuss about not adding "Part" " it may not appear so, but it would actually be a lot of work for me to now add a 'Part' field it could take me up to 15-20 minutes to properly explain why its such a big undertaking to do this, but i would prefer to use that time instead to work on completing your v1.1 features as a simplistic explanation - it connects to the change in paradigm from a 'generic classified ad' model to a 'specific attributes for specific categories' model basically, i am saying it is a big fuss, but i understand that it doesnt look that way - after all, it is just one ity-bitty field :) if you require a fuller explanation, please let me know and i will commit the time needed to write that out also, if you recall when we first started on the project, i said that with the effort/time required for features, you would likely not know off the top of your head. you may think something is really complex, but in reality its quite simple, you might think something is easy - but it could actually be a massive trauma to code (which is the case here with the 'Part' field). if you also recalled, i said the best course of action is to just ask, and i would let you know on a case-by-case basis 4. [email from me to client...] hi [client], the online catalogue page is now up live (see my email from a few days ago for information on how it works) note: the window of opportunity for input/revisions on what data the catalogue stores has now closed (as i have put the code up live now) RE: the UI/layout of the online catalogue page you may still do visual/ui tweaks to the page at the moment (this window for input/revisions will close in a couple of days time) 5. [email from client to me...] *(note: i had put up the feature & asked the client to review it, never heard back from them for a few days)* Memo Louis, Here you go again. CLOSED without a word of input from the customer. I don't think so. I will reply tomorrow regarding the content and functionality we require from this feature. 5. [from me to client...] hi [client]: RE: from my understanding, you are saying that the mini-sale yard control would change itself based on the fact someone was viewing for parts & accessories <- is that correct? this change is outside the scope of the v1.1 mini-spec and therefore will need to wait 'til post launch for costing/implementation 6. [email from client to me...] Memo Louis, Following your v1.1 mini-spec and all your time paid in full for the work selected. We need to make the situation clear. There will be no further items held for post-launch. Do not expect us to pay for any further items other than those we have agreed upon. You have undertaken to complete the Parts and accessories feature as follows. Obviously, as part of this process the "mini search" will be effected, and will require "adaption to make sense". 7. [email from me to client...] hi [client], RE: "There will be no further items held for post-launch. Do not expect us to pay for any further items other than those we have agreed upon." a few points to consider: 1) the specification for the 'parts & accessories' feature was as follows: (i.e. [what] "...we have agreed upon.") 2) you have received the 'parts & accessories' feature free of charge (you have paid $0 for it). ive spent two days coding that feature as a gesture of good will i would request that you please consider these two facts carefully and sincerely 8. [email from client to me...] Memo Louis, I don't see how you are giving us anything for free. From your original fee proposal you have deleted more than 30 hours of included features. Your title "shelved features". Further you have charged us twice by adding back into the site, at an addition cost, some of those "shelved features" features. See v1.1 mini-spec. Did include in your original fee proposal a change request budget but then charge without discussion items included in v1.1 mini-spec. Included a further Features test plan for a regression test, a fee of 10 hours that would not have been required if the "shelved features" were not left out of the agreed fee proposal. I have made every attempt to satisfy your your uneven business sense by offering you everything your heart desired, in the v1.1 mini-spec, to be left once again with your attitude of "its too hard, lets leave it for post launch". I am no longer accepting anything less than what we have contracted you to do. That is clearly defined in v1.1 mini-spec, and you are paid in advance for delivering those items as an acceptable function. a few notes about the above email... i had to cull features from the original spec because it didnt fit into the budget. i explained this to the client at the start of the project (he wanted more features than he had budget hours to do them all) nothing has been charged for twice, i didnt charge the client for culled features. im charging him to now do those culled features the draft version of the project schedule included a change request budget of 10 hours, but i had to remove that to meet the budget (the client may not have been aware of this to be fair to them) what the client refers to as my attitude of 'too hard/leave it for post-launch', i called a change request protocol and a method for keeping scope creep under control 9. [email from me to client...] hi [client], RE: "...all your grievances..." i had originally written out a long email response; it was fantastic, it had all these great points of how 'you were wrong' and 'i was right', you would of loved it (and by 'loved it', i mean it would of just infuriated you more) so, i decided to deleted it start over, for two reasons: 1) a long email is being disrespectful of your time (youre a busy businessman with things to do) 2) whos wrong or right gets us no closer to fixing the problems we are experiencing what i propose is this... i prepare a bullet point list of your grievances and my grievances (yes, im unhappy too about how things are going - and it has little to do with money) i submit this list to you for you to add to as necessary we then both take a good hard look at this list, and we decide which areas we are willing to give ground on as an example, the list may look something like this: "louis, you keep taking away features you said you would do" [your grievance 2] [your grievance 3] [your grievance ...] "[client], i feel you dont properly read the specs i prepare for you..." [my grievance 2] [my grievance 3] [my grievance ...] if you are willing to give this a try, let me know will it work? who knows. but if it doesnt, we can always go back to arguing some more :) obviously, this will only work if you are willing to give it a genuine try, and you can accept that you may have to 'give some ground to get some ground' what do you think? 10. [email from client to me ...] Memo Louis, Instead of wasting your time listing grievances, I would prefer you complete the items in v1.1 mini-spec, to a satisfactory conclusion. We almost had the website ready for launch until you brought the v1.1 mini-spec into the frame. Obviously I expected you could complete the v1.1 mini-spec in a two-week time frame as you indicated and give the site a more profession presentation. Most of the problems have been caused by you not following our instructions, but deciding to do what you feel like at the time. And then arguing with us how the missing information is not necessary. For instance "Parts and Accessories". Why on earth would you leave out the parts heading, when it ties-in with the fields you have already developed. It replaces "model" and is just as important in the context of information that appears in the "Details" panel. We are at a stage where the the v1.1 mini-spec needs to be completed without further time wasting and the site is complete (subject to all features working). We are on standby at this end to do just that. Let me know when you are back, working on the site and we will process and complete each v1.1 mini-spec, item by item, until the job is complete. 11. [last email from me to client...] hi [client], based on this reply, and your demonstrated unwillingness to compromise/give any ground on issues at hand, i have decided to place your project on-hold for the moment i will be considering further options on how to over-come our challenges over the next few days i will contact you by monday 17/may to discuss any new options i have come up with, and if i believe it is appropriate to restart work on your project at that point or not told you it was long... what do you think?

    Read the article

  • Help with Boost Grammar

    - by Decmanc04
    I have been using the following win32 console code to try to parse a B Machine Grammar embedded within C++ using Boost Spirit grammar template. I am a relatively new Boost user. The code compiles, but when I run the .exe file produced by VC++2008, the program partially parses the input file. I believe the problem is with my grammar definition or the functions attached as semantic atctions. The code is given below: // BIFAnalyser.cpp : Defines the entry point for the console application. // // /*============================================================================= Copyright (c) Temitope Jos Onunkun 2010 http://www.dcs.kcl.ac.uk/pg/onun/ Use, modification and distribution is subject to the Boost Software License, Version 1.0. (See accompanying file LICENSE_1_0.txt or copy at http://www.boost.org/LICENSE_1_0.txt) =============================================================================*/ //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// // // // B Machine parser using the Boost "Grammar" and "Semantic Actions". // // // //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// #include <boost/spirit/core.hpp> #include <boost/tokenizer.hpp> #include <iostream> #include <string> #include <fstream> #include <vector> #include <utility> /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// using namespace std; using namespace boost::spirit; /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// // // Semantic actions // //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// vector<string> strVect; namespace { //semantic action function on individual lexeme void do_noint(char const* str, char const* end) { string s(str, end); if(atoi(str)) { ; } else { strVect.push_back(s); cout << "PUSH(" << s << ')' << endl; } } //semantic action function on addition of lexemes void do_add(char const*, char const*) { cout << "ADD" << endl; for(vector<string>::iterator vi = strVect.begin(); vi < strVect.end(); ++vi) cout << *vi << " "; } //semantic action function on subtraction of lexemes void do_subt(char const*, char const*) { cout << "SUBTRACT" << endl; for(vector<string>::iterator vi = strVect.begin(); vi < strVect.end(); ++vi) cout << *vi << " "; } //semantic action function on multiplication of lexemes void do_mult(char const*, char const*) { cout << "\nMULTIPLY" << endl; for(vector<string>::iterator vi = strVect.begin(); vi < strVect.end(); ++vi) cout << *vi << " "; cout << "\n"; } //semantic action function on division of lexemes void do_div(char const*, char const*) { cout << "\nDIVIDE" << endl; for(vector<string>::iterator vi = strVect.begin(); vi < strVect.end(); ++vi) cout << *vi << " "; } //semantic action function on simple substitution void do_sSubst(char const* str, char const* end) { string s(str, end); //use boost tokenizer to break down tokens typedef boost::tokenizer<boost::char_separator<char> > Tokenizer; boost::char_separator<char> sep("-+/*:=()"); // default char separator Tokenizer tok(s, sep); Tokenizer::iterator tok_iter = tok.begin(); pair<string, string > dependency; //create a pair object for dependencies //save first variable token in simple substitution dependency.first = *tok.begin(); //create a vector object to store all tokens vector<string> dx; // for( ; tok_iter != tok.end(); ++tok_iter) //save all tokens in vector { dx.push_back(*tok_iter ); } vector<string> d_hat; //stores set of dependency pairs string dep; //pairs variables as string object for(int unsigned i=1; i < dx.size()-1; i++) { dependency.second = dx.at(i); dep = dependency.first + "|->" + dependency.second + " "; d_hat.push_back(dep); } cout << "PUSH(" << s << ')' << endl; for(int unsigned i=0; i < d_hat.size(); i++) cout <<"\n...\n" << d_hat.at(i) << " "; cout << "\nSIMPLE SUBSTITUTION\n"; } //semantic action function on multiple substitution void do_mSubst(char const* str, char const* end) { string s(str, end); //use boost tokenizer to break down tokens typedef boost::tokenizer<boost::char_separator<char> > Tok; boost::char_separator<char> sep("-+/*:=()"); // default char separator Tok tok(s, sep); Tok::iterator tok_iter = tok.begin(); // string start = *tok.begin(); vector<string> mx; for( ; tok_iter != tok.end(); ++tok_iter) //save all tokens in vector { mx.push_back(*tok_iter ); } mx.push_back("END\n"); //add a marker "end" for(unsigned int i=0; i<mx.size(); i++) { // if(mx.at(i) == "END" || mx.at(i) == "||" ) // break; // else if( mx.at(i) == "||") // do_sSubst(str, end); // else // { // do_sSubst(str, end); // } cout << "\nTokens ... " << mx.at(i) << " "; } cout << "PUSH(" << s << ')' << endl; cout << "MULTIPLE SUBSTITUTION\n"; } } //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// // // Simple Substitution Grammar // //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// // Simple substitution grammar parser with integer values removed struct Substitution : public grammar<Substitution> { template <typename ScannerT> struct definition { definition(Substitution const& ) { multi_subst = (simple_subst [&do_mSubst] >> +( str_p("||") >> simple_subst [&do_mSubst]) ) ; simple_subst = (Identifier >> str_p(":=") >> expression)[&do_sSubst] ; Identifier = alpha_p >> +alnum_p//[do_noint] ; expression = term >> *( ('+' >> term)[&do_add] | ('-' >> term)[&do_subt] ) ; term = factor >> *( ('*' >> factor)[&do_mult] | ('/' >> factor)[&do_div] ) ; factor = lexeme_d[( (alpha_p >> +alnum_p) | +digit_p)[&do_noint]] | '(' >> expression >> ')' | ('+' >> factor) ; } rule<ScannerT> expression, term, factor, Identifier, simple_subst, multi_subst ; rule<ScannerT> const& start() const { return multi_subst; } }; }; //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// // // Main program // //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// int main() { cout << "************************************************************\n\n"; cout << "\t\t...Machine Parser...\n\n"; cout << "************************************************************\n\n"; // cout << "Type an expression...or [q or Q] to quit\n\n"; //prompt for file name to be input cout << "Please enter a filename...or [q or Q] to quit:\n\n "; char strFilename[256]; //file name store as a string object cin >> strFilename; ifstream inFile(strFilename); // opens file object for reading //output file for truncated machine (operations only) Substitution elementary_subst; // Simple substitution parser object string str, next; // inFile.open(strFilename); while (inFile >> str) { getline(cin, next); str += next; if (str.empty() || str[0] == 'q' || str[0] == 'Q') break; parse_info<> info = parse(str.c_str(), elementary_subst, space_p); if (info.full) { cout << "\n-------------------------\n"; cout << "Parsing succeeded\n"; cout << "\n-------------------------\n"; } else { cout << "\n-------------------------\n"; cout << "Parsing failed\n"; cout << "stopped at: \": " << info.stop << "\"\n"; cout << "\n-------------------------\n"; } } cout << "Please enter a filename...or [q or Q] to quit\n"; cin >> strFilename; return 0; } The contents of the file I tried to parse, which I named "mf7.txt" is given below: debt:=(LoanRequest+outstandingLoan1)*20 || newDebt := loanammount-paidammount The output when I execute the program is: ************************************************************ ...Machine Parser... ************************************************************ Please enter a filename...or [q or Q] to quit: c:\tplat\mf7.txt PUSH(LoanRequest) PUSH(outstandingLoan1) ADD LoanRequest outstandingLoan1 MULTIPLY LoanRequest outstandingLoan1 PUSH(debt:=(LoanRequest+outstandingLoan1)*20) ... debt|->LoanRequest ... debt|->outstandingLoan1 SIMPLE SUBSTITUTION Tokens ... debt Tokens ... LoanRequest Tokens ... outstandingLoan1 Tokens ... 20 Tokens ... END PUSH(debt:=(LoanRequest+outstandingLoan1)*20) MULTIPLE SUBSTITUTION ------------------------- Parsing failedstopped at: ": " ------------------------- My intention is to capture only the variables in the file, which I managed to do up to the "||" string. Clearly, the program is not parsing beyond the "||" string in the input file. I will appreciate assistance to fix the grammar. SOS, please.

    Read the article

  • web.xml not reloading in tomcat even after stop/start

    - by ajay
    This is in relation to:- http://stackoverflow.com/questions/2576514/basic-tomcat-servlet-error I changed my web.xml file, did ant compile , all, /etc/init.d/tomcat stop , start Even then my web.xml file in tomcat deployment is still unchanged. This is build.properties file:- app.name=hello catalina.home=/usr/local/tomcat manager.username=admin manager.password=admin This is my build.xml file. Is there something wrong with this:- <!-- Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed with this work for additional information regarding copyright ownership. The ASF licenses this file to You under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License. --> <!-- General purpose build script for web applications and web services, including enhanced support for deploying directly to a Tomcat 6 based server. This build script assumes that the source code of your web application is organized into the following subdirectories underneath the source code directory from which you execute the build script: docs Static documentation files to be copied to the "docs" subdirectory of your distribution. src Java source code (and associated resource files) to be compiled to the "WEB-INF/classes" subdirectory of your web applicaiton. web Static HTML, JSP, and other content (such as image files), including the WEB-INF subdirectory and its configuration file contents. $Id: build.xml.txt 562814 2007-08-05 03:52:04Z markt $ --> <!-- A "project" describes a set of targets that may be requested when Ant is executed. The "default" attribute defines the target which is executed if no specific target is requested, and the "basedir" attribute defines the current working directory from which Ant executes the requested task. This is normally set to the current working directory. --> <project name="My Project" default="compile" basedir="."> <!-- ===================== Property Definitions =========================== --> <!-- Each of the following properties are used in the build script. Values for these properties are set by the first place they are defined, from the following list: * Definitions on the "ant" command line (ant -Dfoo=bar compile). * Definitions from a "build.properties" file in the top level source directory of this application. * Definitions from a "build.properties" file in the developer's home directory. * Default definitions in this build.xml file. You will note below that property values can be composed based on the contents of previously defined properties. This is a powerful technique that helps you minimize the number of changes required when your development environment is modified. Note that property composition is allowed within "build.properties" files as well as in the "build.xml" script. --> <property file="build.properties"/> <property file="${user.home}/build.properties"/> <!-- ==================== File and Directory Names ======================== --> <!-- These properties generally define file and directory names (or paths) that affect where the build process stores its outputs. app.name Base name of this application, used to construct filenames and directories. Defaults to "myapp". app.path Context path to which this application should be deployed (defaults to "/" plus the value of the "app.name" property). app.version Version number of this iteration of the application. build.home The directory into which the "prepare" and "compile" targets will generate their output. Defaults to "build". catalina.home The directory in which you have installed a binary distribution of Tomcat 6. This will be used by the "deploy" target. dist.home The name of the base directory in which distribution files are created. Defaults to "dist". manager.password The login password of a user that is assigned the "manager" role (so that he or she can execute commands via the "/manager" web application) manager.url The URL of the "/manager" web application on the Tomcat installation to which we will deploy web applications and web services. manager.username The login username of a user that is assigned the "manager" role (so that he or she can execute commands via the "/manager" web application) --> <property name="app.name" value="myapp"/> <property name="app.path" value="/${app.name}"/> <property name="app.version" value="0.1-dev"/> <property name="build.home" value="${basedir}/build"/> <property name="catalina.home" value="../../../.."/> <!-- UPDATE THIS! --> <property name="dist.home" value="${basedir}/dist"/> <property name="docs.home" value="${basedir}/docs"/> <property name="manager.url" value="http://localhost:8080/manager"/> <property name="src.home" value="${basedir}/src"/> <property name="web.home" value="${basedir}/web"/> <!-- ==================== External Dependencies =========================== --> <!-- Use property values to define the locations of external JAR files on which your application will depend. In general, these values will be used for two purposes: * Inclusion on the classpath that is passed to the Javac compiler * Being copied into the "/WEB-INF/lib" directory during execution of the "deploy" target. Because we will automatically include all of the Java classes that Tomcat 6 exposes to web applications, we will not need to explicitly list any of those dependencies. You only need to worry about external dependencies for JAR files that you are going to include inside your "/WEB-INF/lib" directory. --> <!-- Dummy external dependency --> <!-- <property name="foo.jar" value="/path/to/foo.jar"/> --> <!-- ==================== Compilation Classpath =========================== --> <!-- Rather than relying on the CLASSPATH environment variable, Ant includes features that makes it easy to dynamically construct the classpath you need for each compilation. The example below constructs the compile classpath to include the servlet.jar file, as well as the other components that Tomcat makes available to web applications automatically, plus anything that you explicitly added. --> <path id="compile.classpath"> <!-- Include all JAR files that will be included in /WEB-INF/lib --> <!-- *** CUSTOMIZE HERE AS REQUIRED BY YOUR APPLICATION *** --> <!-- <pathelement location="${foo.jar}"/> --> <!-- Include all elements that Tomcat exposes to applications --> <fileset dir="${catalina.home}/bin"> <include name="*.jar"/> </fileset> <pathelement location="${catalina.home}/lib"/> <fileset dir="${catalina.home}/lib"> <include name="*.jar"/> </fileset> </path> <!-- ================== Custom Ant Task Definitions ======================= --> <!-- These properties define custom tasks for the Ant build tool that interact with the "/manager" web application installed with Tomcat 6. Before they can be successfully utilized, you must perform the following steps: - Copy the file "lib/catalina-ant.jar" from your Tomcat 6 installation into the "lib" directory of your Ant installation. - Create a "build.properties" file in your application's top-level source directory (or your user login home directory) that defines appropriate values for the "manager.password", "manager.url", and "manager.username" properties described above. For more information about the Manager web application, and the functionality of these tasks, see <http://localhost:8080/tomcat-docs/manager-howto.html>. --> <taskdef resource="org/apache/catalina/ant/catalina.tasks" classpathref="compile.classpath"/> <!-- ==================== Compilation Control Options ==================== --> <!-- These properties control option settings on the Javac compiler when it is invoked using the <javac> task. compile.debug Should compilation include the debug option? compile.deprecation Should compilation include the deprecation option? compile.optimize Should compilation include the optimize option? --> <property name="compile.debug" value="true"/> <property name="compile.deprecation" value="false"/> <property name="compile.optimize" value="true"/> <!-- ==================== All Target ====================================== --> <!-- The "all" target is a shortcut for running the "clean" target followed by the "compile" target, to force a complete recompile. --> <target name="all" depends="clean,compile" description="Clean build and dist directories, then compile"/> <!-- ==================== Clean Target ==================================== --> <!-- The "clean" target deletes any previous "build" and "dist" directory, so that you can be ensured the application can be built from scratch. --> <target name="clean" description="Delete old build and dist directories"> <delete dir="${build.home}"/> <delete dir="${dist.home}"/> </target> <!-- ==================== Compile Target ================================== --> <!-- The "compile" target transforms source files (from your "src" directory) into object files in the appropriate location in the build directory. This example assumes that you will be including your classes in an unpacked directory hierarchy under "/WEB-INF/classes". --> <target name="compile" depends="prepare" description="Compile Java sources"> <!-- Compile Java classes as necessary --> <mkdir dir="${build.home}/WEB-INF/classes"/> <javac srcdir="${src.home}" destdir="${build.home}/WEB-INF/classes" debug="${compile.debug}" deprecation="${compile.deprecation}" optimize="${compile.optimize}"> <classpath refid="compile.classpath"/> </javac> <!-- Copy application resources --> <copy todir="${build.home}/WEB-INF/classes"> <fileset dir="${src.home}" excludes="**/*.java"/> </copy> </target> <!-- ==================== Dist Target ===================================== --> <!-- The "dist" target creates a binary distribution of your application in a directory structure ready to be archived in a tar.gz or zip file. Note that this target depends on two others: * "compile" so that the entire web application (including external dependencies) will have been assembled * "javadoc" so that the application Javadocs will have been created --> <target name="dist" depends="compile,javadoc" description="Create binary distribution"> <!-- Copy documentation subdirectories --> <mkdir dir="${dist.home}/docs"/> <copy todir="${dist.home}/docs"> <fileset dir="${docs.home}"/> </copy> <!-- Create application JAR file --> <jar jarfile="${dist.home}/${app.name}-${app.version}.war" basedir="${build.home}"/> <!-- Copy additional files to ${dist.home} as necessary --> </target> <!-- ==================== Install Target ================================== --> <!-- The "install" target tells the specified Tomcat 6 installation to dynamically install this web application and make it available for execution. It does *not* cause the existence of this web application to be remembered across Tomcat restarts; if you restart the server, you will need to re-install all this web application. If you have already installed this application, and simply want Tomcat to recognize that you have updated Java classes (or the web.xml file), use the "reload" target instead. NOTE: This target will only succeed if it is run from the same server that Tomcat is running on. NOTE: This is the logical opposite of the "remove" target. --> <target name="install" depends="compile" description="Install application to servlet container"> <deploy url="${manager.url}" username="${manager.username}" password="${manager.password}" path="${app.path}" localWar="file://${build.home}"/> </target> <!-- ==================== Javadoc Target ================================== --> <!-- The "javadoc" target creates Javadoc API documentation for the Java classes included in your application. Normally, this is only required when preparing a distribution release, but is available as a separate target in case the developer wants to create Javadocs independently. --> <target name="javadoc" depends="compile" description="Create Javadoc API documentation"> <mkdir dir="${dist.home}/docs/api"/> <javadoc sourcepath="${src.home}" destdir="${dist.home}/docs/api" packagenames="*"> <classpath refid="compile.classpath"/> </javadoc> </target> <!-- ====================== List Target =================================== --> <!-- The "list" target asks the specified Tomcat 6 installation to list the currently running web applications, either loaded at startup time or installed dynamically. It is useful to determine whether or not the application you are currently developing has been installed. --> <target name="list" description="List installed applications on servlet container"> <list url="${manager.url}" username="${manager.username}" password="${manager.password}"/> </target> <!-- ==================== Prepare Target ================================== --> <!-- The "prepare" target is used to create the "build" destination directory, and copy the static contents of your web application to it. If you need to copy static files from external dependencies, you can customize the contents of this task. Normally, this task is executed indirectly when needed. --> <target name="prepare"> <!-- Create build directories as needed --> <mkdir dir="${build.home}"/> <mkdir dir="${build.home}/WEB-INF"/> <mkdir dir="${build.home}/WEB-INF/classes"/> <!-- Copy static content of this web application --> <copy todir="${build.home}"> <fileset dir="${web.home}"/> </copy> <!-- Copy external dependencies as required --> <!-- *** CUSTOMIZE HERE AS REQUIRED BY YOUR APPLICATION *** --> <mkdir dir="${build.home}/WEB-INF/lib"/> <!-- <copy todir="${build.home}/WEB-INF/lib" file="${foo.jar}"/> --> <!-- Copy static files from external dependencies as needed --> <!-- *** CUSTOMIZE HERE AS REQUIRED BY YOUR APPLICATION *** --> </target> <!-- ==================== Reload Target =================================== --> <!-- The "reload" signals the specified application Tomcat 6 to shut itself down and reload. This can be useful when the web application context is not reloadable and you have updated classes or property files in the /WEB-INF/classes directory or when you have added or updated jar files in the /WEB-INF/lib directory. NOTE: The /WEB-INF/web.xml web application configuration file is not reread on a reload. If you have made changes to your web.xml file you must stop then start the web application. --> <target name="reload" depends="compile" description="Reload application on servlet container"> <reload url="${manager.url}" username="${manager.username}" password="${manager.password}" path="${app.path}"/> </target> <!-- ==================== Remove Target =================================== --> <!-- The "remove" target tells the specified Tomcat 6 installation to dynamically remove this web application from service. NOTE: This is the logical opposite of the "install" target. --> <target name="remove" description="Remove application on servlet container"> <undeploy url="${manager.url}" username="${manager.username}" password="${manager.password}" path="${app.path}"/> </target> </project>

    Read the article

  • NullPointerException when linking to Service that uses ContentProvider

    - by Danny Chia
    H.i everyone, this is my first post here! Anyways, I'm trying to write a "todo list" application. It stores the data in a ContentProvider, which is accessed via a Service. However, my app crashes at launch. My code is below: Manifest file: <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> <manifest xmlns:android="http://schemas.android.com/apk/res/android" package="com.examples.todolist" android:versionCode="1" android:versionName="1.0"> <application android:icon="@drawable/icon" android:label="@string/app_name" android:debuggable="True"> <activity android:name=".ToDoList" android:label="@string/app_name" android:theme="@style/ToDoTheme"> <intent-filter> <action android:name="android.intent.action.MAIN" /> <category android:name="android.intent.category.LAUNCHER" /> </intent-filter> </activity> <service android:name="TodoService"/> <provider android:name="TodoProvider" android:authorities="com.examples.provider.todolist" /> </application> <uses-sdk android:minSdkVersion="7" /> </manifest> ToDoList.java: package com.examples.todolist; import com.examples.todolist.TodoService.LocalBinder; import java.util.ArrayList; import java.util.Date; import android.app.Activity; import android.content.SharedPreferences; import android.database.Cursor; import android.os.AsyncTask; import android.os.Bundle; import android.view.ContextMenu; import android.content.ComponentName; import android.content.Context; import android.content.Intent; import android.content.ServiceConnection; import android.os.IBinder; import android.view.KeyEvent; import android.view.Menu; import android.view.MenuItem; import android.view.View; import android.view.View.OnKeyListener; import android.widget.AdapterView; import android.widget.EditText; import android.widget.ListView; import android.widget.Toast; public class ToDoList extends Activity { static final private int ADD_NEW_TODO = Menu.FIRST; static final private int REMOVE_TODO = Menu.FIRST + 1; private static final String TEXT_ENTRY_KEY = "TEXT_ENTRY_KEY"; private static final String ADDING_ITEM_KEY = "ADDING_ITEM_KEY"; private static final String SELECTED_INDEX_KEY = "SELECTED_INDEX_KEY"; private boolean addingNew = false; private ArrayList<ToDoItem> todoItems; private ListView myListView; private EditText myEditText; private ToDoItemAdapter aa; int entries = 0; int notifs = 0; //ToDoDBAdapter toDoDBAdapter; Cursor toDoListCursor; TodoService mService; boolean mBound = false; /** Called when the activity is first created. */ public void onCreate(Bundle icicle) { super.onCreate(icicle); setContentView(R.layout.main); myListView = (ListView)findViewById(R.id.myListView); myEditText = (EditText)findViewById(R.id.myEditText); todoItems = new ArrayList<ToDoItem>(); int resID = R.layout.todolist_item; aa = new ToDoItemAdapter(this, resID, todoItems); myListView.setAdapter(aa); myEditText.setOnKeyListener(new OnKeyListener() { public boolean onKey(View v, int keyCode, KeyEvent event) { if (event.getAction() == KeyEvent.ACTION_DOWN) if (keyCode == KeyEvent.KEYCODE_DPAD_CENTER) { ToDoItem newItem = new ToDoItem(myEditText.getText().toString(), 0); mService.insertTask(newItem); updateArray(); myEditText.setText(""); entries++; Toast.makeText(ToDoList.this, "Entry added", Toast.LENGTH_SHORT).show(); aa.notifyDataSetChanged(); cancelAdd(); return true; } return false; } }); registerForContextMenu(myListView); restoreUIState(); populateTodoList(); } private void populateTodoList() { // Get all the todo list items from the database. toDoListCursor = mService. getAllToDoItemsCursor(); startManagingCursor(toDoListCursor); // Update the array. updateArray(); Toast.makeText(this, "Todo list retrieved", Toast.LENGTH_SHORT).show(); } private void updateArray() { toDoListCursor.requery(); todoItems.clear(); if (toDoListCursor.moveToFirst()) do { String task = toDoListCursor.getString(toDoListCursor.getColumnIndex(ToDoDBAdapter.KEY_TASK)); long created = toDoListCursor.getLong(toDoListCursor.getColumnIndex(ToDoDBAdapter.KEY_CREATION_DATE)); int taskid = toDoListCursor.getInt(toDoListCursor.getColumnIndex(ToDoDBAdapter.KEY_ID)); ToDoItem newItem = new ToDoItem(task, new Date(created), taskid); todoItems.add(0, newItem); } while(toDoListCursor.moveToNext()); aa.notifyDataSetChanged(); } private void restoreUIState() { // Get the activity preferences object. SharedPreferences settings = getPreferences(0); // Read the UI state values, specifying default values. String text = settings.getString(TEXT_ENTRY_KEY, ""); Boolean adding = settings.getBoolean(ADDING_ITEM_KEY, false); // Restore the UI to the previous state. if (adding) { addNewItem(); myEditText.setText(text); } } @Override public void onSaveInstanceState(Bundle outState) { outState.putInt(SELECTED_INDEX_KEY, myListView.getSelectedItemPosition()); super.onSaveInstanceState(outState); } @Override public void onRestoreInstanceState(Bundle savedInstanceState) { int pos = -1; if (savedInstanceState != null) if (savedInstanceState.containsKey(SELECTED_INDEX_KEY)) pos = savedInstanceState.getInt(SELECTED_INDEX_KEY, -1); myListView.setSelection(pos); } @Override protected void onPause() { super.onPause(); // Get the activity preferences object. SharedPreferences uiState = getPreferences(0); // Get the preferences editor. SharedPreferences.Editor editor = uiState.edit(); // Add the UI state preference values. editor.putString(TEXT_ENTRY_KEY, myEditText.getText().toString()); editor.putBoolean(ADDING_ITEM_KEY, addingNew); // Commit the preferences. editor.commit(); } @Override public boolean onCreateOptionsMenu(Menu menu) { super.onCreateOptionsMenu(menu); // Create and add new menu items. MenuItem itemAdd = menu.add(0, ADD_NEW_TODO, Menu.NONE, R.string.add_new); MenuItem itemRem = menu.add(0, REMOVE_TODO, Menu.NONE, R.string.remove); // Assign icons itemAdd.setIcon(R.drawable.add_new_item); itemRem.setIcon(R.drawable.remove_item); // Allocate shortcuts to each of them. itemAdd.setShortcut('0', 'a'); itemRem.setShortcut('1', 'r'); return true; } @Override public boolean onPrepareOptionsMenu(Menu menu) { super.onPrepareOptionsMenu(menu); int idx = myListView.getSelectedItemPosition(); String removeTitle = getString(addingNew ? R.string.cancel : R.string.remove); MenuItem removeItem = menu.findItem(REMOVE_TODO); removeItem.setTitle(removeTitle); removeItem.setVisible(addingNew || idx > -1); return true; } @Override public void onCreateContextMenu(ContextMenu menu, View v, ContextMenu.ContextMenuInfo menuInfo) { super.onCreateContextMenu(menu, v, menuInfo); menu.setHeaderTitle("Selected To Do Item"); menu.add(0, REMOVE_TODO, Menu.NONE, R.string.remove); } @Override public boolean onOptionsItemSelected(MenuItem item) { super.onOptionsItemSelected(item); int index = myListView.getSelectedItemPosition(); switch (item.getItemId()) { case (REMOVE_TODO): { if (addingNew) { cancelAdd(); } else { removeItem(index); } return true; } case (ADD_NEW_TODO): { addNewItem(); return true; } } return false; } @Override public boolean onContextItemSelected(MenuItem item) { super.onContextItemSelected(item); switch (item.getItemId()) { case (REMOVE_TODO): { AdapterView.AdapterContextMenuInfo menuInfo; menuInfo =(AdapterView.AdapterContextMenuInfo)item.getMenuInfo(); int index = menuInfo.position; removeItem(index); return true; } } return false; } @Override public void onDestroy() { super.onDestroy(); } private void cancelAdd() { addingNew = false; myEditText.setVisibility(View.GONE); } private void addNewItem() { addingNew = true; myEditText.setVisibility(View.VISIBLE); myEditText.requestFocus(); } private void removeItem(int _index) { // Items are added to the listview in reverse order, so invert the index. //toDoDBAdapter.removeTask(todoItems.size()-_index); ToDoItem item = todoItems.get(_index); final long selectedId = item.getTaskId(); mService.removeTask(selectedId); entries--; Toast.makeText(this, "Entry deleted", Toast.LENGTH_SHORT).show(); updateArray(); } @Override protected void onStart() { super.onStart(); Intent intent = new Intent(this, TodoService.class); bindService(intent, mConnection, Context.BIND_AUTO_CREATE); } @Override protected void onStop() { super.onStop(); // Unbind from the service if (mBound) { unbindService(mConnection); mBound = false; } } private ServiceConnection mConnection = new ServiceConnection() { public void onServiceConnected(ComponentName className, IBinder service) { LocalBinder binder = (LocalBinder) service; mService = binder.getService(); mBound = true; } public void onServiceDisconnected(ComponentName arg0) { mBound = false; } }; public class TimedToast extends AsyncTask<Long, Integer, Integer> { @Override protected Integer doInBackground(Long... arg0) { if (notifs < 15) { try { Toast.makeText(ToDoList.this, entries + " entries left", Toast.LENGTH_SHORT).show(); notifs++; Thread.sleep(20000); } catch (InterruptedException e) { } } return 0; } } } TodoService.java: package com.examples.todolist; import android.app.Service; import android.content.ContentResolver; import android.content.ContentValues; import android.content.Intent; import android.database.Cursor; import android.os.Binder; import android.os.IBinder; public class TodoService extends Service { private final IBinder mBinder = new LocalBinder(); @Override public IBinder onBind(Intent arg0) { return mBinder; } public class LocalBinder extends Binder { TodoService getService() { return TodoService.this; } } public void insertTask(ToDoItem _task) { ContentResolver cr = getContentResolver(); ContentValues values = new ContentValues(); values.put(TodoProvider.KEY_CREATION_DATE, _task.getCreated().getTime()); values.put(TodoProvider.KEY_TASK, _task.getTask()); cr.insert(TodoProvider.CONTENT_URI, values); } public void updateTask(ToDoItem _task) { long tid = _task.getTaskId(); ContentResolver cr = getContentResolver(); ContentValues values = new ContentValues(); values.put(TodoProvider.KEY_TASK, _task.getTask()); cr.update(TodoProvider.CONTENT_URI, values, TodoProvider.KEY_ID + "=" + tid, null); } public void removeTask(long tid) { ContentResolver cr = getContentResolver(); cr.delete(TodoProvider.CONTENT_URI, TodoProvider.KEY_ID + "=" + tid, null); } public Cursor getAllToDoItemsCursor() { ContentResolver cr = getContentResolver(); return cr.query(TodoProvider.CONTENT_URI, null, null, null, null); } } TodoProvider.java: package com.examples.todolist; import android.content.*; import android.database.Cursor; import android.database.SQLException; import android.database.sqlite.SQLiteOpenHelper; import android.database.sqlite.SQLiteDatabase; import android.database.sqlite.SQLiteQueryBuilder; import android.database.sqlite.SQLiteDatabase.CursorFactory; import android.net.Uri; import android.text.TextUtils; import android.util.Log; public class TodoProvider extends ContentProvider { public static final Uri CONTENT_URI = Uri.parse("content://com.examples.provider.todolist/todo"); @Override public boolean onCreate() { Context context = getContext(); todoHelper dbHelper = new todoHelper(context, DATABASE_NAME, null, DATABASE_VERSION); todoDB = dbHelper.getWritableDatabase(); return (todoDB == null) ? false : true; } @Override public Cursor query(Uri uri, String[] projection, String selection, String[] selectionArgs, String sort) { SQLiteQueryBuilder tb = new SQLiteQueryBuilder(); tb.setTables(TODO_TABLE); // If this is a row query, limit the result set to the passed in row. switch (uriMatcher.match(uri)) { case TASK_ID: tb.appendWhere(KEY_ID + "=" + uri.getPathSegments().get(1)); break; default: break; } // If no sort order is specified sort by date / time String orderBy; if (TextUtils.isEmpty(sort)) { orderBy = KEY_ID; } else { orderBy = sort; } // Apply the query to the underlying database. Cursor c = tb.query(todoDB, projection, selection, selectionArgs, null, null, orderBy); // Register the contexts ContentResolver to be notified if // the cursor result set changes. c.setNotificationUri(getContext().getContentResolver(), uri); // Return a cursor to the query result. return c; } @Override public Uri insert(Uri _uri, ContentValues _initialValues) { // Insert the new row, will return the row number if // successful. long rowID = todoDB.insert(TODO_TABLE, "task", _initialValues); // Return a URI to the newly inserted row on success. if (rowID > 0) { Uri uri = ContentUris.withAppendedId(CONTENT_URI, rowID); getContext().getContentResolver().notifyChange(uri, null); return uri; } throw new SQLException("Failed to insert row into " + _uri); } @Override public int delete(Uri uri, String where, String[] whereArgs) { int count; switch (uriMatcher.match(uri)) { case TASKS: count = todoDB.delete(TODO_TABLE, where, whereArgs); break; case TASK_ID: String segment = uri.getPathSegments().get(1); count = todoDB.delete(TODO_TABLE, KEY_ID + "=" + segment + (!TextUtils.isEmpty(where) ? " AND (" + where + ')' : ""), whereArgs); break; default: throw new IllegalArgumentException("Unsupported URI: " + uri); } getContext().getContentResolver().notifyChange(uri, null); return count; } @Override public int update(Uri uri, ContentValues values, String where, String[] whereArgs) { int count; switch (uriMatcher.match(uri)) { case TASKS: count = todoDB.update(TODO_TABLE, values, where, whereArgs); break; case TASK_ID: String segment = uri.getPathSegments().get(1); count = todoDB.update(TODO_TABLE, values, KEY_ID + "=" + segment + (!TextUtils.isEmpty(where) ? " AND (" + where + ')' : ""), whereArgs); break; default: throw new IllegalArgumentException("Unknown URI " + uri); } getContext().getContentResolver().notifyChange(uri, null); return count; } @Override public String getType(Uri uri) { switch (uriMatcher.match(uri)) { case TASKS: return "vnd.android.cursor.dir/vnd.examples.task"; case TASK_ID: return "vnd.android.cursor.item/vnd.examples.task"; default: throw new IllegalArgumentException("Unsupported URI: " + uri); } } // Create the constants used to differentiate between the different URI // requests. private static final int TASKS = 1; private static final int TASK_ID = 2; private static final UriMatcher uriMatcher; // Allocate the UriMatcher object, where a URI ending in 'tasks' will // correspond to a request for all tasks, and 'tasks' with a // trailing '/[rowID]' will represent a single task row. static { uriMatcher = new UriMatcher(UriMatcher.NO_MATCH); uriMatcher.addURI("com.examples.provider.Todolist", "tasks", TASKS); uriMatcher.addURI("com.examples.provider.Todolist", "tasks/#", TASK_ID); } //The underlying database private SQLiteDatabase todoDB; private static final String TAG = "TodoProvider"; private static final String DATABASE_NAME = "todolist.db"; private static final int DATABASE_VERSION = 1; private static final String TODO_TABLE = "todolist"; // Column Names public static final String KEY_ID = "_id"; public static final String KEY_TASK = "task"; public static final String KEY_CREATION_DATE = "date"; public long insertTask(ToDoItem _task) { // Create a new row of values to insert. ContentValues newTaskValues = new ContentValues(); // Assign values for each row. newTaskValues.put(KEY_TASK, _task.getTask()); newTaskValues.put(KEY_CREATION_DATE, _task.getCreated().getTime()); // Insert the row. return todoDB.insert(TODO_TABLE, null, newTaskValues); } public boolean updateTask(long _rowIndex, String _task) { ContentValues newValue = new ContentValues(); newValue.put(KEY_TASK, _task); return todoDB.update(TODO_TABLE, newValue, KEY_ID + "=" + _rowIndex, null) > 0; } public boolean removeTask(long _rowIndex) { return todoDB.delete(TODO_TABLE, KEY_ID + "=" + _rowIndex, null) > 0; } // Helper class for opening, creating, and managing database version control private static class todoHelper extends SQLiteOpenHelper { private static final String DATABASE_CREATE = "create table " + TODO_TABLE + " (" + KEY_ID + " integer primary key autoincrement, " + KEY_TASK + " TEXT, " + KEY_CREATION_DATE + " INTEGER);"; public todoHelper(Context cn, String name, CursorFactory cf, int ver) { super(cn, name, cf, ver); } @Override public void onCreate(SQLiteDatabase db) { db.execSQL(DATABASE_CREATE); } @Override public void onUpgrade(SQLiteDatabase db, int oldVersion, int newVersion) { Log.w(TAG, "Upgrading database from version " + oldVersion + " to " + newVersion + ", which will destroy all old data"); db.execSQL("DROP TABLE IF EXISTS " + TODO_TABLE); onCreate(db); } } } I've omitted the other files as I'm sure they are correct. When I run the program, LogCat shows that the NullPointerException occurs in populateTodoList(), at toDoListCursor = mService.getAllToDoItemsCursor(). mService is the Cursor object returned by TodoService. I've added the service to the Manifest file, but I still cannot find out why it's causing an exception. Thanks in advance.

    Read the article

  • C++ HW - defining classes - objects that have objects of other class problem in header file (out of

    - by kitfuntastik
    This is my first time with much of this code. With this instancepool.h file below I get errors saying I can't use vector (line 14) or have instance& as a return type (line 20). It seems it can't use the instance objects despite the fact that I have included them. #ifndef _INSTANCEPOOL_H #define _INSTANCEPOOL_H #include "instance.h" #include <iostream> #include <string> #include <vector> #include <stdlib.h> using namespace std; class InstancePool { private: unsigned instances;//total number of instance objects vector<instance> ipp;//the collection of instance objects, held in a vector public: InstancePool();//Default constructor. Creates an InstancePool object that contains no Instance objects InstancePool(const InstancePool& original);//Copy constructor. After copying, changes to original should not affect the copy that was created. ~InstancePool();//Destructor unsigned getNumberOfInstances() const;//Returns the number of Instance objects the the InstancePool contains. const instance& operator[](unsigned index) const; InstancePool& operator=(const InstancePool& right);//Overloading the assignment operator for InstancePool. friend istream& operator>>(istream& in, InstancePool& ip);//Overloading of the >> operator. friend ostream& operator<<(ostream& out, const InstancePool& ip);//Overloading of the << operator. }; #endif Here is the instance.h : #ifndef _INSTANCE_H #define _INSTANCE_H ///////////////////////////////#include "instancepool.h" #include <iostream> #include <string> #include <stdlib.h> using namespace std; class Instance { private: string filenamee; bool categoryy; unsigned featuress; unsigned* featureIDD; unsigned* frequencyy; string* featuree; public: Instance (unsigned features = 0);//default constructor unsigned getNumberOfFeatures() const; //Returns the number of the keywords that the calling Instance object can store. Instance(const Instance& original);//Copy constructor. After copying, changes to the original should not affect the copy that was created. ~Instance() { delete []featureIDD; delete []frequencyy; delete []featuree;}//Destructor. void setCategory(bool category){categoryy = category;}//Sets the category of the message. Spam messages are represented with true and and legit messages with false.//easy bool getCategory() const;//Returns the category of the message. void setFileName(const string& filename){filenamee = filename;}//Stores the name of the file (i.e. “spam/spamsga1.txt”, like in 1st assignment) in which the message was initially stored.//const string& trick? string getFileName() const;//Returns the name of the file in which the message was initially stored. void setFeature(unsigned i, const string& feature, unsigned featureID,unsigned frequency) {//i for array positions featuree[i] = feature; featureIDD[i] = featureID; frequencyy[i] = frequency; } string getFeature(unsigned i) const;//Returns the keyword which is located in the ith position.//const string unsigned getFeatureID(unsigned i) const;//Returns the code of the keyword which is located in the ith position. unsigned getFrequency(unsigned i) const;//Returns the frequency Instance& operator=(const Instance& right);//Overloading of the assignment operator for Instance. friend ostream& operator<<(ostream& out, const Instance& inst);//Overloading of the << operator for Instance. friend istream& operator>>(istream& in, Instance& inst);//Overloading of the >> operator for Instance. }; #endif Also, if it is helpful here is instance.cpp: // Here we implement the functions of the class apart from the inline ones #include "instance.h" #include <iostream> #include <string> #include <stdlib.h> using namespace std; Instance::Instance(unsigned features) { //Constructor that can be used as the default constructor. featuress = features; if (features == 0) return; featuree = new string[featuress]; // Dynamic memory allocation. featureIDD = new unsigned[featuress]; frequencyy = new unsigned[featuress]; return; } unsigned Instance::getNumberOfFeatures() const {//Returns the number of the keywords that the calling Instance object can store. return featuress;} Instance::Instance(const Instance& original) {//Copy constructor. filenamee = original.filenamee; categoryy = original.categoryy; featuress = original.featuress; featuree = new string[featuress]; for(unsigned i = 0; i < featuress; i++) { featuree[i] = original.featuree[i]; } featureIDD = new unsigned[featuress]; for(unsigned i = 0; i < featuress; i++) { featureIDD[i] = original.featureIDD[i]; } frequencyy = new unsigned[featuress]; for(unsigned i = 0; i < featuress; i++) { frequencyy[i] = original.frequencyy[i];} } bool Instance::getCategory() const { //Returns the category of the message. return categoryy;} string Instance::getFileName() const { //Returns the name of the file in which the message was initially stored. return filenamee;} string Instance::getFeature(unsigned i) const { //Returns the keyword which is located in the ith position.//const string return featuree[i];} unsigned Instance::getFeatureID(unsigned i) const { //Returns the code of the keyword which is located in the ith position. return featureIDD[i];} unsigned Instance::getFrequency(unsigned i) const { //Returns the frequency return frequencyy[i];} Instance& Instance::operator=(const Instance& right) { //Overloading of the assignment operator for Instance. if(this == &right) return *this; delete []featureIDD; delete []frequencyy; delete []featuree; filenamee = right.filenamee; categoryy = right.categoryy; featuress = right.featuress; featureIDD = new unsigned[featuress]; frequencyy = new unsigned[featuress]; featuree = new string[featuress]; for(unsigned i = 0; i < featuress; i++) { featureIDD[i] = right.featureIDD[i]; } for(unsigned i = 0; i < featuress; i++) { frequencyy[i] = right.frequencyy[i]; } for(unsigned i = 0; i < featuress; i++) { featuree[i] = right.featuree[i]; } return *this; } ostream& operator<<(ostream& out, const Instance& inst) {//Overloading of the << operator for Instance. out << endl << "<message file=" << '"' << inst.filenamee << '"' << " category="; if (inst.categoryy == 0) out << '"' << "legit" << '"'; else out << '"' << "spam" << '"'; out << " features=" << '"' << inst.featuress << '"' << ">" <<endl; for (int i = 0; i < inst.featuress; i++) { out << "<feature id=" << '"' << inst.featureIDD[i] << '"' << " freq=" << '"' << inst.frequencyy[i] << '"' << "> " << inst.featuree[i] << " </feature>"<< endl; } out << "</message>" << endl; return out; } istream& operator>>(istream& in, Instance& inst) { //Overloading of the >> operator for Instance. string word; string numbers = ""; string filenamee2 = ""; bool categoryy2 = 0; unsigned featuress2; string featuree2; unsigned featureIDD2; unsigned frequencyy2; unsigned i; unsigned y; while(in >> word) { if (word == "<message") {//if at beginning of message in >> word;//grab filename word for (y=6; word[y]!='"'; y++) {//pull out filename from between quotes filenamee2 += word[y];} in >> word;//grab category word if (word[10] == 's') categoryy2 = 1; in >> word;//grab features word for (y=10; word[y]!='"'; y++) { numbers += word[y];} featuress2 = atoi(numbers.c_str());//convert string of numbers to integer Instance tempp2(featuress2);//make a temporary Instance object to hold values read in tempp2.setFileName(filenamee2);//set temp object to filename read in tempp2.setCategory(categoryy2); for (i=0; i<featuress2; i++) {//loop reading in feature reports for message in >> word >> word >> word;//skip two words numbers = "";//reset numbers string for (int y=4; word[y]!='"'; y++) {//grab feature ID numbers += word[y];} featureIDD2 = atoi(numbers.c_str()); in >> word;// numbers = ""; for (int y=6; word[y]!='"'; y++) {//grab frequency numbers += word[y];} frequencyy2 = atoi(numbers.c_str()); in >> word;//grab actual feature string featuree2 = word; tempp2.setFeature(i, featuree2, featureIDD2, frequencyy2); }//all done reading in and setting features in >> word;//read in last part of message : </message> inst = tempp2;//set inst (reference) to tempp2 (tempp2 will be destroyed at end of function call) return in; } } } and instancepool.cpp: // Here we implement the functions of the class apart from the inline ones #include "instancepool.h" #include "instance.h" #include <iostream> #include <string> #include <vector> #include <stdlib.h> using namespace std; InstancePool::InstancePool()//Default constructor. Creates an InstancePool object that contains no Instance objects { instances = 0; ipp.clear(); } InstancePool::~InstancePool() { ipp.clear();} InstancePool::InstancePool(const InstancePool& original) {//Copy constructor. instances = original.instances; for (int i = 0; i<instances; i++) { ipp.push_back(original.ipp[i]); } } unsigned InstancePool::getNumberOfInstances() const {//Returns the number of Instance objects the the InstancePool contains. return instances;} const Instance& InstancePool::operator[](unsigned index) const {//Overloading of the [] operator for InstancePool. return ipp[index];} InstancePool& InstancePool::operator=(const InstancePool& right) {//Overloading the assignment operator for InstancePool. if(this == &right) return *this; ipp.clear(); instances = right.instances; for(unsigned i = 0; i < instances; i++) { ipp.push_back(right.ipp[i]); } return *this; } istream& operator>>(istream& in, InstancePool& ip) {//Overloading of the >> operator. ip.ipp.clear(); string word; string numbers; int total;//int to hold total number of messages in collection while(in >> word) { if (word == "<messagecollection"){ in >> word;//reads in total number of all messages for (int y=10; word[y]!='"'; y++){ numbers = ""; numbers += word[y]; } total = atoi(numbers.c_str()); for (int x = 0; x<total; x++) {//do loop for each message in collection in >> ip.ipp[x];//use instance friend function and [] operator to fill in values and create Instance objects and read them intot he vector } } } } ostream& operator<<(ostream& out, const InstancePool& ip) {//Overloading of the << operator. out << "<messagecollection messages=" << '"' << '>' << ip.instances << '"'<< endl << endl; for (int z=0; z<ip.instances; z++) { out << ip[z];} out << endl<<"</messagecollection>\n"; } This code is currently not writing to files correctly either at least, I'm sure it has many problems. I hope my posting of so much is not too much, and any help would be very much appreciated. Thanks!

    Read the article

  • socket operation on nonsocket or bad file descriptor

    - by Magn3s1um
    I'm writing a pthread server which takes requests from clients and sends them back a bunch of .ppm files. Everything seems to go well, but sometimes when I have just 1 client connected, when trying to read from the file descriptor (for the file), it says Bad file Descriptor. This doesn't make sense, since my int fd isn't -1, and the file most certainly exists. Other times, I get this "Socket operation on nonsocket" error. This is weird because other times, it doesn't give me this error and everything works fine. When trying to connect multiple clients, for some reason, it will only send correctly to one, and then the other client gets the bad file descriptor or "nonsocket" error, even though both threads are processing the same messages and do the same routines. Anyone have an idea why? Here's the code that is giving me that error: while(mqueue.head != mqueue.tail && count < dis_m){ printf("Sending to client %s: %s\n", pointer->id, pointer->message); int fd; fd = open(pointer->message, O_RDONLY); char buf[58368]; int bytesRead; printf("This is fd %d\n", fd); bytesRead=read(fd,buf,58368); send(pointer->socket,buf,bytesRead,0); perror("Error:\n"); fflush(stdout); close(fd); mqueue.mcount--; mqueue.head = mqueue.head->next; free(pointer->message); free(pointer); pointer = mqueue.head; count++; } printf("Sending %s\n", pointer->message); int fd; fd = open(pointer->message, O_RDONLY); printf("This is fd %d\n", fd); printf("I am hhere2\n"); char buf[58368]; int bytesRead; bytesRead=read(fd,buf,58368); send(pointer->socket,buf,bytesRead,0); perror("Error:\n"); close(fd); mqueue.mcount--; if(mqueue.head != mqueue.tail){ mqueue.head = mqueue.head->next; } else{ mqueue.head->next = malloc(sizeof(struct message)); mqueue.head = mqueue.head->next; mqueue.head->next = malloc(sizeof(struct message)); mqueue.tail = mqueue.head->next; mqueue.head->message = NULL; } free(pointer->message); free(pointer); pthread_mutex_unlock(&numm); pthread_mutex_unlock(&circ); pthread_mutex_unlock(&slots); The messages for both threads are the same, being of the form ./path/imageXX.ppm where XX is the number that should go to the client. The file size of each image is 58368 bytes. Sometimes, this code hangs on the read, and stops execution. I don't know this would be either, because the file descriptor comes back as valid. Thanks in advanced. Edit: Here's some sample output: Sending to client a: ./support/images/sw90.ppm This is fd 4 Error: : Socket operation on non-socket Sending to client a: ./support/images/sw91.ppm This is fd 4 Error: : Socket operation on non-socket Sending ./support/images/sw92.ppm This is fd 4 I am hhere2 Error: : Socket operation on non-socket My dispatcher has defeated evil Sample with 2 clients (client b was serviced first) Sending to client b: ./support/images/sw87.ppm This is fd 6 Error: : Success Sending to client b: ./support/images/sw88.ppm This is fd 6 Error: : Success Sending to client b: ./support/images/sw89.ppm This is fd 6 Error: : Success This is fd 6 Error: : Bad file descriptor Sending to client a: ./support/images/sw85.ppm This is fd 6 Error: As you can see, who ever is serviced first in this instance can open the files, but not the 2nd person. Edit2: Full code. Sorry, its pretty long and terribly formatted. #include <netinet/in.h> #include <netinet/in.h> #include <netdb.h> #include <arpa/inet.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <errno.h> #include <stdio.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <pthread.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <string.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/stat.h> #include <fcntl.h> #include "ring.h" /* Version 1 Here is what is implemented so far: The threads are created from the arguments specified (number of threads that is) The server will lock and update variables based on how many clients are in the system and such. The socket that is opened when a new client connects, must be passed to the threads. To do this, we need some sort of global array. I did this by specifying an int client and main_pool_busy, and two pointers poolsockets and nonpoolsockets. My thinking on this was that when a new client enters the system, the server thread increments the variable client. When a thread is finished with this client (after it sends it the data), the thread will decrement client and close the socket. HTTP servers act this way sometimes (they terminate the socket as soon as one transmission is sent). *Note down at bottom After the server portion increments the client counter, we must open up a new socket (denoted by new_sd) and get this value to the appropriate thread. To do this, I created global array poolsockets, which will hold all the socket descriptors for our pooled threads. The server portion gets the new socket descriptor, and places the value in the first spot of the array that has a 0. We only place a value in this array IF: 1. The variable main_pool_busy < worknum (If we have more clients in the system than in our pool, it doesn't mean we should always create a new thread. At the end of this, the server signals on the condition variable clientin that a new client has arrived. In our pooled thread, we then must walk this array and check the array until we hit our first non-zero value. This is the socket we will give to that thread. The thread then changes the array to have a zero here. What if our all threads in our pool our busy? If this is the case, then we will know it because our threads in this pool will increment main_pool_busy by one when they are working on a request and decrement it when they are done. If main_pool_busy >= worknum, then we must dynamically create a new thread. Then, we must realloc the size of our nonpoolsockets array by 1 int. We then add the new socket descriptor to our pool. Here's what we need to figure out: NOTE* Each worker should generate 100 messages which specify the worker thread ID, client socket descriptor and a copy of the client message. Additionally, each message should include a message number, starting from 0 and incrementing for each subsequent message sent to the same client. I don't know how to keep track of how many messages were to the same client. Maybe we shouldn't close the socket descriptor, but rather keep an array of structs for each socket that includes how many messages they have been sent. Then, the server adds the struct, the threads remove it, then the threads add it back once they've serviced one request (unless the count is 100). ------------------------------------------------------------- CHANGES Version 1 ---------- NONE: this is the first version. */ #define MAXSLOTS 30 #define dis_m 15 //problems with dis_m ==1 //Function prototypes void inc_clients(); void init_mutex_stuff(pthread_t*, pthread_t*); void *threadpool(void *); void server(int); void add_to_socket_pool(int); void inc_busy(); void dec_busy(); void *dispatcher(); void create_message(long, int, int, char *, char *); void init_ring(); void add_to_ring(char *, char *, int, int, int); int socket_from_string(char *); void add_to_head(char *); void add_to_tail(char *); struct message * reorder(struct message *, struct message *, int); int get_threadid(char *); void delete_socket_messages(int); struct message * merge(struct message *, struct message *, int); int get_request(char *, char *, char*); ///////////////////// //Global mutexes and condition variables pthread_mutex_t startservice; pthread_mutex_t numclients; pthread_mutex_t pool_sockets; pthread_mutex_t nonpool_sockets; pthread_mutex_t m_pool_busy; pthread_mutex_t slots; pthread_mutex_t numm; pthread_mutex_t circ; pthread_cond_t clientin; pthread_cond_t m; /////////////////////////////////////// //Global variables int clients; int main_pool_busy; int * poolsockets, nonpoolsockets; int worknum; struct ring mqueue; /////////////////////////////////////// int main(int argc, char ** argv){ //error handling if not enough arguments to program if(argc != 3){ printf("Not enough arguments to server: ./server portnum NumThreadsinPool\n"); _exit(-1); } //Convert arguments from strings to integer values int port = atoi(argv[1]); worknum = atoi(argv[2]); //Start server portion server(port); } /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// //The listen server thread///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// void server(int port){ int sd, new_sd; struct sockaddr_in name, cli_name; int sock_opt_val = 1; int cli_len; pthread_t threads[worknum]; //create our pthread id array pthread_t dis[1]; //create our dispatcher array (necessary to create thread) init_mutex_stuff(threads, dis); //initialize mutexes and stuff //Server setup /////////////////////////////////////////////////////// if ((sd = socket (AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0)) < 0) { perror("(servConn): socket() error"); _exit (-1); } if (setsockopt (sd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_REUSEADDR, (char *) &sock_opt_val, sizeof(sock_opt_val)) < 0) { perror ("(servConn): Failed to set SO_REUSEADDR on INET socket"); _exit (-1); } name.sin_family = AF_INET; name.sin_port = htons (port); name.sin_addr.s_addr = htonl(INADDR_ANY); if (bind (sd, (struct sockaddr *)&name, sizeof(name)) < 0) { perror ("(servConn): bind() error"); _exit (-1); } listen (sd, 5); //End of server Setup ////////////////////////////////////////////////// for (;;) { cli_len = sizeof (cli_name); new_sd = accept (sd, (struct sockaddr *) &cli_name, &cli_len); printf ("Assigning new socket descriptor: %d\n", new_sd); inc_clients(); //New client has come in, increment clients add_to_socket_pool(new_sd); //Add client to the pool of sockets if (new_sd < 0) { perror ("(servConn): accept() error"); _exit (-1); } } pthread_exit(NULL); //Quit } //Adds the new socket to the array designated for pthreads in the pool void add_to_socket_pool(int socket){ pthread_mutex_lock(&m_pool_busy); //Lock so that we can check main_pool_busy int i; //If not all our main pool is busy, then allocate to one of them if(main_pool_busy < worknum){ pthread_mutex_unlock(&m_pool_busy); //unlock busy, we no longer need to hold it pthread_mutex_lock(&pool_sockets); //Lock the socket pool array so that we can edit it without worry for(i = 0; i < worknum; i++){ //Find a poolsocket that is -1; then we should put the real socket there. This value will be changed back to -1 when the thread grabs the sockfd if(poolsockets[i] == -1){ poolsockets[i] = socket; pthread_mutex_unlock(&pool_sockets); //unlock our pool array, we don't need it anymore inc_busy(); //Incrememnt busy (locks the mutex itself) pthread_cond_signal(&clientin); //Signal first thread waiting on a client that a client needs to be serviced break; } } } else{ //Dynamic thread creation goes here pthread_mutex_unlock(&m_pool_busy); } } //Increments the client number. If client number goes over worknum, we must dynamically create new pthreads void inc_clients(){ pthread_mutex_lock(&numclients); clients++; pthread_mutex_unlock(&numclients); } //Increments busy void inc_busy(){ pthread_mutex_lock(&m_pool_busy); main_pool_busy++; pthread_mutex_unlock(&m_pool_busy); } //Initialize all of our mutexes at the beginning and create our pthreads void init_mutex_stuff(pthread_t * threads, pthread_t * dis){ pthread_mutex_init(&startservice, NULL); pthread_mutex_init(&numclients, NULL); pthread_mutex_init(&pool_sockets, NULL); pthread_mutex_init(&nonpool_sockets, NULL); pthread_mutex_init(&m_pool_busy, NULL); pthread_mutex_init(&circ, NULL); pthread_cond_init (&clientin, NULL); main_pool_busy = 0; poolsockets = malloc(sizeof(int)*worknum); int threadreturn; //error checking variables long i = 0; //Loop and create pthreads for(i; i < worknum; i++){ threadreturn = pthread_create(&threads[i], NULL, threadpool, (void *) i); poolsockets[i] = -1; if(threadreturn){ perror("Thread pool created unsuccessfully"); _exit(-1); } } pthread_create(&dis[0], NULL, dispatcher, NULL); } ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// /////////Main pool routines ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// void dec_busy(){ pthread_mutex_lock(&m_pool_busy); main_pool_busy--; pthread_mutex_unlock(&m_pool_busy); } void dec_clients(){ pthread_mutex_lock(&numclients); clients--; pthread_mutex_unlock(&numclients); } //This is what our threadpool pthreads will be running. void *threadpool(void * threadid){ long id = (long) threadid; //Id of this thread int i; int socket; int counter = 0; //Try and gain access to the next client that comes in and wait until server signals that a client as arrived while(1){ pthread_mutex_lock(&startservice); //lock start service (required for cond wait) pthread_cond_wait(&clientin, &startservice); //wait for signal from server that client exists pthread_mutex_unlock(&startservice); //unlock mutex. pthread_mutex_lock(&pool_sockets); //Lock the pool socket so we can get the socket fd unhindered/interrupted for(i = 0; i < worknum; i++){ if(poolsockets[i] != -1){ socket = poolsockets[i]; poolsockets[i] = -1; pthread_mutex_unlock(&pool_sockets); } } printf("Thread #%d is past getting the socket\n", id); int incoming = 1; while(counter < 100 && incoming != 0){ char buffer[512]; bzero(buffer,512); int startcounter = 0; incoming = read(socket, buffer, 512); if(buffer[0] != 0){ //client ID:priority:request:arguments char id[100]; long prior; char request[100]; char arg1[100]; char message[100]; char arg2[100]; char * point; point = strtok(buffer, ":"); strcpy(id, point); point = strtok(NULL, ":"); prior = atoi(point); point = strtok(NULL, ":"); strcpy(request, point); point = strtok(NULL, ":"); strcpy(arg1, point); point = strtok(NULL, ":"); if(point != NULL){ strcpy(arg2, point); } int fd; if(strcmp(request, "start_movie") == 0){ int count = 1; while(count <= 100){ char temp[10]; snprintf(temp, 50, "%d\0", count); strcpy(message, "./support/images/"); strcat(message, arg1); strcat(message, temp); strcat(message, ".ppm"); printf("This is message %s to %s\n", message, id); count++; add_to_ring(message, id, prior, counter, socket); //Adds our created message to the ring counter++; } printf("I'm out of the loop\n"); } else if(strcmp(request, "seek_movie") == 0){ int count = atoi(arg2); while(count <= 100){ char temp[10]; snprintf(temp, 10, "%d\0", count); strcpy(message, "./support/images/"); strcat(message, arg1); strcat(message, temp); strcat(message, ".ppm"); printf("This is message %s\n", message); count++; } } //create_message(id, socket, counter, buffer, message); //Creates our message from the input from the client. Stores it in buffer } else{ delete_socket_messages(socket); break; } } counter = 0; close(socket);//Zero out counter again } dec_clients(); //client serviced, decrement clients dec_busy(); //thread finished, decrement busy } //Creates a message void create_message(long threadid, int socket, int counter, char * buffer, char * message){ snprintf(message, strlen(buffer)+15, "%d:%d:%d:%s", threadid, socket, counter, buffer); } //Gets the socket from the message string (maybe I should just pass in the socket to another method) int socket_from_string(char * message){ char * substr1 = strstr(message, ":"); char * substr2 = substr1; substr2++; int occurance = strcspn(substr2, ":"); char sock[10]; strncpy(sock, substr2, occurance); return atoi(sock); } //Adds message to our ring buffer's head void add_to_head(char * message){ printf("Adding to head of ring\n"); mqueue.head->message = malloc(strlen(message)+1); //Allocate space for message strcpy(mqueue.head->message, message); //copy bytes into allocated space } //Adds our message to our ring buffer's tail void add_to_tail(char * message){ printf("Adding to tail of ring\n"); mqueue.tail->message = malloc(strlen(message)+1); //allocate space for message strcpy(mqueue.tail->message, message); //copy bytes into allocated space mqueue.tail->next = malloc(sizeof(struct message)); //allocate space for the next message struct } //Adds a message to our ring void add_to_ring(char * message, char * id, int prior, int mnum, int socket){ //printf("This is message %s:" , message); pthread_mutex_lock(&circ); //Lock the ring buffer pthread_mutex_lock(&numm); //Lock the message count (will need this to make sure we can't fill the buffer over the max slots) if(mqueue.head->message == NULL){ add_to_head(message); //Adds it to head mqueue.head->socket = socket; //Set message socket mqueue.head->priority = prior; //Set its priority (thread id) mqueue.head->mnum = mnum; //Set its message number (used for sorting) mqueue.head->id = malloc(sizeof(id)); strcpy(mqueue.head->id, id); } else if(mqueue.tail->message == NULL){ //This is the problem for dis_m 1 I'm pretty sure add_to_tail(message); mqueue.tail->socket = socket; mqueue.tail->priority = prior; mqueue.tail->mnum = mnum; mqueue.tail->id = malloc(sizeof(id)); strcpy(mqueue.tail->id, id); } else{ mqueue.tail->next = malloc(sizeof(struct message)); mqueue.tail = mqueue.tail->next; add_to_tail(message); mqueue.tail->socket = socket; mqueue.tail->priority = prior; mqueue.tail->mnum = mnum; mqueue.tail->id = malloc(sizeof(id)); strcpy(mqueue.tail->id, id); } mqueue.mcount++; pthread_mutex_unlock(&circ); if(mqueue.mcount >= dis_m){ pthread_mutex_unlock(&numm); pthread_cond_signal(&m); } else{ pthread_mutex_unlock(&numm); } printf("out of add to ring\n"); fflush(stdout); } ////////////////////////////////// //Dispatcher routines ///////////////////////////////// void *dispatcher(){ init_ring(); while(1){ pthread_mutex_lock(&slots); pthread_cond_wait(&m, &slots); pthread_mutex_lock(&numm); pthread_mutex_lock(&circ); printf("Dispatcher to the rescue!\n"); mqueue.head = reorder(mqueue.head, mqueue.tail, mqueue.mcount); //printf("This is the head %s\n", mqueue.head->message); //printf("This is the tail %s\n", mqueue.head->message); fflush(stdout); struct message * pointer = mqueue.head; int count = 0; while(mqueue.head != mqueue.tail && count < dis_m){ printf("Sending to client %s: %s\n", pointer->id, pointer->message); int fd; fd = open(pointer->message, O_RDONLY); char buf[58368]; int bytesRead; printf("This is fd %d\n", fd); bytesRead=read(fd,buf,58368); send(pointer->socket,buf,bytesRead,0); perror("Error:\n"); fflush(stdout); close(fd); mqueue.mcount--; mqueue.head = mqueue.head->next; free(pointer->message); free(pointer); pointer = mqueue.head; count++; } printf("Sending %s\n", pointer->message); int fd; fd = open(pointer->message, O_RDONLY); printf("This is fd %d\n", fd); printf("I am hhere2\n"); char buf[58368]; int bytesRead; bytesRead=read(fd,buf,58368); send(pointer->socket,buf,bytesRead,0); perror("Error:\n"); close(fd); mqueue.mcount--; if(mqueue.head != mqueue.tail){ mqueue.head = mqueue.head->next; } else{ mqueue.head->next = malloc(sizeof(struct message)); mqueue.head = mqueue.head->next; mqueue.head->next = malloc(sizeof(struct message)); mqueue.tail = mqueue.head->next; mqueue.head->message = NULL; } free(pointer->message); free(pointer); pthread_mutex_unlock(&numm); pthread_mutex_unlock(&circ); pthread_mutex_unlock(&slots); printf("My dispatcher has defeated evil\n"); } } void init_ring(){ mqueue.head = malloc(sizeof(struct message)); mqueue.head->next = malloc(sizeof(struct message)); mqueue.tail = mqueue.head->next; mqueue.mcount = 0; } struct message * reorder(struct message * begin, struct message * end, int num){ //printf("I am reordering for size %d\n", num); fflush(stdout); int i; if(num == 1){ //printf("Begin: %s\n", begin->message); begin->next = NULL; return begin; } else{ struct message * left = begin; struct message * right; int middle = num/2; for(i = 1; i < middle; i++){ left = left->next; } right = left -> next; left -> next = NULL; //printf("Begin: %s\nLeft: %s\nright: %s\nend:%s\n", begin->message, left->message, right->message, end->message); left = reorder(begin, left, middle); if(num%2 != 0){ right = reorder(right, end, middle+1); } else{ right = reorder(right, end, middle); } return merge(left, right, num); } } struct message * merge(struct message * left, struct message * right, int num){ //printf("I am merginging! left: %s %d, right: %s %dnum: %d\n", left->message,left->priority, right->message, right->priority, num); struct message * start, * point; int lenL= 0; int lenR = 0; int flagL = 0; int flagR = 0; int count = 0; int middle1 = num/2; int middle2; if(num%2 != 0){ middle2 = middle1+1; } else{ middle2 = middle1; } while(lenL < middle1 && lenR < middle2){ count++; //printf("In here for count %d\n", count); if(lenL == 0 && lenR == 0){ if(left->priority < right->priority){ start = left; //Set the start point point = left; //set our enum; left = left->next; //move the left pointer point->next = NULL; //Set the next node to NULL lenL++; } else if(left->priority > right->priority){ start = right; point = right; right = right->next; point->next = NULL; lenR++; } else{ if(left->mnum < right->mnum){ ////printf("This is where we are\n"); start = left; //Set the start point point = left; //set our enum; left = left->next; //move the left pointer point->next = NULL; //Set the next node to NULL lenL++; } else{ start = right; point = right; right = right->next; point->next = NULL; lenR++; } } } else{ if(left->priority < right->priority){ point->next = left; left = left->next; //move the left pointer point = point->next; point->next = NULL; //Set the next node to NULL lenL++; } else if(left->priority > right->priority){ point->next = right; right = right->next; point = point->next; point->next = NULL; lenR++; } else{ if(left->mnum < right->mnum){ point->next = left; //set our enum; left = left->next; point = point->next;//move the left pointer point->next = NULL; //Set the next node to NULL lenL++; } else{ point->next = right; right = right->next; point = point->next; point->next = NULL; lenR++; } } } if(lenL == middle1){ flagL = 1; break; } if(lenR == middle2){ flagR = 1; break; } } if(flagL == 1){ point->next = right; point = point->next; for(lenR; lenR< middle2-1; lenR++){ point = point->next; } point->next = NULL; mqueue.tail = point; } else{ point->next = left; point = point->next; for(lenL; lenL< middle1-1; lenL++){ point = point->next; } point->next = NULL; mqueue.tail = point; } //printf("This is the start %s\n", start->message); //printf("This is mqueue.tail %s\n", mqueue.tail->message); return start; } void delete_socket_messages(int a){ }

    Read the article

< Previous Page | 80 81 82 83 84